AutoCAD Electrical 2008 User’s Guide February 20, 2007
007 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved Disclaimer This publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. AUTODESK, INC., MAKES NO WARRANTY, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS, AND MAKES SUCH MATERIALS AVAILABLE SOLELY ON AN "AS-IS" BASIS. IN NO EVENT SHALL AUTODESK, INC.
Portions of this software include one or more Boost libraries. Use of the Boost libraries is subject to its license agreement http://www.boost.org/LICENSE_1_0.txt. Stingray Objective Toolkit & Objective Grid © Rogue Wave Software, Inc.. promis-e® is a registered trademark of ECT International, Inc.. GOVERNMENT USE Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Contents Chapter 1 AutoCAD Electrical What's New . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 What's New in AutoCAD Electrical 2008 . What's New in Previous Releases . . . . . What's New in 2005 Release . . . . . . . What's New in 2006 Release . . . . . . . What's New in 2007 Release . . . . . . . Chapter 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 . .9 . 12 . 13 .
Overview of the project file format . . . . . . Archive a project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Work with Multiple Clients . . . . . . . . . . Overview of set up for multiple clients . Chapter 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 . 82 . 83 . 83 Drawing and Project Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Overview of project and drawing properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Use replaceable parameters . . .
Insert PLC modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of the PLC database file . . . . . . . . . . . . . Single, Stand-Alone I/O Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modify single, stand-alone PLC layout symbols . . Work with PLC styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modify a PLC appearance style . . . . . . . . . . . Create a new PLC style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Add a new PLC style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create PLC I/O Drawings from Spreadsheets . . . . . . .
Chapter 7 Component Attribute Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399 Edit attribute values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Force attributes to layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manipulate component text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manipulate terminal text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Move description values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manipulate Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reposition Wire Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . Reposition wire numbers . . . . . . . . . Modify Wire Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modify wire numbers . . . . . . . . . . . Erase or Hide Wire Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . Erase or hide wire numbers . . . . . . . . Wire Sequencing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control from/to report connection sequencing . Add custom signal arrow styles . . . . . . . . . Edit the cable conductor database . . . . . . . . Source and Destination Markers . . . .
Start the Surfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Continue a previous surf session . . . . Move between drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . Plot one or more drawings . . . . . . . . . . . Create a project-wide script file . . . . . . . . Track drawing changes . . . . . . . . . . . . Translate description text . . . . . . . . . . . Publish to the web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Title Block Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Use drawing title blocks . . . . . . . . . Link information to the title block . . .
Modify spreadsheet data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create user-defined attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Export to Autodesk Inventor Professional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Set up for export to Autodesk Inventor Professional Cable & Harness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1022 . 1022 . 1026 .
Convert Arrows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Convert non-AutoCAD Electrical arrows . Overview of ECDS legacy conversion . . . . . Tagging and Linking Tools . . . . . . . . . . . Use tagging and linking tools . . . . . . Overview of block/attribute mapping . . Chapter 18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1132 . 1132 . 1133 . 1137 . 1137 . 1151 Miscellaneous Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1 AutoCAD Electrical What's New In this chapter ■ What's New in AutoCAD Electrical 2008 ■ What's New in Previous Releases ■ What's New in 2005 Release ■ What's New in 2006 Release ■ What's New in 2007 Release 1
What's New in AutoCAD Electrical 2008 PLC I/O Import/Export You can now communicate your electrical designs between AutoCAD Electrical and Schneider Electric’s Unity Pro. Employing the widely used XML language format, you can transfer design data back and forth while maintaining structure and organization.
Surfable Reports When reports are placed into a drawing as a table, you can click on various report cells to quickly find the corresponding devices within the schematic or panel layout drawings in the active project. When surfing on a table inserted by the Terminal Strip Editor, you can click the title cell to surf on the Tagstrip value, even if the Tagstrip is not included in the title.
Icon Menu Wizard Enhancements The Icon Menu Wizard allows you to easily customize the icon menus. You can now copy and paste icons from one submenu into another, drag and drop icons to place those that are commonly used at the top of the Symbol Preview window and those that are used less frequently at the bottom of the window, and create new icons to use when inserting components. You can also easily modify the existing icon or menu properties like changing the name, image or block name.
a new terminal strip definition in the project and maintain its properties in the graphical terminal strip layout drawing. The Terminal Strip Editor dialog box now has an enhanced grid control with bolder grid lines that provide better visual definition for the terminal strip. Other enhancements to the dialog box include: ■ The Terminal Pin (TPin) column is now “T.” ■ The TERM column is now “Number” to indicate the terminal numbering, whether it is a wire number or user-defined number.
Multi-Level Terminals Multi-level terminal blocks are quickly becoming an industry standard. Using AutoCAD Electrical, you can define and manage the terminal numbers and levels as well as all connectivity information with no added complexity. You can now associate schematic terminals to build a multi-level terminal block that is limited to the number of levels defined in the block properties.
Pin List Data Management Pin list data is now managed based on manufacturer. Use the Pin List Database Editor tool to select the pin list table to edit or create a new table. The _PINLIST table in the default_cat.mdb file now uses a single PINLIST column and a single PEER_PINLIST column. The continuation columns have been removed.
owned by AutoCAD, double-clicking the file in Windows Explorer automatically opens the file in AutoCAD. When you move the cursor over a DWG icon, the tooltip identifies which Autodesk product and version was used to create the DWG. Parametric Twisted Pair Symbol Enhancements The icon menus are enhanced to include three new parametric twisted pair symbols. To insert a twisted pair symbol, click Components > Insert Component. On the Insert Component icon menu, click Cable Markers.
What's New in Previous Releases The chart below shows which features were added or enhanced in past releases of AutoCAD Electrical. Click the ‘x’ for detailed information on what was added or enhanced for a particular release.
Feature Help Updates 2005 2006 2007 X (page 14) X (page 8) Connector Generation X (page 15) Splice Tool X (page 16) Wire Number Placement X (page 16) Multiple Wire Bus X (page 18) Bend Wire Tool X (page 17) New Symbol Libraries X (page 18) Real-time Error Checking X (page 18) User Defined Attributes X (page 18) Wire Label Report X (page 19) New Project Tool X (page 20) New Drawing Tool X (page 20) Wire Type Selection X (page 20) Autodesk Productstream Integration X (page 21)
Feature 2005 2006 2007 2008 Cross-Reference Updates X (page 19) Table Style Cross-Reference Updates X (page 19) Enhanced Drawing Audit Report X (page 19) Improved Performance X (page 20) X (page 7) Insert Components from a Menu X (page 15) X (page 3) Icon Menu Wizard Enhancements X (page 4) PLC I/O Import/Export X (page 2) Spreadsheet to PLC I/O Utility Enhancements X (page 2) Surfable Reports X (page 3) Direct Wire Sequencing X (page 4) Inserting Spare Terminals X (page 5) Mult
Feature 2005 2006 2007 2008 DWG Product Recognition X (page 7) InfoCenter X (page 8) User’s Guide X (page 8) What's New in 2005 Release Terminal Strip Editor The Terminal Strip Editor tool automatically creates accurate terminal strip drawings in either a graphical or table format. You can now manage and edit terminals used throughout an entire project through a simple interface.
Vault Integration The Vault Explorer and Vault Server are now included with AutoCAD Electrical to help manage your engineering data. Enhanced Link to Autodesk Inventor Professional The link to Autodesk Inventor Professional has been enhanced to support cable information instead of simple discrete wires.
into schematic drawings. You choose the component location and a physical schematic representation of each device to be inserted into the layout and a "link" is automatically created between the devices. Any changes to the either schematic or panel representation updates the other. MDI Aware You can now have multiple drawings open at any one time. This allows you to cut and paste design information between two open drawings without closing one of them.
Topics dialog box, select Print the selected heading and all subtopics and press OK. AutoCAD Electrical Launchpad Use the new AutoCAD Electrical Launchpad to quickly access the Getting Started Manual, AutoCAD Electrical newsgroup, white papers, and more What's New in 2007 Release Connector Generation Automatically generate a multi-pin parametric connector on the fly with the new Insert Connector command.
Component. On the Insert Component icon menu, click Miscellaneous ➤ Shields ➤ Twisted Pair. Wire Collision Avoidance Instead of drawing each line segment between components on your point to point drawings, simply select the two connection points and let AutoCAD Electrical do the rest. Using the existing the Insert Wire command, select a connection point on each component and your wire is automatically routed, without running through your existing geometry.
Bend Wires Bend a wire into a right angle turn to avoid or add geometry using the new Bend Wire tool. When a wire is defined at a right angle, you can modify the wire and create a new right angle bend while maintaining the original wire connections to the components. Reposition Wire Number Leaders When defining wire number leaders you can type "C" at the command prompt to go into a wire leader collapse mode to collapse the wire leader back to the wire number block.
Multi-discipline Symbol Libraries AutoCAD Electrical now includes comprehensive symbol libraries for creating pneumatic, hydraulic, and P & ID drawings. ■ Hydraulic Symbol Library: AutoCAD Electrical's hydraulic symbol library includes filters, valves, cylinders, pressure switches, motors, pumps, meters, restrictors, quick disconnects, flow arrows and more, all adhering to the NFPA/T3.10.4R1-1990 and AS1101.1-1993 standards.
defined inside of AutoCAD Electrical for each component category are processed in the project database and subsequent reports. Table style cross-referencing updates Tabular cross-referencing styles now function at the same level as graphical and text styles. Create customizable tables, updated your drawing in real-time and benefit from increased flexibility with the way you display cross-referencing information.
all wires in your display. This report can be exported as a script file for post processing or sent directly to a printer. Catalog Content Updates AutoCAD Electrical ships with a manufacturer's catalog database that contains over 45,000 components from the industry's most popular vendors. These components provide a full spectrum of input and output devices including switches, sensors, lights and numerous panel devices, such as wire way and panel enclosures.
Wire Type dialog box where you can quickly assign the wire type. You can use this hotkey with the following commands: ■ Wires > Insert Wire ■ Wires > Angle Wires > Insert 22.5 Degree Wire (also 45 or 67.5) ■ Wires > Multiple Wire Bus ■ Wires > Add Rung ■ Wires > Ladders > Insert Ladder Use the new Create/Edit Wire Type tool to create new or edit existing wire types or use the new Change/Convert Wire Type tool to convert lines to wires.
You can now check out individual files as they are needed rather than having to check out the entire project at once while maintaining drawing file versioning. The multi-user environment in AutoCAD Electrical now provides drawing status indicators and better control of project-wide commands when you are logged into Autodesk Vault. You can now get previous versions of the drawing or project file.
2 Project Management In this chapter ■ Overview of AutoCAD Electrical Help ■ Overview of projects ■ About collaborative design ■ Create a new drawing ■ Change drawing display options ■ Overview of project related files ■ Overview of the project file format ■ Archive a project ■ Work with Multiple Clients ■ Miscellaneous Reference files 23
Overview of AutoCAD Electrical Help The AutoCAD Electrical Help system is a browser-based system available through context-sensitive links or by accessing it through the Help menu or icon. Key features of the Help system include: ■ The Help home page is designed for new users. It provides access to the basic Procedure topics. ■ There is on-demand access from the F1 function key, menus, dialog boxes and the menu bar.
above the topic title. You can click a tab to go to the other available topic types. ■ Procedure topics provide step-by-step procedures for accomplishing AutoCAD Electrical tasks. ■ Reference topics offer detailed descriptions of elements in the dialog box. ■ Concept topics provide conceptual information about tools and tasks and may explain related concepts. There are See Also links at the bottom of the topic that display a list of related topics.
Index You can enter a word in the box to locate the term in the alphabetical index. Double-click the term to display the topic, or if multiple topics, to open a list of topics found. Search You can enter a search word in the box and click List Topics to view a list of topics that contain the search word anywhere in their content. Click a title, and then click Display (or double-click a title) to open the topic.
■ Press F1 to open the Procedure or Reference Help topic for the active command. ■ In an open dialog box, press F1 or click Help to open the Reference topic for the active command. To customize Help Use any of the following methods to customize Help. ■ Click the Hide or Show button in the Help toolbar to control the visibility of the tabbed pane beside the content window. ■ To add a topic to the Favorites tab, select a Help topic, click the Favorites tab, and then click Add.
■ OR Use OR to search for topics with at least one of your search criteria. ■ NEAR Use Near to search for specified text within close proximity to each other. ■ NOT Use NOT to search for topics that do not include your search criteria. To print Help You can print a single file or you can print sections of the Help. 1 In the Help Contents tab, right-click on a heading and select Print. 2 Select whether to print the selected topic or the selected heading and all subheadings.
The AutoCAD Electrical Launchpad screen appears. The Launchpad has two sections. The top section is for first-time users. It has links to white papers, the Getting Started manual, the AutoCAD Electrical newsgroup, and frequently asked questions. The bottom section has links to places for additional information about AutoCAD Electrical. You can find out what's new in the current release, link to the Advanced Productivity home page, and find out more about additional Autodesk products.
top of the list. The list of recent projects is saved in a text file called lastproj.fil in the user subdirectory (\Documents and Settings\{username}\Application Data\Autodesk\AutoCAD Electrical\{release #}\{country code}\Support\User). Each line in this file gives the information for one project.
Create a new project 1 Click the Project Manager tool. 2 On the Project Manager, click the New Project button. NOTE You can also create a new project by right-clicking at the bottom of the tree inside the Project Manager and selecting New Project or by clicking the arrow on the Project Selection menu and selecting New Project. 3 In the Create New Project dialog box, enter the name for the new project. The .WDP extension is automatically added to the filename.
2 On the Project Manager, click the New Drawing button. 3 Create a new drawing (page 63) and click OK. 4 In the Project Manager, right-click the project name and select Add Active Drawing. The drawing is added to the end of the existing list. Add existing drawings to the current project 1 Click the Project Manager tool. 2 In the Project Manager, right-click the project name, and select Add Drawings. 3 In the Select Files to Add dialog box, select the drawings to be added to the current project.
3 Enter the name of the project to copy. NOTE All drawings must be closed before they can be copied to a new project. ■ Click Copy active project to copy the current project. ■ Click Browse to select a project to copy. 4 Click OK. 5 Select the directory where you want to save the new project. 6 Enter the name for the new project. The .WDP extension is automatically added to the filename. 7 Click Save. 8 Select one or more drawings to copy to the new project.
Project-related files to be copied On the Copy Project: Step 4 -- Enter Base Path for Project Drawings dialog box you can select the project-related files to be copied to the new path. Options include: ■ Title block setup (.wdt) ■ Project line labels (.wdl) ■ Component description defaults (.wdd) ■ Catalog lookup database (cat.mdb) ■ Footprint lookup database (lookup.mdb) ■ Family code mapping (wd_fam.dat) ■ Wire color/gauge label (.wdw) ■ Schematic lookup database (schematic_lookup.
whole project (default) or, using this section/subsection coding, on just a portion of the drawing set. 1 Click the Project Manager tool. 2 In the Project Manager, right-click the drawing name, and select Properties ➤ Drawing Properties. 3 In the Drawing Properties dialog box, click the Settings (page 114)tab. 4 In the Sheet Values section, enter a section or subsection code for the drawing. 5 Click OK.
cross-referencing operations. You can change the drawing order using the Reorder Drawings tool. 1 Click the Project Manager tool. 2 In the Project Manager, right-click the project name, and select Reorder Drawings. 3 Find and highlight the drawing you want to move in the list. 4 Click Move Up or Move Down repeatedly until the drawing moves to the appropriate position in the list. 5 Click OK. Remove a drawing from the active project 1 Click the Project Manager tool.
details can make it easier to find a specific drawing among dozens or hundreds in a project file. 1 Click the Project Manager tool. 2 In the Project Manager, right-click the drawing name, and select Properties ➤ Drawing Properties. 3 In the Drawing Properties ➤ Settings (page 114) dialog box, enter a description for the drawing. Select from a list of predefined descriptions from the active project by clicking the arrow. 4 Click OK.
the list. The list of recent projects is saved in a text file called lastproj.fil in the user subdirectory. 1 Click the Project Manager tool. 2 In the Project Manager, click the arrow on the Project Selection menu, and select Recent. 3 In the Recent Projects dialog box, select the project from the list. 4 Click Drawings to see a list of the drawings in the selected project. In the Project Drawings dialog box, double-click a drawing name to see a preview of that drawing.
to display options to move, size, close, dock, hide, or set the transparency for the Project Manager. Access: Click the Project Manager tool. Click Projects ➤ Project ➤ Project Manager. Right-click menu You can right-click in empty space in the Project Manager to display the following options: New Project Creates a new project. Once created, the new project automatically becomes the active project. New Drawing Creates a new drawing file and adds it to the active project.
Open Project from Vault (you must be logged into the vault) Allows you to browse to the vault to open a project and make it active inside of the Project Manager. In the Select Project dialog box, navigate to the project to open and select it. Click the arrow next to the Open button and select one of the following options: Open (Check Out), Open (Check Out All), or Open Read-Only. Buttons New Project Creates a new project. Once created, the new project automatically becomes the active project.
Project-Wide Update/Retag Updates the related line reference numbers, cross-reference text, device tagging, and signal reference updates on the selected drawing files inside of the active project. Drawing List Display Configuration Configures the display options. There are 10 values that can be associated with the drawings listed so you can display the information based on your requirements. Publish/Plot Batch plots one or more drawings in the active project.
Add Active Drawing Adds an active drawing to the active project. The new drawing appears at the end of the project drawing list. When prompted, specify whether to apply the project default values to the drawing settings (in the WD_M block definition). Reorder Drawings Moves drawings up or down in the project's drawing list. The order determines how the drawings are processed for project-wide tagging and cross-referencing operations. Remove Drawings Removes one or more drawings from the current project.
Vault You must be logged into the vault to see this menu in the Project Manager. The status of the selected object determines which vault commands are available for selection. Check In All Adds the project definition file (*.wdp) along with its drawing files to the vault. You can vault just the project file using the Project Check In command or you can vault the project file along with its drawing files using the project Check In All command. NOTE Files used to support the project (such as *.wdl and *.
to check out only the project definition file and none of its drawing file dependencies; otherwise use Check Out All. Undo Check Out/Undo Check Out All Removes the reservation/lock from the master project definition file. The master file is now available for others to check out. Any modifications made to the local copy are not checked back into the vault.
Indicates that a drawing file is a reference drawing. To make a drawing a reference drawing, right-click on the drawing name and select Properties ➤ Drawing Properties. Right-click the drawing name to display the following drawing editing options: Open Opens the selected drawing in a new window. You can also double-click a drawing name or select a drawing name and press Enter to open the drawing. Close Closes the selected drawing.
NOTE Drawing-specific information (found on the Drawing Properties ➤ Drawing Settings tab) cannot be copied from one drawing to another. Paste Applies the copied drawing settings and options from one drawing to the selected drawing(s). Settings Compare Displays differences between all drawing settings and their associated defaults in the project definition file. Check In (you must be logged into the vault) Adds a file to the vault and creates a new version of the file.
visible until a new drawing file is selected. Use the up and down arrow keys on your keyboard to switch drawings. Details Displays project and drawing detail based on what is highlighted in the Project pane. Information that is listed includes the status, file name, file location, file size, last saved date, and the name of the last user who modified the file. Preview Displays the last saved thumbnail view for the highlighted drawing in the drawing list.
The master file is checked out to you and the version you are working on is the same as in the vault. File is checked out to you, but the version you are working on is newer than the latest version in the vault. This typically means that you made changes to the model since the last time you checked out the file, but have not checked it back in. File is checked out to you, but the version you are working on is older than the master file in the vault.
Use this to define the minimum requirements to create an AutoCAD Electrical project definition file (WDP), the folder in which the project is maintained, and the settings and options defined within the project. Access: On the Project Manager, click the New Project button or select New Project from the Project Selection menu. From the Projects menu, select Project ➤ Project Manager. Click the New Project button or select New Project from the Project Selection menu.
Descriptions Specifies the project descriptions. Descriptions can be included in report headers and title blocks OK-Properties Creates the project definition file in the specified location before opening the Project Properties dialog box where you can define default settings and options for your project which are saved in the project definition file. Copy project: step 1 - select existing project to copy Access: Click the arrow on the Project Manager tool to access the Copy Project tool.
AutoCAD Vault ARX adds vaulting functionality to the Project Manager. Upon initial start-up of AutoCAD Electrical you are not logged into the vault. You must log into Autodesk Vault using the File ➤ Vault menu to vault projects. The vault commands are available by right-clicking a project or drawing within the AutoCAD Electrical Project Manager.
■ The vault is referred to as the virtual location of the files. Users do not work directly on the master files. A file must be checked out from the virtual location in the vault to a physical location in the working folder before it can be modified. ■ Each user must have a physical location on their disk mapped to the corresponding vault location. A folder that has been mapped to the root folder ("$") in a vault is called a working folder.
to display options to move, size, close, dock, hide, or set the transparency for the Project Manager. Access: Click the Project Manager tool. Click Projects ➤ Project ➤ Project Manager. Right-click menu You can right-click in empty space in the Project Manager to display the following options: New Project Creates a new project. Once created, the new project automatically becomes the active project. New Drawing Creates a new drawing file and adds it to the active project.
Open Project from Vault (you must be logged into the vault) Allows you to browse to the vault to open a project and make it active inside of the Project Manager. In the Select Project dialog box, navigate to the project to open and select it. Click the arrow next to the Open button and select one of the following options: Open (Check Out), Open (Check Out All), or Open Read-Only. Buttons New Project Creates a new project. Once created, the new project automatically becomes the active project.
Project-Wide Update/Retag Updates the related line reference numbers, cross-reference text, device tagging, and signal reference updates on the selected drawing files inside of the active project. Drawing List Display Configuration Configures the display options. There are 10 values that can be associated with the drawings listed so you can display the information based on your requirements. Publish/Plot Batch plots one or more drawings in the active project.
Add Active Drawing Adds an active drawing to the active project. The new drawing appears at the end of the project drawing list. When prompted, specify whether to apply the project default values to the drawing settings (in the WD_M block definition). Reorder Drawings Moves drawings up or down in the project's drawing list. The order determines how the drawings are processed for project-wide tagging and cross-referencing operations. Remove Drawings Removes one or more drawings from the current project.
Vault You must be logged into the vault to see this menu in the Project Manager. The status of the selected object determines which vault commands are available for selection. Check In All Adds the project definition file (*.wdp) along with its drawing files to the vault. You can vault just the project file using the Project Check In command or you can vault the project file along with its drawing files using the project Check In All command. NOTE Files used to support the project (such as *.wdl and *.
to check out only the project definition file and none of its drawing file dependencies; otherwise use Check Out All. Undo Check Out/Undo Check Out All Removes the reservation/lock from the master project definition file. The master file is now available for others to check out. Any modifications made to the local copy are not checked back into the vault.
Indicates that a drawing file is a reference drawing. To make a drawing a reference drawing, right-click on the drawing name and select Properties ➤ Drawing Properties. Right-click the drawing name to display the following drawing editing options: Open Opens the selected drawing in a new window. You can also double-click a drawing name or select a drawing name and press Enter to open the drawing. Close Closes the selected drawing.
NOTE Drawing-specific information (found on the Drawing Properties ➤ Drawing Settings tab) cannot be copied from one drawing to another. Paste Applies the copied drawing settings and options from one drawing to the selected drawing(s). Settings Compare Displays differences between all drawing settings and their associated defaults in the project definition file. Check In (you must be logged into the vault) Adds a file to the vault and creates a new version of the file.
visible until a new drawing file is selected. Use the up and down arrow keys on your keyboard to switch drawings. Details Displays project and drawing detail based on what is highlighted in the Project pane. Information that is listed includes the status, file name, file location, file size, last saved date, and the name of the last user who modified the file. Preview Displays the last saved thumbnail view for the highlighted drawing in the drawing list.
The master file is checked out to you and the version you are working on is the same as in the vault. File is checked out to you, but the version you are working on is newer than the latest version in the vault. This typically means that you made changes to the model since the last time you checked out the file, but have not checked it back in. File is checked out to you, but the version you are working on is older than the master file in the vault.
Create a new drawing Use the Project Manager to create a new drawing. 1 Click the Project Manager tool. 2 In the Project Manager, click the New Drawing tool. NOTE You can also create a new drawing by right-clicking at the bottom of the tree inside the Project Manager and selecting New Drawing or by right-clicking on the active project name and selecting New Drawing. 3 In the Create New Drawing dialog box, enter the name for the new drawing. The .dwg extension is automatically added to the file name.
9 (Optional) Click OK-Properties to define settings and options for your drawing. Changes you make through the Drawing Properties dialog box are saved as attribute values on the drawing's invisible WD_M block. 10 Click OK. Create new drawing Use this to create a drawing file to add to the active project. Access: On the Project Manager, click the New Drawing button. Click Projects ➤ Project ➤ Project Manager. On the Project Manager, click the New Drawing button.
For Reference Only Indicates that the drawing should not be included in tagging, cross-referencing, and reporting functions. If selected, the drawing is included in projectwide plotting and title block operations. Location Specifies the location for a drawing file. You can override the default location for the drawing file and create additional folders. If left blank, the drawing file is created at the same location as the active project's definition file.
Location Code Specifies the Location code for the WD_M block definition. This value can be used as the replaceable parameter %L. Drawing Displays a list of Installation or Location codes to select from the active drawing. Project Displays a list of previously defined Installation or Location codes to select from the active project or from the Default.INST or Default.LOC file. Sheet Values Component, wire, and cross-reference tagging use replaceable parameters in their format.
command is invoked, AutoCAD Electrical automatically inserts this block at 0,0.
Change drawing display options You can use the Drawing List Display Configuration tool to change the way your drawings are listed in the Project Manager. By default drawings are identified by the drawing file name in the Project Drawing List. 1 On the Project Manager, click the Drawing List Display Configuration tool. 2 Determine which display options to show in the drawing list.
Manager. Drawing List Display Example In this example, Sheet Number (%S) and Drawing Description 1 were selected as the display options and the separator value is a dash. Drawing List Before Drawing List After demo01.dwg demo02.dwg demo03.dwg 1 - Flow and Interconnection diagram, I/O list 2 - 3-phase motor control, Control circuit 3 - Power supplies, I/O module feeds Drawing list display configuration Configures the display options.
Separator Value Specifies which character to use between the values in the listing. Type the character in the input box or use the default (-). Always show selection highlight/Show selection highlight only when active Changes the way the selection highlights in the listing depending on whether the Project Manager is active or not.
Description defaults Lists various standard component description selections, accessible by clicking Defaults on the Insert/Edit Component and Panel Insert/Edit Component dialog boxes. This file can be a family-specific ASCII text file with a .wdd extension (for example, "PB.WDD" for family “PB” pushbuttons). If the family-specific file is not found, then it searches for a file with the same path and name as the active project with a .wdd extension (.wdd).
Family tag code map Overrides the family tag code of the library symbols by mapping the codes to new values. The tag code of a symbol is used in generating the tag-ID of inserted components, like the "PB" of tag-ID "PB101" or the "K" of tag-ID "-K25." The file WD_FAM.DAT is searched for in the subdirectory search sequence "A" below. This is an ASCII text file in the format of , . For example, the default family tag code for a JIC library pilot light is “LT” and generates tags such as “LT101.
Location codes Lists the default location codes for selections found in the Insert/Edit Component and Panel Insert/Edit Component dialog boxes (select Include external list from the location's Project list subdialog box). A file with the same path and name as the project with a .loc extension is searched for first. If the file is not found, then the DEFAULT.LOC file is searched for in the same directory as the project file and then in the subdirectory search sequence "A" below.
"30A|60A" would put "30A" into the first RATINGx attribute and "60A" into the RATING(x+1) attribute. A file with the same path and name as the project but with a .wdr extension is searched for first. If the file is not found, then the default WD_RATINGS.WDR file is searched for in the subdirectory search sequence "A" below. Alternately, a family-specific file can be accessed (for example, PS.WDR for pressure switches). Real time error checking The .wdn file is a text file used specifically for auditing.
A file with the same path and name as the project but with a .wdt extension is searched for first. If the file is not found, then the DEFAULT.WDT file is searched for in the same directory as the project file. If the file is not found, then the file is searched for in the subdirectory search sequence "A" below. User defined attributes An attribute text file of user-defined attributes defined on AutoCAD Electrical blocks.
6 AutoCAD Electrical support (C:\Program Files [(x86)]\Autodesk\Acade {version}\Support\) 7 AutoCAD Electrical support (C:\Program Files [(x86)]\Autodesk\Acade {version}\) 8 All paths defined under AutoCAD Options ➤ Files ➤ Support Files Search Path Subdirectory search sequence "B" 1 Full path (if full path name given) 2 User subdirectory (C:\Documents and Settings\{username}\Application Data\Autodesk\AutoCAD Electrical\{release #}\{country code}\Support\User\) 3 Catalog lookup subdirectory (C:\Documents a
2 User subdirectory (C:\Documents and Settings\{username}\Application Data\Autodesk\AutoCAD Electrical\{release number}\{country code}\Support\User\) 3 Catalog lookup subdirectory (C:\Documents and Settings\{username}\My Documents\Acade {version}\AeData\Catalogs\) 4 AutoCAD Electrical support (C:\Documents and Settings\{username}\Application Data\Autodesk\AutoCAD Electrical\{release #}\{country code}\Support\AeData\) 5 AutoCAD Electrical support (C:\Documents and Settings\{username}\Application Data\Autodes
Project default settings About 75 entries marked with "?[n]" in columns 1-4. Most of these values are mirrored on attributes carried by each drawing's invisible WD_M block. NOTE This current project "copy" of the drawing properties settings can migrate to each new AutoCAD Electrical drawing and overwrite the defaults carried on the WD_M.dwg library symbol as it inserts.
Panel icon menu file Marked with "+[4]" in columns 1-4 followed by file. This can be a full path or just the icon menu file name itself (such as ACE_PANEL_MENU.DAT). Real-time inter-drawing update Marked with "+[5]" followed by 1= automatic/real-time, 0= cross-reference command must be explicitly invoked. Use MISC_CAT table Marked with "+[6]" followed by 1=always use MISC_CAT for catalog lookup, 2= use MISC_CAT if component specific table not found, 0 or entry omitted = use component-specific only.
faults, 0 or missing= normal mode (don't auto-fill attribute values). Schematic- ➤ Panel wire format Marked with "+[16]" for the format that is to deal with wire connection entries when there is no existing terminal pin number text on the panel wiring diagram device footprint, meaning annotation ends up formatted into an Mtext entity, and "+[17]" for format of data written onto target TERMxx/WIRENOxx attributes carried on the panel wiring diagram device footprint.
Wire number terminal override Marked with "+[29]" followed by 0= normal wire numbering mode or 1=calculate reference-based wire number based on the location not the first terminal in the wire network (or revert to normal wire numbering mode if no terminal in the network). Calculation of the "CLEN" column Marked with "+[30]" and set as a global variable (default is 0.
NOTE The following options are no longer valid since they are now drawing settings: Cross-reference fill format (+[7]), Cross-reference text between (+[8]) and Cross-reference order (+[28]). Additionally Project scratch database (+[12]) has been replaced by the PDS. Archive a project The zip utility creates a zip file of the current project's .wdp file and one or more drawing files it references.
Project zip Creates a framework for zipping and archiving the current project's drawing set. Your zip program may generate an error message if the active drawing is one of the drawings to zip. Access: On the Project Manager, click the arrow on the Publish/Plot tool and select Zip Project. Select the projects to zip and click OK. From the Projects menu, select Zip Project. Select the projects to zip and click OK.
n:\jeep_toledo\ Set up title block mapping files for clients Use the AutoCAD Electrical Title block setup tool to create a default.wdt file for each client's title block. Store this default.wdt in the client's base subdirectory. For example: n:\campbell.nap\default.wdt One way to do this: 1 Use AutoCAD Electrical to create a project in the client's base subdirectory (ex: n:\campbell.nap\dummy.wdp).
Try updating the Title Block from the Project Manager. Notice all of the updated labels. Specify client-specific library symbols If the client has special symbols or text size settings that are different from the default libraries provided with the AutoCAD Electrical product, create and maintain a client-specific symbol library subdirectory with smart AutoCAD Electrical symbols that have been adjusted to meet that client's standards.
With the above setup, anytime you work on a Campbell project (project file ".wdp" stored in the n:\campbell.nap directory), AutoCAD Electrical automatically uses the client-specific title block mapping file (n:\campbell.nap\default.wdt) and the client-specific dialog box label file (n:\campbell.nap\wdtitle.wdl). Miscellaneous Reference files Add new table to MDB Access: From the Projects menu, select Extras ➤ Add Table to Catalog Database. Select the database to use and click Open.
stored in an AutoCAD Electrical project. If the scratch database file is missing or corrupted, it is automatically generated from the project's drawing set. The project's scratch database file can be used to write back to text data carried on symbols on the drawings. With some care (described below), you can edit the database directly and then import the information back to the drawings. The file name is .mdb where matches the current project's .wdp file name.
Edit report Access: From the Projects menu, select Extras ➤ Settings List Utility. Click Edit Mode. If you edit the information in the Configuration Report, you will have an option to update the project and drawings with the new information. Re-order the lines with the Move Up, Move Down, Move to Top, and Move to Bottom buttons. If you re-order the lines, the order of the drawing list in the project file (.WDP) can be updated to match.
SH If you change any of the SH data, the Sheet (%S) field for that drawing can be updated to match. SHDWGNAM If you change any of the SHDWGNAM data, the Dwg no. (%D) field for that drawing can be updated to match. IEC_P If you change any of the IEC_P data, the IEC Project (%P) field for that drawing can be updated to match. IEC_I If you change any of the IEC_I data, the IEC Installation (%I) field for that drawing can be updated to match.
Remove any leading dash character from component tags Indicates whether any leading "-" characters for component tags are suppressed (box checked) or added (box unchecked). This is controlled from the Project Properties ➤ Components dialog box. Force Installation and Location attributes to be visible or invisible Switches the visibility of Installation and Location attributes on each component.
Lists the drawings available to update in the current project. Access: Select to run any of the project-wide commands. Do All Selects all of the drawings from the project drawing list. Process Selects one or more drawings from the project drawing list. Reset Moves all selected drawings back to the project drawing list. Un-select Moves one or more drawings back to the project drawing list. by Section/subsection Selects drawings by user-defined sections and subsections.
status, attribute, old value and new value are all displayed. The 'x' indicates that the source of the change no longer matches the task list. Sort Sorts the list of tasks to be performed. You can specify four sorts to perform on the list. Select All Selects all of the tasks in the list. When you click OK, all of the pending tasks will be performed on the selected drawings. Remove Removes the selected task from the list.
Commands that write to the project_udpate.
94
3 Drawing and Project Properties In this chapter ■ Overview of project and drawing properties ■ Use replaceable parameters ■ Save settings to the project file ■ Create a template drawing ■ Updating the WD_M Block ■ Using Layers 95
Overview of project and drawing properties Use the Project Properties dialog box to define settings when creating a project and then have those settings used for new drawings or those added to the project.In the Project Properties dialog box, icons indicate whether the settings apply to project settings or drawing defaults. Settings that apply to project settings and are saved inside the project definition file (*.wdp). Settings that are saved in the project file as drawing defaults.
■ Sheet values for the sheet and drawing in addition to section or subsection codes Components Use this tab to: ■ Specify the way new component tags are created. ■ Switch between sequential or line reference based tags. ■ Set component tag options such as using combined Installation/Location tags or suppressing the Installation/Location tag on reports. ■ Display description text in uppercase. Wire Numbers Use this tab to: ■ Set the wire number format.
Styles Use this tab to: ■ Change default styles for arrows, plcs, fan-in/out markers, and wiring. ■ Add or remove layers from the layer list. Drawing Format Use this tab to: ■ Set the default orientation, spacing and width values for any new ladders inserted on the drawing. ■ Specify the format referencing style: X-Y Grid, X Zones, or Reference Numbers. ■ Set the scale factor used when inserting new components or wire numbers on the drawing. ■ Set the tag/wire number sort order.
➤ Drawing Properties or by clicking the Drawing Properties tool on the toolbar. 1 Click the Project Manager tool. 2 In the Project Manager, right-click the project name, and select Properties. NOTE You can also set project properties when you create a new project. Create the new project and click OK -Properties in the Create New Project dialog box. 3 In the Project Properties dialog box, select the tab to modify properties for. 4 Click OK.
NOTE The symbol search path includes the User and Project folders (and potentially the AutoCAD search paths) prior to the paths listed here. In the Project Manager, right-click the project name, and select Settings to view the active search path for the project. Icon Menu File If you want to use an icon menu for the project that is different from the default, enter the file name. This menu reference is saved in the project's .wdp file. NOTE You can only specify one search path for the icon menu.
Always use MISC_CAT table Searches only the MISC_CAT table. You can search other component tables if the catalog number is not found in the MISC_CAT table. Use MISC_CAT table only if component specific table does not exist Uses the MISC_CAT table if the component or family tables are not found in the catalog database. Options Real time error checking Performs real time error checking on the project to determine if duplications of wire numbers or component tags occur in the project.
Access: Properties ➤ Project Settings dialog box, Catalog Lookup File Preference section, click Other File. Single catalog lookup file Specifies to use only one catalog lookup file.The file that is used depends on what was selected on the Project Properties ➤ Project Settings dialog box. Optional: Define a secondary catalog lookup file for this project Specifies to define a secondary lookup file for the project. Catalog lookup files provided with AutoCAD Electrical include: default_cat.
erence number (for example, "CR" and "100" to yield a tag like CR100 or 100CR). Optionally, a component tag might contain a sheet number or some userspecified separators. If your format includes the sheet number %S parameter or the drawing number %D parameter, you must enter the values in the edit boxes in the Drawing Properties ➤ Drawing Settings dialog box. NOTE AutoCAD Electrical provides a predefined format for you to use or you can enter your own format using replaceable parameters.
at the same reference location (ex: 3 push buttons on the same line reference "101" could be labeled PB101, PB101A, and PB101B -- AutoCAD Electrical does this using a suffix list of " ", "A", "B", and so on). NOTE The component tag suffix is automatically added to the end of the tag, but you can force AutoCAD Electrical to insert the suffix character somewhere within the tag format. Use the Suffix position parameter, %X, in the component tag format (for example, %N%X - %F).
prefix(i.e. "-K101" dash is suppressed to "K101" but "+LOC1-K101" remains unchanged). When toggled OFF, it automatically adds a single dash character to an IEC tag that does not already have a single leading dash prefix and does not have a leading Installation/Location prefix. For example, tag "K101" becomes "-K101" but "+LOC1-K101" remains unchanged. NOTE This suppression takes place automatically in reports; and takes place graphically only when a component is inserted, edited, or retagged.
Modify your project default settings for wire numbers. All information defined in this tab is saved to the project definition file as project defaults and settings Access: Click the Project Manager tool. In the Project Manager, right-click on the project name and select Properties. From the Projects menu, select Project ➤ Project Manager. In the Project Manager, right-click on the project name and select Properties. Wire Number Format Wire number tags can be sequential or reference-based.
NOTE Like component tags, AutoCAD Electrical uses the concept of a wire tag format string with replaceable parameters. The %N parameter must always be part of the wire format string. A typical format string might be just this %N parameter. Sequential Enter the starting sequential number (alpha, numeric, or alphanumeric) for the drawing.
Layer Setup Overrides the default wire number format by using layer defined formats. Change the wire layer name, wire number format, starting wire sequence, and wire number suffix. Based on Terminal Symbol Location Specifies to use a wire number terminal on a wire network as the wire network's line reference value for calculating a reference-based wire number. For example, a wire network starts at line reference 100 and drops down and over on line reference 103.
In-Line Places the wire number in line with the wire. Gap Setup Defines spacing between the wire number and the wire itself. Below Wire Places the wire number below the physical wire. Centered Specifies to insert the wire number tags in the center of each wire segment. Offset Specifies to insert the wire number tags the specified offset distance. Offset Distance Specifies a fixed, user-defined offset distance from the left or top of the first wire segment found on the wire network.
Modify your project default settings for cross-referencing. Any new drawing files created within the project are saved with the project default settings for cross-referencing. Access: Click the Project Manager tool. In the Project Manager, right-click the project name, and select Properties. From the Projects menu, select Project ➤ Project Manager. In the Project Manager, right-click the project name, and select Properties. Cross-Reference Format Defines the cross-reference annotation format.
Suppress Installation/Location codes when matching the drawing defaults Suppresses IEC prefixes. NOTE You need to run the Component Cross-Reference command to update any existing cross-referencing text. Component Cross-Reference Display There are different styles of cross referencing AutoCAD Electrical supports: Text Format Displays cross-referencing as text with any string as a separator between references on the same attribute.
TIP For instructions on how to add custom wire arrow styles, see Add custom signal arrow styles. (page 536) PLC Style Specifies the default PLC module style. Select from the 5 pre-defined styles or a user-defined style. TIP For instructions on how to add custom PLC module styles, see Add a new PLC style. (page 251) Fan-In/Out Marker Style Defines the default Fan In/Out marker style and the layers for wires going out of a Fan In/Out Source marker and those coming into a Destination marker.
Ladder Defaults Vertical/Horizontal Specifies whether to create ladders horizontally or vertically. Spacing Specifies the spacing between each rung. Default: insert new ladders without references Sets the default for the Insert Ladder command.New ladders you insert do not have line reference numbering, by default. Width Specifies the width of the ladder. Multi-wire Spacing Specifies the spacing between each rung in multiwire phases. Format Referencing Specifies the default referencing system.
Scale Feature Scale Multiplier Sets the scale factor used when inserting new components or wire numbers on the drawing. To insert everything 25% bigger than normal, change the edit box value from 1.00 to 1.25.This change does not affect components and wire numbers that are already present on the drawing. inch/inch scaled to mm/mm full size Select inch if your drawing is to use library symbols from the JIC1/JIC125 libraries or mm full size for the metric scaled symbol libraries.
Drawing File Project Specifies the project that the drawing is found in. NOTE If the drawing is not in any of the currently open projects, "Drawing not in open project" displays instead of the project name. If the drawing is in an open project but it cannot be edited, "Project not available for edit" displays instead of the project name. This happens when a project file is read-only, it is locked by someone else, it is not checked out in Vault, or the folder where the project is located is read-only.
Location Code Specifies the location code for the WD_M block definition. This value can be used as the replaceable parameter %L. Drawing Displays a list of Installation or Location codes from the active drawing. Project Displays a list of previously defined Installation or Location codes in the active project or from the Default.INST or Default.LOC file. Sheet Values Component, wire, and cross-reference tagging use replaceable parameters in their format.
Apply a drawing-specific component settings that are maintained inside the drawing's WD_M block. Access: Click the Project Manager tool. In the Project Manager, right-click the drawing name, and select Properties ➤ Drawing Properties. From the Projects menu, select Project ➤ Project Manager. In the Project Manager, right-click the drawing name, and select Properties ➤ Drawing Properties. Tag Format Specifies the way new component tags are created.
drawing of the project set, AutoCAD Electrical starts with the value you set and works its way up until it finds the next unused sequential number tag for the target component family. NOTE If you finish a drawing and move to the next, but then later come back to the first drawing to add another component and sequential tag, a gap appears in the numbering sequence for that drawing. Use the AutoCAD Electrical Project-wide Update/Retag tool to retag the whole drawing set.
Apply a drawing-specific wire number settings that are maintained inside the drawing's WD_M block. Access: Click the Project Manager tool. In the Project Manager, right-click the drawing name, and select Properties ➤ Drawing Properties. From the Projects menu, select Project ➤ Project Manager. In the Project Manager, right-click the drawing name, and select Properties ➤ Drawing Properties. Wire Number Format Wire number tags can be sequential or reference-based.
Sequential Enter the starting sequential number (alpha, numeric, or alphanumeric) for the drawing. If you enter the same starting sequential number for every drawing of your wiring diagram set, AutoCAD Electrical confirms at insertion time that a new sequential wire number tag is not repeated on any other drawing. If you set DEMO1 to 100 and DEMO2 to 200, the wire numbers on DEMO1 start at 100 and those on DEMO2 start at 200.
Gap Setup Defines spacing between the inline wire number and the wire itself. Below Wire Places the wire number below the physical wire. Offset Specifies to insert the wire number tags the specified offset distance. Centered Specifies to insert the wire number tags in the center of each wire segment. Offset Distance Specifies a fixed, user-defined offset distance from the left or top of the first wire segment found on the wire network. Leaders (This option is unavailable for in-line wire numbers.
Cross-Reference Format Defines the cross-reference annotation format. One replaceable parameter, %N, must always be part of the cross-reference format string. A typical format string might be just the %N parameter. Use Same Drawing for on-drawing references and Between Drawings for off-drawing references. You can use the same format for both. NOTE AutoCAD Electrical provides some predefined formats for you to use or you can enter your own format using replaceable parameters.
Access: From the Projects menu, select Project ➤ Project Manager. In the Project Manager, right-click the drawing name, and select Properties ➤ Drawing Properties. Arrow Style Specifies the default wire signal arrow style. Select from the 4 predefined styles or a user-defined style. You can override the default style setting at insertion time. TIP For instructions on how to add custom wire arrow styles, see Add custom signal arrow styles. (page 536) PLC Style Specifies the default PLC module style.
Apply a drawing-specific format settings that are maintained inside the drawing's WD_M block. Access: Click the Project Manager tool. In the Project Manager, right-click the drawing name, and select Properties ➤ Drawing Properties. From the Projects menu, select Project ➤ Project Manager. In the Project Manager, right-click the drawing name, and select Properties ➤ Drawing Properties. Ladder Defaults Vertical/Horizontal Specifies whether to create ladders horizontally or vertically.
X Zones Similar to X-Y Grid, but there isn't a Y-axis. Set your drawing's horizontal labels, spacing, and origin on the X Zones setup dialog box. TIP Use a negative zone spacing value if you want the zone reference origin to be at the right side of the drawing. Reference Numbers Each ladder column has a column of assigned reference numbers. Setup Specifies how to display ladder line reference numbers - number only, numbers in a hexagon, the sheet and number values, and so on.
Layers Define Defines and manages wire and component layers. NOTE No matter what layer is current, wires will always go to a wire layer and components to component layers. Use replaceable parameters The Drawing Properties dialog box makes use of codes as replaceable parameters that are encoded on to attributes of the drawing's invisible WD_M block.For example, if you set your component tag format to be %F%N, this format is encoded on to the TAGFMT attribute of the WD_M block.
%I IEC-style installation code (default for drawing) %L IEC-style location code (default for drawing) %A Project drawing list's SEC value for active drawing %B Project drawing list's SUB-SEC value for active drawing The %L and %I values used for cross-referencing are the Drawing Default Location and Installation values from the corresponding Parent or Child drawing and not the Location and Installation values of the component itself.
W-%S%N = W-350 For defining wire annotation and graphical terminal strips %P Terminal pin text %Q Terminal pin TERMDESC text %I IEC-style installation code %L IEC-style location code %M Mount assignment (on panel footprint equivalent) %U Group assignment (on panel footprint equivalent) %W Wire number %C Cable tag + conductor/core color combination (format is "tag-color") %E Cable tag %J Cable conductor/core color %V Cable tag substituted for wire number if cable tag is non-blank.
%1 Destination component tag ID. You can use only one of the (%number) parameters.
settings previously saved in the project file and assign them to the current drawing. 1 Click the arrow on the Drawing Properties tool to access the Settings Compare tool. 2 Click the Settings Compare tool. AutoCAD Electrical reads both the settings on the current drawing's WD_M block and a copy of the settings maintained in the current project's .wdp file. Any differences are displayed in a three-column dialog.
NOTE Changing these settings does not automatically change components and wiring already present in your drawing. Access: Click the arrow on the Drawing Properties tool to access the Settings Compare tool. From the Projects menu, select Settings Compare. NOTE You can also access this dialog by right-clicking a drawing name in the Project Manager and selecting Properties ➤ Settings Compare. You can also right-click any row to access the Match Project or Match Drawing options.
this template, AutoCAD Electrical won't have to pause and ask permission to insert the block as you start each new wiring diagram drawing. 1 Open a new drawing or start with a copy of your standard drawing border/title block drawing. 2 Select Projects ➤ Drawing Properties. This triggers AutoCAD Electrical to insert the invisible WD_M block. 3 In the Drawing Properties dialog box, modify any drawing settings (such as layer naming conventions and tagging formats) and click OK.
NOTE If the drawing is not in any of the currently open projects, "Drawing not in open project" displays instead of the project name. If the drawing is in an open project but it cannot be edited, "Project not available for edit" displays instead of the project name. This happens when a project file is read-only, it is locked by someone else, it is not checked out in Vault, or the folder where the project is located is read-only.
Drawing Displays a list of Installation or Location codes from the active drawing. Project Displays a list of previously defined Installation or Location codes in the active project or from the Default.INST or Default.LOC file. Sheet Values Component, wire, and cross-reference tagging use replaceable parameters in their format. If you reference the drawing's sheet number or drawing number in any of your tagging formats, then specify a default drawing-wide value to use.
Drawing layout SHEET or SHEET_ sheet number for the drawing (%S) SHEETDWGNAME optional drawing number for the drawing (%D) IEC_PROJ optional IEC project code (%P) IEC_INST optional IEC installation code (%I) IEC_LOC optional IEC location code (%L) UNIT_SCL units scaling factor (1.0 = inch, 1.0 = full size mm, 25.4 = inch scaled up to mm) FEATURE_SCL scaling adjustment (0 = default, 1.
DRWRUNG draw ladder rungs: 0 = none, 1 = draw all rungs for new ladder, 2 = skip 1, 3 = skip 2, and so on. PH3SPACE 3-phase bus spacing value Component tagging TAGMODE tag mode value: S = sequential, R = reference-based TAG-START drawing's starting sequential number -for sequential tagging only (i.e. "1") TAG-RSUF comma-delimited component tag suffix list -for referencebased tagging only (i.e.
SORTMODE retag and wire numbering sort mode WNUM_OFFSET wire number placement offset distance (GBL_wd_wnum_offset); same as the project-wide +[19] value in the .wdp file. 0.0 or missing= centered on wire (default), >0.
COMP_LAY layer for schematic component graphics LINK_LAY dashed link lines layer LOCBOX_LAY location box layer WIRELAYS valid wire layer names where "" = all valid (comma-delimited) WIRENO_LAY valid wire number WIRECOPY_LAY extra wire number layer WIREFIXED_LAY fixed wire layer WIREREF_LAY terminal and signal arrow wire number layer Fan In/Out FAN_INOUT_LAYS valid layer names for Fan In/Out, single-line wires (commadelimited) FAN_INOUT_STYLE Fan In/Out symbol style number Cross-reference
XREF_FILLWITH cross-reference fill-with text XREF_SORT 0 = sort by line reference, 1 = sort by pin list XREF_TXTBTWN cross-reference text between references (text style cross-referencing) XREF_GRAPHIC 0 = contact mapping (text), 1 = graphic XREF_GRAPHICSTYLE 0 = JIC, 1 = IEC XREF_CONTACTMAP contact mapping list XREF_TBLSTYLE table style name XREF_TBLTITLE table title XREF_TBLINDEX table fields to include XREF_TBLFLDNAMS table available field names XREF_TBLCOLJUST table fields justificat
HOIRZ_FIRST X-Y referencing format: 0 = V-H, 1 = H-V XY_DELIM X-Y delimiter character Styles PLC_STYLE PLC module style code (default = 1) ARROW_STYLE default signal arrow style number Miscellaneous WNUM_GAP list of 3 in line wire number/label gap settings (see WNUM_FLAGS bit 1 for toggle mode); value saved to GBL_wd_inline_gapas a list.
Make changes to the WD_M block You can make changes to the WD_M block so that your settings are always the default. 1 Open an existing AutoCAD Electrical drawing and set the properties and layer names. 2 Save the drawing. 3 Select Projects ➤ Swap WD_M or WD_PNLM Blocks ➤ Update Symbol Library WD_M Block. 4 Select the WD_M - schematic settings to modify and click OK. The settings and layer names are collected from the drawing and appropriate adjustments are made to the WD_M block.
Update to New WD_PNLM Block, Values, Layers To swap and convert to new layers and values carried on the new WD_PNLM.dwg. Update to New WD_PNLM Block, No Changes To swap but keep the drawing's existing layer names and values. 2 Select the WD_M drawing to use as the new WD_M block in the drawing. 3 Click Open. Copy active drawing settings to The WD_M and WD_PNLM blocks carry attribute values that define the default AutoCAD Electrical settings.
■ If the WD_PNLM block is not present in a new or existing drawing when using panel layout symbols, click OK to insert the block. ■ To force the drawing settings to match the project settings, select the check box. Using Layers Manage layers AutoCAD Electrical provides tools for managing and renaming panel and schematic layers.You can use your own layer naming convention with AutoCAD Electrical, as well as change the layer naming used on an existing AutoCAD Electrical drawing using the tools below.
utility, the new layer name will be substituted for DEMO-PNP in the AutoCAD Electrical Panel layer name list. 1 Click the arrow on the Miscellaneous Panel Tools tool to access the Rename Panel Layers tool. 2 Click the Rename Panel Layers tool. 3 To edit an individual layer name, select the layer to edit from the list and click Edit. Enter a new layer name and click OK. 4 To edit multiple layer names, click Find/Replace.Enter the text to find and the text to replace it with in the edit boxes. Click OK.
NOTE You can also change layer properties using the Project Manager tool.In the Project Manager, right-click on the drawing name and select Properties ➤ Drawing Properties (or to change the project default settings, right-click on the project name and select Properties. The settings will be applied to new drawings). In the Drawing Format tab, Layers section, click Define.
Access: From the Projects menu, select Drawing Properties. In the Drawing Properties dialog box, click the Drawing Format tab. In the Layers section, click Define. NOTE You can also change layer properties using the Project Manager tool.In the Project Manager, right-click the drawing name, and select Properties ➤ Drawing Properties. (To change the project default settings, right-click the project name ,and select Properties.The settings are applied to new drawings).
Cross-Reference Layer name for parent cross-reference text Cross-Reference (Child) Layer name for child cross-reference text Pin Numbers Layer name for terminal pin number text Installation/Location Layer name for optional location and installation code text Positions Layer name for switch position text Miscellaneous Text Layer name for all other component annotation Dashed Link Lines Layer name for dashed lines that can be inserted to show multiple components linked together Location Box Lay
Fixed Numbers Layer name for fixed wire numbers that do not change with a renumber Terminal/Signal Layer name for wire number copies that are part of a terminal or signal arrow symbol Let's say your current layer is BORDER when you use the AutoCAD Electrical icon menu to insert a 2-position selector switch. The lines and circles of the switch symbol automatically go to layer SYMS, the component's tag to layer TAGS, the description text to DESC, switch position text to POS, and soon.
Find/Replace Replaces a name or substring within a layer name. Edit Edits the selected layer name. Panel component layers Use this to set the panel component layers, non-text graphic layers, and nameplate layers.When AutoCAD Electrical inserts a footprint, it is modified on the fly to match the layering scheme set up in this dialog. Access: Click the Panel Configuration tool. Click the Layers Setup button. From the Panel Layout menu, select Panel Configuration. Click the Layers Setup button.
Use wire layers The Set Wire Type tool is used for setting a wire type for new wires only. The wire layer name and the associated wire properties (such as wire color and size) are saved in the drawing file. The chosen wire layer for a new wire is determined by the following: ■ When a wire is created from an existing wire, the new wire takes on the same layer as the existing wire. It ignores the current layer and the current wire type.
Create wire layers Wire layer names for drawings are set up in the Create/Edit Wire Type dialog box. 1 Click the arrow on the Insert Wire tool to access the Create/Edit Wire Type tool. 2 Click the Create/Edit Wire Type tool. 3 In the Create/Edit Wire Type dialog box, click inside the Wire Color column for a blank row and specify a value for the new wire layer. 4 Click inside the Size column and specify a value for the size. The Layer Name is automatically created.
4 In the Layers for Line "Wires" dialog box, define the layer name and click OK. You can either enter a name in the edit box or click Pick to select a name from the existing layer list. The layer displays in the wire type grid. If you selected the wrong wire layer, highlight the layer in the dialog box and click Remove Layer. You can then go back into the Layers for Line "Wires" dialog box and select another layer to add.
Color, Size, or Layer Name columns. All of the data corresponding to the header column can be copied, cut, and pasted to another column. All text fields are editable with the exception of the Layer Name cell; it cannot be edited for existing layers. Left-click to edit the cell or right-click in a cell to display options for modifying the cell contents. If you want to rename a layer, right-click on a cell and select Rename Layer. Right-click options include: Copy, Cut, Paste, Delete Layer and Rename Layer.
■ %S = Wire Size ■ %1-%5 = User 1 - User 5 Color Displays the AutoCAD dialog for Layer colors election. The Select Color dialog box highlights the color corresponding to the wire type record. The default color for new records is white.Undefined colors for layers use the default color while creating the layer. Multiple selection is allowed. All wire layers that have been selected can be changed to the desired color. Linetype Displays the AutoCAD dialog for linetype selection.
(for example, RED_* selects all layers that begin with "RED_"). Remove Layer Removes the selected layer name from the wire type grid. The layer is no longer a valid wire layer, however the layer remains in the drawing as an AutoCAD line layer. If multiple layers of one color exist in the drawing, you must select all layers of that color in the wire type grid to activate this button.
Change wire types You can change the wire type using the Change/Convert Wire Type tool or by typing a "T" at the command prompt during wire insertion commands. 1 Click the arrow on the Insert Wire tool to access the Change/Convert Wire Type tool. 2 Click the Change/Convert Wire Type tool. Optionally, you can right-click on an existing wire and select Change/Convert Wire Type.
Override wire type at command prompt During wire insertion, the current wire type displays at the command prompt. You can override this by typing in the hot key "T" and selecting a new wire type from the Set Wire Type dialog box. The new wire type becomes the current wire type and the command continues with the wire insertion. Use the following commands: ■ Wires ➤ Insert Wire ■ Wires ➤ Angle Wires ➤ Insert 22.5 Degree Wires (also 45 or 67.
To rename the User1- User 20 column headers, right-click the project name in the Project Manager and select Properties. In the Project Properties ➤ Wire Numbers dialog box, Wire Type section, click Rename User Columns. In the Rename User Columns dialog box, specify a new column name and click OK. Renaming of user-defined columns is project-specific. You cannot rename the Color, Size, or Layer Name columns. All of the data corresponding to the header column can be copied, cut, and pasted to another column.
This tool sets wire types for new wires. Use the grid control to sort and select the wire types for easy modification. TIP Use the Create/Edit Wire Type tool to create and edit wire types or the Change/Convert Wire Type tool to convert lines to wires. Access: Type "T" at the command prompt during wire insertion. Wire type grid Displays the wire types used in the active drawing. The the wire layer name and the wire properties like color, size, and user defined properties are listed in the grid.
Optional ENV file assignment for current project You can create an alternate environment settings ENV file and assign it to the active project. Customer-specific ENV files can be created to store customer settings, paths, libraries, and menus. For a given project, you can assign the appropriate ENV file to the project. The ENV file name reference is saved in the project's WDP drawing list file. Whenever the project is selected, the settings in the referenced ENV file are automatically restored.
4 Symbol Libraries In this chapter ■ Determine symbol block names ■ Library Symbol Naming Conventions ■ Split a tag name into two pieces ■ Use multiple symbol libraries ■ Overview of Hydraulic and P&ID symbols ■ Attribute Requirements ■ Managing Library Symbols 161
Determine symbol block names The default symbol subdirectory, jic1, and a companion 0.125 uniform text height library, jic125, each contain hundreds of component symbols in standard AutoCAD ".dwg" file format. These are referenced by AutoCAD Electrical and its icon menuing system and are inserted as standard AutoCAD blocks with attributes.
with "PL" instead of "LT." Use the RETAG command to update previously inserted components. Overview of symbol naming conventions AutoCAD Electrical depends on a specific naming convention to enable some of its automation features to work. Though not mandatory, you are urged to follow the naming convention outlined below if you create new AutoCAD Electrical-smart symbols for use with AutoCAD Electrical. This will allow your custom symbols to take full advantage of the AutoCAD Electrical features.
Components - General Schematic components such as relays, switches, pilot lights, and discrete motor control devices (but not PLC I/O symbols) follow this naming convention: ■ 32-character block name maximum, first character is either "H" or "V" for horizontal or vertical wire insertion. ■ The next two characters are reserved for family type (for example, PB for push buttons, CR for control relays, LS for limit switches).
HLS11H.dwg Horizontal limit switch, parent, N.O. Held closed VLT1RP.dwg Vertical pilot light, red, press-to-test HW01.dwg Horizontal cable marker, no wire number change through it Component Location Mark Symbols AutoCAD Electrical expects the location symbol names to begin with the characters "WDXX." Configuration and Ladder Master Line Reference Symbols AutoCAD Electrical expects to find these block inserts: WD_M.dwg Block insert consisting of about 50 invisible attributes.
Connector Symbols ■ The first character is "H" or "V" for horizontal or vertical orientation. ■ The next 2 characters are "CN" for connector. ■ The 4th character is either 1 or 2: 1 for parent or 2 for child. ■ The 5th character is "_" ■ The 6th character is 1-9 for the style number. ■ The 7th character: (Combo) specifies the plug or jack ID: P = Plug, J = Jack (Receptacle) (Only) specifies the wire direction: 1 = right, 2 = top, 4 = left; and 8 = bottom.
Hydraulic Symbols The maximum number of characters for the block name is 32. ■ The first character is "H" or "V" for horizontal wire or vertical. ■ The next 2 characters are the first 2 letters of the family name (for example, FI for filters, CY for cylinders, PM for pumps). See Overview of Hydraulic and P&ID symbols (page 174)for a list of symbol family names. ■ The 4th character is "1" for hydraulic symbols - stand-alone component. ■ Use "_" and enter a meaningful name corresponding to the symbol.
■ The next 2 characters are the first 2 letters of the family name (for example, GV for diaphragm valves, IN for instruments, N for nozzles). See Overview of Hydraulic and P&ID symbols (page 174)for a list of symbol family names. ■ The 4th character is "1" for P&ID symbols - stand-alone component. ■ Use "_" and enter a meaningful name corresponding to the symbol. Example: VTK1_ver_tank.
Plug/Jack Connector Pin Symbols AutoCAD Electrical connector symbols follow this convention: ■ The first character is "H" or "V" for horizontal wire or vertical wire insertion. ■ The next two characters are "C0" if the connector does not trigger a wire number change through it (the "0" meaning that the wire number does not change), or "CN" if the connector DOES trigger a wire number change. ■ The 4th character is either 1 or 2: 1 for parent marker or a 2 for child marker.
{version}\Libs\jic1\ha1s*.dwg to ha5s*.dwg and Autodesk\Acade {version}\Libs\jic1\ha1d*.dwg to ha1d*.dwg. Access each copied arrow symbols in AutoCAD and edit to suit. Then, to access your new arrow style, set the default arrow style to "5" in the Drawing Properties ➤ Styles dialog box. Standalone Cross-Reference Symbols: Same naming convention as the Source/Destination Signal symbols (i.e. HA?S* and HA?D*) but without a WIRENO attribute present on the symbol.
HT0_01.dwg Dumb, square terminal with no annotation, no wire number change User-Defined Symbols AutoCAD Electrical user-defined symbols follow this convention: ■ The first character is "H" or "V" for horizontal wire or vertical wire insertion. ■ The next two characters are "ZA" through "ZZ." ■ The remaining characters can be user-defined. Wire Dot Symbols AutoCAD Electrical expects this symbol name to be "WDDOT.dwg.
HT0_W3.dwg Inline wire number marker, horizontal wire insertion, longer wire number VT0_W1.dwg Inline wire number marker, vertical wire insertion, short wire number VT0_W2.
NOTE If a parent symbol has the single TAG1 attribute, related child symbols can have split tag attributes and vice versa. If a parent symbol has split tag attributes, related child symbols do NOT have to have split tag attributes. The symbol's default value character string for the tag should be annotated as a default value on the TAG1_PART1 attribute definition. Use multiple symbol libraries You can select the library you want to use for each project.
5 Checks in the selected library -- this is the library selected per the active project. 6 Checks the directory containing AutoCAD Electrical support files. 7 Checks the current directory. 8 Checks the path given by the AutoCAD Electrical environment variable. Set a symbol library as the default 1 Exit AutoCAD Electrical. 2 Make a back-up copy of your environment (.env) file. To find the full name and path of your .env file, right-click inside the Project Manager, and select Settings. 3 Open the .
Hydraulic family names Family Name Description FI Filter CYL Cylinder VAL Valves (directional, throttle valve, pressure valve) FC Flow control valve CK Check valve MAN Manifolds PS Pressure switch MOT Motor PMP Pump ACC, CMP Accumulator, compensator MTR Meter FS Float switch HE, HTR Heat exchanger, heaters A Piping and Instrumentation Diagram (P&ID) is a schematic illustration of functional relationship of piping, instrumentation and system equipment.
P&ID family names Family Name Description CT Equipment: Cooling tower TK Equipment: Cyclone E Equipment: Engine, exchanger C Equipment: Turbine, compressors F Equipment: Fans M Equipment: Mixer, agitators TK, V Tanks and vessels N Nozzles P Pumps FIT Fittings GVA Valves ACT Actuators LOG Logic Functions INS Instrumentation FLW, FE Flow 176 | Chapter 4 Symbol Libraries
Attribute Requirements Overview of schematic attributes The following are attribute requirements for various categories of schematic symbols. Note that some attributes are used in multiple categories. Schematic parent and child components Attribute Description TAG1 (Parent only) Attribute for required component tag name (64 characters maximum).
Attribute Description second line for a full tag name of "MOT123"). AutoCAD Electrical pastes the values on these two attributes together when it processes the component. To include a delimiter character in the tag name but not show it on the drawing (for example, "MOT-123" but just show "MOT" and "123"), then a third attribute definition marked invisible, "TAG1_PARTX" can be added to carry the dash delimiter.
Attribute Description ASSYCODE Invisible attribute for optional subassembly code that causes AutoCAD Electrical to look for subassembly items to extract into BOM reports (60 characters maximum). These subassembly items must be defined in the active catalog lookup file in the ASSYCODE and ASSYLIST fields. The value for this attribute is generally set automatically when the user makes a selection from the catalog lookup that carries subassembly information.
Attribute Description XREF This attribute can be used in two different ways. It can be used for a combined list of normally open and normally closed contacts. AutoCAD Electrical underlines the closed contacts. If XREFNO and XREFNC are present then this XREF attribute will be used to carry undefined, non-NO/NC references. NOTE If XREF is not present then non-NO/NC contacts are included with the XREFNO annotation. CONTACT Invisible attribute present when the symbol is a contact.
Attribute Description (no limit on characters). If this attribute is not present then any related pin list data will be automatically stored on the symbol as Xdata. PEER_PINLIST (Parent only) Similar to above but is used to temporarily hold a second pin list that is later retrieved during insertion of a peer parent device. For example, a reversing motor starter contactor might be a single component with a single part number, but has a parent coil and a peer reversing coil.
Attribute Description WD_WEBLINK Attribute carried on a parent symbol for embedding Internet URL's, ".pdf", ".xls", or ".doc" links that can be surfed on. The attribute value should be the URL, .pdf, .xls, or .doc document file name that should be displayed when selected from the component's Surf dialog. Multiple weblink attributes can be assigned to a symbol. Use attribute names with the WD_WEBLINK prefix, for example, WD_WEBLINK1 and WD_WEBLINK2.
Attribute Description These attributes can be used to define a terminal as an internal or external connection. TERMn Optional terminal pin number attribute where "n" is a two-digit number (starting at 01) that is used to match up with the corresponding X?TERMn wire connection attribute (10 characters maximum). A single TERMn attribute can have 2,3, or 4 wire connection attributes associated with it.
(parent symbol has "1" and child has "2" as 4th character of the symbol name) Attribute Description TAG1 (Parent only) Same as above. TAG2 (Child only) Same as above. INST LOC Same as above. MFG CAT ASSYCODE (Parent only) Same as above. FAMILY Same as above. GENDER Invisible attribute with blank value. ACE_FLAG Invisible attribute with a value of "2" for all parametric connector symbols and a value of "1" for splice symbols (1 character maximum). DESC1 DESC2 DESC3 Same as above.
Attribute Description TERM01J Attribute for terminal pin number (for receptacle pin number). X?TERM01P X?TERM01J Invisible wire connection attributes for plug and receptacle side respectively. The "?" is the wire connection direction digit (1,2,4, or 8). X?TERMDESC01P X?TERMDESC01J Attribute for terminal pin description for plug side and receptacle side respectively. The "?" digit is same as above.
Attribute Description X?TERMDESC01 X?PIN01 STRIPSEQ LINKTERM Attributes used internally by the Terminal Strip Editor command. WIRENO or TERM01 Attribute to carry the terminal number assignment (24 characters maximum). If the terminal is to automatically display the wire number value of the wire network that it is inserted into, then WIRENO attribute must be present. Otherwise, if the attribute is to carry a terminal pin assignment independent of the wire number, attribute TERM01 must be used.
Attribute Description WD_#_TERMNO Attribute to carry optional terminal number. Use WD_1_TERMNO for the first terminal strip number and select from WD_2_TERMNO through WD_6_TERMNO for the next terminal number in the sequence. WD_#_INFO Attribute to carry additional information such as installation, location, catalog, and item number assignments; and any connected cable information.
Attribute Description SHEET Optional attribute for the SHEET (%S) value assigned in the Drawing Settings (12 characters maximum). Updates automatically with the Update Signal References tool or Auto Wire Numbers tool. DWGNAM Optional attribute for the DWGNAM (%D) value assigned in the Drawing Settings (40 characters maximum). Updates same as above. X?TERM01 Attribute for wire connection where the "?" character is the wire connection direction, same as above.
Attribute Description ■ X?_TINY_DOT_DONT_REMOVE 8: wire connects to the attribute from below Visible attribute, very small, single character value (a ".") that must remain visible and must be placed at the exact insertion location of each of the XnTERM01 attributes. This attribute is needed to allow the gap to auto-adjust to text width and to maintain connectivity through the symbol if the in line label or wire number text is blanked or grows small compared to the total gap width in the wire.
Attribute Description TERMDESC01L TERMDESC01R Optional terminal pin description attribute on each side of the symbol (128 characters maximum). If just a single wire connection then the attribute name is TERMDESC01. MFG CAT ASSYCODE (Parent only) Same as above. DESCA01 - DESCE01 Attributes to hold up to five lines of description text (60 characters maximum). LINE1 LINE2 Optional attributes to hold two lines of general text (example: "Rack" and "Slot" address numbers; 24 characters maximum).
Parametric Twisted Pair symbols Attribute Description X?TERM01 Pair of invisible wire connection attributes where the wires connect. Connection is made to each attribute's origin point.
Overview of non-schematic attributes Terminal block footprint symbols Terminal block footprint symbols require special attributes in their definitions to help facilitate the Terminal Strip Editor graphical layout. AutoCAD Electrical generates a physical layout of the terminal strips and annotates the terminal number, wire number, and destination device of what is connected to the terminal block from the attributes.
Attribute Description The value for this attribute is generally set automatically when the user makes a selection from the catalog "Lookup" that carries subassembly information. WDBLKNAM Invisible attribute that specifies the WD block name for catalog lookup (32 characters maximum). Default for terminals is "TRMS." FP Invisible attribute or Xdata. Identifies the block insert as a nonschematic item (i.e a physical footprint representation). FPT Invisible attribute or Xdata.
Attribute Description FAMILY Invisible attribute that carries the components family type (for example, "FI", "INS"; 8 characters maximum). Generally, the FAMILY attribute definition's default value is the same as the default value for the component's TAG1 or TAG2 attribute. A generic child device can be linked to any type of parent symbol if the child's Family attribute value is left blank. AutoCAD Electrical will fill it in on the fly with the parent's FAMILY code when the link is made.
Attribute Description atic). For example, an instrument drawing might be included in an AutoCAD Electrical project drawing set with a valve marked "FY201". On the electrical schematics, the solenoid for this instrument valve is tagged "SV456". The WDTAGALT attribute carried on the schematic valve symbol can be annotated with the "FY201" instrument tag name and a WDTAGALT attribute on the instrument diagram's symbol carries the "SV456" tag name pointing back at the schematic representation.
Overview of parent and stand-alone component attributes (TAG1) AutoCAD Electrical puts the component's tag name on this attribute, names like "PB101" or "CR-55" (24 characters maximum). The default value you assign to this attribute definition at the library symbol level (i.e. symbol's ".dwg" file opened and displayed in AutoCAD) becomes the family code character string AutoCAD Electrical uses to build the component's tag name when the block is inserted into your wiring diagram.
on the attribute definition, AutoCAD Electrical simply applies a copy of the tag-ID to the COPYTAG* attribute(s). For example, you create a large "drive" schematic symbol with a TAG1 attribute for the drive's tag-ID. You want some other parts of this single symbol to carry the TAG1 value plus a suffix like "-POT" and "-DBRES".
2 Move the tag, description, location, and cross-reference annotation attribute definitions to different locations to satisfy your drafting standards (attribute definitions look like text entities). 3 Adjust attribute definition text size to meet your requirements but avoid deleting any of the existing attribute definitions. Attributes are needed to give the symbol full compatibility with AutoCAD Electrical features. 4 Insert additional non-AutoCAD Electrical attributes that your applications might need.
Predefine symbol annotation You can have certain symbols insert with switch position text, terminal pin numbers, or BOM catalog numbers prefilled with default values. 1 Open the symbol's .dwg file in AutoCAD. The default symbol library path is \Program Files [(x86)]\Autodesk\Acade {version}\Libs\jic1. 2 Use the DDEDIT or PROPERTIES command to change the symbol's default attribute values. For example, let's say that you always want your N.O.
consideration the number of wire connection points, rating attributes, and whether your new symbol is a parent symbol (attribute TAG1) or a child symbol (attribute TAG2). 3 Clean up the graphics. Keep everything on layer 0. 4 Reuse attribute definitions from the exploded symbol. Reposition them as required.
There are no restrictions. Every symbol can have a different width. At insertion time the symbol's width is determined by reading the locations of its wire connection attributes (attributes with name X?TERMn). Wire connection points A symbol can have hundreds of connection points and a terminal pin number attribute tied to each (use suffix codes beginning with "01" and ending with "ZZ"). Component description text You can insert three lines of description text up to 60 characters long.
in an empty spot on your drawing. You can exit and restart the tool as many times as necessary to set up the symbol. 1 Explode any existing blocks or draw new symbols from scratch. 2 Click the arrow on the Miscellaneous tool to access the Symbol Builder tool. 3 Click the Symbol Builder tool. 4 Select any geometry that are to become part of the new or converted symbol (or press Enter if you are starting from scratch). 5 Pick which type of symbol you want to build.
with AutoCAD Electrical, break wires upon insertion, and appear in the various BOM, component, and wire connection reports. Access: Click the arrow on the Miscellaneous tool to access the Symbol Builder tool. From the Components menu, select Symbol Library ➤ Symbol Builder. Parent Schematic symbol is used as a stand-alone symbol or a parent component with related secondary contacts. Child Schematic secondary symbol that is related to a parent component.
Access: From the Components menu, select Symbol Library ➤ Symbol Builder. Click Parent or Child, then click Standard. Missing attributes: Lists attributes you can insert for the symbol. Height: Specifies the attribute height. Justify: Specifies the attribute justification. Family code: Specifies the default component family code. TAG1 %F default: Specifies the default code for parent component tags.
Use this tool to build a smart schematic symbol by adding AutoCAD Electrical attributes to the symbol's geometry and converting text entities to AutoCAD Electrical attributes. Access: Click the arrow on the Miscellaneous tool to access the Symbol Builder tool. Click Parent, Child, Terminal, or Terminal. From the Components menu, select Symbol Library ➤ Symbol Builder. Click Parent, Child, Terminal, or Terminal.
Wire connection Inserts wire connection points. For each wire connection point you need, select the desired wire connection direction and then place the point on your new symbol. Terminal This choice can only be used if you already have an AutoCAD Electrical wire connection attribute defined, and you want to link terminal text to it. I is useful to help make an existing symbol "AutoCAD Electrical smart.
Save and insert Save and Insert: When you finish, click Block to insert your new component into your circuit or Wblock to first save a copy of your new symbol (the default save location is your user subdirectory). Caution: AutoCAD Electrical provides a default name for your new symbol. If you are creating a schematic parent or child contact symbol, avoid changing the first 4 letters of the generated symbol file name and limit the total length to 32 characters.
This tool is used to build a smart schematic symbol by adding AutoCAD Electrical attributes to the symbol's geometry and converting text entities to AutoCAD Electrical attributes. Access: Click the arrow on the Miscellaneous tool to access the Symbol Builder tool. Click Footprint, Terminal, or Nameplate. From the Components menu, select Symbol Library ➤ Symbol Builder. Click Footprint, Terminal, or Nameplate.
Term/Wire Numbers Inserts wire numbers and terminal pin numbers. For each wire number you need, select the desired wire number direction and then place the point on your new symbol. Select one of the supplied wire number or terminal styles from the menu. You can edit existing terminal styles or create your own. All terminal symbols are saved in the /Program Files/Autodesk/Electrical/libs/jic1 subdirectory under file name "bb?*.dwg", where "?" is the style number.
used on a new project but the client likes his limit switches drawn a bit differently. Simply make client-specific versions of the limit switch symbols. Then use the Update option; select any limit switch on the drawing, and then reference the path to the new version of the symbol. AutoCAD Electrical quickly replaces all instances of the symbol it finds on the drawing(s) with the new version of the same symbol.
Update or change blocks in place 1 Click the arrow on the Insert Component tool to access the Swap/Update Block tool. 2 Click the Swap/Update Block tool. 3 Determine whether you want to exchange one block for another (Option A) or update all instances of a given block with an updated version of the same block (0ption B). Option A: Select to swap a block one at a time, drawing-wide, or project-wide.
The chosen component is replaced with the symbol selected in the Insert Component dialog box. Swap block/update block/library swap This tool lets you update or change blocks in place. Attribute values are retained during the swapping process. Wire connections are also maintained even if the new symbol is slightly wider or narrower than the original. Access: Click the arrow on the Insert Component tool to access the Swap/Update Block tool.
Retain old block scale Specifies to retain the scale value from the original block. Allow undefined Wire Type line reconnections Specifies to include non-wire LINEs for reconnection when the new block swaps in. The LINEs then display in the Wire From/To and Cable From/To reports. If unselected, the non-wire LINEs are excluded and do not appear in reports. Auto retag if parent swap causes family change Automatically retags the component if the Family code of a component changed due to the swap.
with a space separating the current attribute name from the new attribute name. Library swap -- all drawing Updates all instances of a library symbol with an updated version of the same symbol on the active drawing or in a project. Access: Click the arrow on the Insert Component tool to access the Swap/Update Block tool. Select the Library Swap option and click OK. From the Components menu, select Components Miscellaneous ➤ Swap/Update Block. Select the Library Swap option and click OK.
Substitutes a new version of a component block for all inserted instances of that block found on a drawing or in a project. Access: Click the arrow on the Insert Component tool to access the Swap/Update Block tool. Select the Update a Block option and click OK. From the Components menu, select Components Miscellaneous ➤ Swap/Update Block. Select the Update a Block option and click OK. Path\filename of new block Specifies the path\filename of the block that will be substituted for all instances of the selec
216
5 PLC In this chapter ■ Generate PLC layout modules ■ Insert PLC modules ■ Overview of the PLC database file ■ Single, Stand-Alone I/O Points ■ Work with PLC styles ■ Create PLC I/O Drawings from Spreadsheets 217
Generate PLC layout modules AutoCAD Electrical can generate any of hundreds of different PLC I/O modules on demand, in a variety of different graphical styles, all without a single, complete I/O module library symbol resident on the system. Modules automatically adapt to the underlying ladder rung spacing, whatever that value might be, and can even be stretched or broken into two or more pieces at insertion time.
them, draws a rectangular box around the entire assembly, creates a single block out of the collection, and annotates the new module's attributes. Some PLC units may not lend themselves very well to parametric generation. If a PLC module symbol is built with the appropriate attributes in place and the symbol name follows AutoCAD Electrical's naming convention (the block name begins with "PLCIO"), it can be inserted as a single unit using the Components ➤ Insert PLC Modules ➤ Insert PLC (Full Units) command.
where "?" is the style number. An easy way to create a new style is to copy an existing style's symbols to one of the unused style numbers (6, 7, 8, or 9) and edit each library symbol. Scale Specifies the scale for the PLC module. You can also specify to apply a border to the PLC module upon insertion. Module layout Access: Click the Insert PLC (Parametric) tool. Select the PLC module to insert, click OK, and place the PLC in the drawing.
Include unused/extra connections Specifies to include all of the extra connections to the PLC. Some modules may have terminals that are not used (i.e. dummy terminals with no electrical connection). Unused terminals are skipped by default. This results in the most compact representation of the module, but the PLC modules can be set up to optionally show unused terminals. This is done by adding in "\SPECIAL=INCLUDE" and "\SPECIAL=EXCLUDE" flags (in the Attributes column of the Module Terminal Information tab
NOTE Editing the first address, I/O point address, or catalog information for a plc module that has been imported using the Unity Pro Export to Spreadsheet tool may result in problems when you export the data back to Unity Pro. An alert displays to ask whether you want to proceed with the changes. Access: Click the arrow on the Insert PLC (Parametric) tool to access the Insert PLC (Full Units) tool. Select the PLC module to insert and place it on the drawing.
Line1/Line2 Specifies optional description text for the module. May be used to identify the module's relative location in the I/O assembly (example: Rack # and Slot #). Manufacturer Lists the manufacturer number for the I/O point. Enter a value or select one from the Catalog lookup. Catalog Lists the catalog number for the I/O point. Enter a value or select one from the Catalog lookup. Assembly Lists the assembly code for the I/O point. The Assembly code is used to link multiple part numbers together.
List descriptions Lists the I/O point descriptions currently assigned to each I/O point on the module or connected, wired devices in a pick list. Selecting one of the buttons next to this displays a different list of description in the box below. I/O Lists I/O point descriptions used so far on the module. Pick to copy. Wired Devices Lists descriptions of wired devices that are found to be connected to the I/O module. Pick to copy the description.
Overview of the PLC database file You can modify the PLC database file manually or using the PLC Database File Editor (page 232)(recommended method). The AutoCAD Electrical PLC database file (ace_plc.mdb) is installed in the C:\Documents and Settings\{username}\My Documents\Acade {version}\AeData\Plc subdirectory.
DESCRIPTION Description displayed in selection dialog box ADDRESS_BASE Base numbering value (octal, decimal, hex) ADDRESS_FORMAT Reserved for future use; currently empty OPTIONAL_BLOCK Optional block to insert at bottom of module (i.e.
Module Terminal Information table (ends with _Data) Example: "allen-bradley_1746_analog_input_Data" This file contains terminal information for the module type. CODE Module's catalog number SEQUENCE Terminal sequence number BLOCK Block name used for insertion. The "?" gets filled in during insertion and the block name uses either a "H" or "V" depending on the selected orientation. ATTRIBUTES Optional attributes for the terminal.
you would edit the database file and add ";TAGA_=IN-%%N" to each I/O parametric data entry in the module's block of data. The %%N represents the calculated I/O address and the "IN-" is the prefix that gets added. Dealing with non-sequential addresses Some modules may have I/O address assignments that do not sequentially increment from one terminal to the next. Use the "%%A" flag to represent the module's beginning address. In the example shown below, the address sequence is non-sequential.
sooner you can use the PLC Database File Editor to add the break command or do the following in the Module Terminal Information table. HP?WA-D;TERM_07\SPECIAL=BREAK Triggering for re-prompt of I/O address Some modules include inputs and outputs. You can trigger AutoCAD Electrical to prompt for a new beginning address number when the parametric build flips from inputs to outputs or vice versa. Add "\SPECIAL=ADDR_OUT" on the line where you want a re prompt for a new output address or add "\SPECIAL=ADDR_IN" if
HP?W--;TERM_=VDC;\SPECIAL=SPACINGFACTOR=0.
Copy modules You can copy an entire module into a new module using the PLC Database File Editor. 1 Click the arrow on the Insert PLC (Parametric) tool to access the PLC Database File Editor tool. 2 Click the PLC Database File Editor tool. 3 In the PLC selection list, right-click on the module that you want to copy from and select Copy. 4 Right-click the Type in the tree that you want to copy to.
Inside the terminal grid control there are drop-down list boxes, text boxes, and context menus that you can use to modify the terminal information. 4 Select the terminal(s) to modify. You can select multiple fields to edit at the same time by dragging your mouse across contiguous fields or by holding down the Control key while selecting non-contiguous fields. You can also select multiple terminals if you want the terminals to carry the same information.
This tool creates and modifies PLC modules. All editing and creation of PLC data is stored within the PLC Database File (ACE_PLC.MDB). Access: Click the arrow on the Insert PLC (Parametric) tool to access the PLC Database File Editor tool. From the Components menu, select Insert PLC Modules ➤ PLC Database File Editor. PLC Selection List Provides a complete list of the PLC data files available to AutoCAD Electrical.
active after you copy or cut a PLC module inside the Module/Code branch of the tree structure. Delete Deletes an entire PLC module, type, series, or manufacturer from the tree structure and the PLC database (ACE_PLC.MDB). Rename Renames a PLC module, type, series, or manufacturer in the tree structure. You cannot have duplicate names in the same branch of the tree structure. Cut (available only for the Module branch of the tree structure) Cuts the highlighted module code from the tree structure.
Optional Re-prompt Prompts for a new beginning address number when the parametric build flips from inputs to outputs or from outputs to inputs. On the line where you want AutoCAD Electrical to reprint for a new output address, select Output. If you want AutoCAD Electrical to reprint for a new input address, select Input from the list. Break After Specifies for the module to break automatically after a specific terminal type.
NOTE The Manufacturer, Series, Series Type, Code, and Terminals fields are not active since they are under the control of the tree structure in the PLC Selection window and the total number of terminals listed in the Terminal Type grid control. Save Module Saves the module to the PLC database file. If you exit the PLC Database File Editor without clicking Save Module, you get a prompt asking whether or not to save your changes.
Use this to define the outer box dimensions of the module. The box dimensions are calculated from the insertion point of the parametrically-built PLC symbols. Access: Click the drop-down arrow on the Insert PLC (Parametric) tool to access the PLC Database File Editor tool. Click the New Module or Module Specifications button, and then click the Module Box Dimensions button. From the Components menu, select Insert PLC Modules ➤ PLC Database File Editor.
contiguous fields or by holding down the Control key while selecting non-contiguous fields. Access: Click the drop-down arrow on the Insert PLC (Parametric) tool to access the PLC Database File Editor tool. Right-click in the terminal grid control section of the dialog box, and select Edit Terminal from the menu. From the Components menu, select Insert PLC Modules ➤ PLC Database File Editor. Right-click in the terminal grid control section of the dialog box, and select Edit Terminal from the menu.
Optional Re-prompt Address Specifies whether to prompt for a new beginning address number when the parametric build flips from inputs to outputs or from outputs to inputs. On the line where you want AutoCAD Electrical to re-prompt for a new output address, select Output. If you want AutoCAD Electrical to re-prompt for a new input address, select Input from the list. Break After Specifies for the module to break automatically after a specific terminal type.
PLC Selection Expanded Description Listing Controls These controls display as an expanded description when the module is highlighted in the tree structure of the PLC Selection dialog box. These include: Description Describes the PLC module being defined. Module Type Gives an abbreviated type to the PLC module. Base Addressing Specifies whether the PLC module addressing follows an industry standard. Select from Octal, Decimal, Hexadecimal, and Prompt.
Module Box Dimensions Opens a dialog box for defining the outer box dimensions of the module. The box dimensions are calculated from the insertion point of the parametrically-built PLC symbols. Module Prompts Opens a dialog box for defining up to nine prompts to be used at the time of module insertion. You can specify the prompt number and the accompanying text, or you can remove prompts from this dialog box. Terminal block settings Adds or updates the symbols available to build a module.
Unique Description Specifies the description that appears underneath the terminal in the Select Terminal Information dialog box. Sample Bitmap File Specifies the bitmap file for the terminal type. These are visible on the Select Terminal Information dialog box. If you are adding your own terminals, you can create corresponding bitmap files. Enter your bitmap name in the box or Browse for it. The next time you select a terminal type, the bitmap will be displayed.
Defines the module box dimensions (such as the offset values and line properties) based upon the style number used when the PLC was created. Access: Click the arrow on the Insert PLC (Parametric) tool to access the PLC Database File Editor tool. Click Style Box Dimensions. From the Components menu, select Insert PLC Modules ➤ PLC Database File Editor. Click Style Box Dimensions. NOTE You must set a value for the Split Top and Split Bottom dimensions before specifying their line properties.
Modifies specifications previously defined during the creation of a new module. Access: Click the arrow on the Insert PLC (Parametric) tool to access the PLC Database File Editor tool. Click Module Specifications. From the Components menu, select Insert PLC Modules ➤ PLC Database File Editor. Click Module Specifications. Module Controls Specifies the Manufacturer, Series, Series Type, and Code (Catalog Number) for the module.
AutoCAD Block to insert Specifies an AutoCAD block file to insert directly below the last I/O point inserted parametrically. These are typically used for block files that represent DIP switch settings and notes on how to configure the PLC module. Autolisp file to run at module insertion time Specifies an AutoCAD Lisp routine to run after the program executes the parametric build of the PLC module.
■ To modify a prompt, select the prompt number from the list, modify the text in the edit box, and click Change. ■ To remove a prompt, select the prompt number from the list and click the Remove Selected Prompt button. Example Let's say you assigned RACK NUMBER to the prompt %%1 and SLOT NUMBER to the prompt %%2. At insertion time, the I/O Point dialog box will open so that you can enter values for the RACK NUMBER and SLOT NUMBER fields right before the module is built.
PLCIOI2.dwg 2+ input, wire left and right PLCIOO1T.dwg First output, wire right PLCIOO1.dwg 2+ output, wire right PLCIOO2T.dwg First output, wire left and right PLCIOO2.
Insert PLC layout points PLC I/O points can be inserted as independent symbols spread out over your drawing set. AutoCAD Electrical provides a small set of single I/O point library symbols that you can expand and modify to suit your needs. 1 Click the Insert Component tool. 2 On the main icon menu select PLC I/O. NOTE Single I/O points are selected from the second and third rows of the sub dialog. 3 Select the component to insert and specify an insertion point.
5 (Optional) To assign the description, click External File to select the description from a comma-delimited ASCII text file of available I/O point descriptions. 6 Click OK and the values are annotated onto the I/O point. Edit PLC I/O point Use this dialog box when inserting or editing a stand-alone I/O point symbol. Specify the values you need and press OK. The values are then annotated onto the selected I/O point. Access: Click the Insert Component tool. Select to insert a PLC I/O point.
Line1/ Line2 Optional description text for the I/O point. May be used to identify the point's relative location in the I/O assembly (for example, Rack # and Slot #). Manufacturer Lists the manufacturer number for the I/O point. Enter a value or select one from the Catalog lookup. Catalog Lists the catalog number for the I/O point. Enter a value or select one from the Catalog lookup. Assembly Lists the assembly code for the I/O point. The Assembly code is used to link multiple part numbers together.
List descriptions: External file Displays contents of an external comma-delimited ASCII text file of I/O point descriptions. Pick an entry in the file, and then copy the values to edit boxes in the Edit dialog. Installation/Location codes Changes the installation or location codes. You can search the current drawing or entire project for installation and location codes. A quick read of all the current or selected drawing files is done and a list of codes used so far is returned.
There are about 3 dozen symbols associated with each style. They are located in the jic1 subdirectory (or jic125 for the uniform 0.125 text height version). They carry the file name "HP?*.dwg" where "?" is the style number. Create a new PLC style An easy way to create a new PLC style is to copy an existing PLC style's library symbols to one of the unused style numbers (6, 7, 8, or 9) and then edit each one to suit your needs. For example, copy style 1 to style 6 by copying "\Program Files [(x86)]\Autodesk\
Overview of the PLC spreadsheet/database format The PLC information can be read from an Microsoft Excel spreadsheet, Access database table, or a comma-delimited file. AutoCAD Electrical expects to find certain columns containing the information needed to generate the drawings. The columns can be in any order defined by your settings. All columns are optional except the Module part number (Code) column. Three example PLC data files are found in the User folder: DEMOPLC.XLS, DEMOPLC.CSV and DEMOPLC_IEC.XLS.
Module's tag The value assigned to the module's TAG attribute. Module's Installation The value assigned to the module's installation attribute. Module's Location The value assigned to the module's location attribute. Description 1-5 (DESC1-DESC5) The values assigned to the module's 5 description attributes. Voltage/Input/Output (VOLTAGE) The value used to determine if a module is an input or output module if it cannot be determined from the parametric data file.
* Place an asterisk (*) in front of a device block name to trigger an Insert Circuit instead of an Insert Component. Any associated TAG, DESC, MFG, and CAT column values for this entry are annotated onto the first AutoCAD Electrical symbol found on the inserted circuit. Inline component data The PLC Generator supports up to 9 inline components.
You can predefine other attribute values using the format "mainval;attrnam2=attrval2;attrnam3=attrval3,” and so on. Enter this in any inline component column except the Block column defining the component's block name. Components for input modules are inserted left-to-right, while components for output modules are inserted right-to-left. Note that the spacing between devices (as defined in your settings) is maintained even if no component is defined for a particular column.
Automatically generate I/O schematic drawings A project's PLC I/O requirements, in spreadsheet or database format, can drive automatic generation of the I/O schematic drawings. 1 Click the arrow on the Insert PLC (Parametric) tool to access the Spreadsheet to PLC I/O Utility tool. 2 Click the Spreadsheet to PLC I/O Utility tool. 3 Select the spreadsheet and click Open.
Change and save the settings 1 Click the arrow on the Insert PLC (Parametric) tool to access the Spreadsheet to PLC I/O Utility tool. 2 Click the Spreadsheet to PLC I/O Utility tool. 3 Select the spreadsheet and click Open. 4 In the Spreadsheet to PLC I/O Utility dialog box, do one of the following: ■ Click Setup to define how the drawings should be set up (based on the defaut settings).
Read the settings 1 Click the arrow on the Insert PLC (Parametric) tool to access the Spreadsheet to PLC I/O Utility tool. 2 Click the Spreadsheet to PLC I/O Utility tool. 3 Select the spreadsheet and click Open. 4 In the Spreadsheet to PLC I/O Utility dialog box, click Browse. 5 Select a previously created file (it has a ".WDI" file extension) and click Open. Your settings are now restored and are used for the drawings generated from the selected spreadsheet or database table.
Electrical searches for the file in the standard search locations in the following order: 1 User subdirectory (C:\Documents and Settings\{username}\Application. Data\Autodesk\AutoCAD Electrical\{release #}\{country code}\Support\User\) 2 Active project's .wdp file subdirectory 3 Symbol library paths defined for the active project 4 AutoCAD Electrical lookup subdirectory (C:\Documents and Settings\{username}\My Documents\Acade {version}\AeData 5 AutoCAD Electrical support (C:\Program Files [(x86)]\Autodesk\A
Drawing to drawing Indicates whether to use the next sequential number for the first ladder on each successive drawing or to use the specified value to skip for the next drawing's first ladder reference. Module Placement There are 3 options related to module placement.
Drawing File Creation Use active drawing Indicates to use the open and active drawing file to begin the PLC placement process. NOTE This is unavailable if a Starting file name is specified. Starting file name Specifies the drawing file to begin with for your PLC drawings. Enter a name or click Browse to select a file. The .dwg extension is not required and the file is saved in the same folder as the active .wdp file.
and number of rungs. You can also define the module placement, style, scale , and inline device placement and spacing. Access: Click the arrow on the Insert PLC (Parametric) tool to access the Spreadsheet PLC I/O Utility tool. Select the spreadsheet output file and click Open. In the Spreadsheet to PLC I/O Utility dialog box, click Setup. From the Components menu, select Insert PLC Modules ➤ Spreadsheet to PLC I/O Utility. Select the spreadsheet output file and click Open.
■ X Zones: Similar to X-Y Grid, but there isn't a Y-axis. Set your drawing's horizontal labels, spacing, and origin on the X Zones setup dialog box. TIP Use a negative zone spacing value if you want the zone reference origin to be at the right side of the drawing. Width Specifies the width of each ladder (offset distance between the ladder's 2 bus wires) from left to right rail.
Module PLC graphical style Specifies the default PLC module style. Select from the 5 predefined styles or a user-defined style. Input offset from neutral Specifies the Input module insertion offset distance (vertical ladder orientation - measured in +X direction from right-hand vertical bus; horizontal ladder orientation - measured in +Y direction from lower horizontal bus).
In Line Devices First input device from hot bus Specifies the starting offset distance from the left-hand or upper bus for the first (or only) inline device defined for each Input module I/O point. First output device from neutral bus Specifies the starting offset distance from the right-hand or lower bus for the first (or only) inline device defined for each Output module I/O point. Spacing between multiple devices Specifies the insertion point offset distance between one in-line device and the next.
Create PLC spreadsheets using RSLogix RSLogix is a PLC programming software package for programming various Allen-Bradley PLCs. This program has an output function that can write the I/O information out to an ASCII file. AutoCAD Electrical imports this information and creates a regular spreadsheet from the data that can then be used to create PLC drawing files.
2 Click the arrow on the Insert PLC (Parametric) tool to access the RSLogix 500 Export to Spreadsheet tool. 3 Click the RSLogix 500 Export to Spreadsheet tool. 4 Select an .EAS or .CSV file and click Open. 5 In the RSLogix 500 Import dialog box, select whether the I/O points should be displayed in 8, 16, or 32 point groupings. 6 Pick an I/O module for each set of I/O points.
Use this tool to import I/O information from RSLogix and create a regular spreadsheet from the data that can then be used for the Spreadsheet to PLC I/O generator. Access: Click the arrow on the Insert PLC (Parametric) tool to access the RSLogix 500 Export to Spreadsheet tool. Select an .EAS or .CSV file and click Open. From the Components menu, select Insert PLC Modules ➤ RSLogix 500 Export to Spreadsheet. Select an .EAS or .CSV file and click Open.
Access: From the Components menu, select Insert PLC Modules ➤ RSLogix 500 Export to Spreadsheet. Select an .EAS or .CSV file and click Open. Select one of the module assignments and click Change. The text “Change Module x” displays underneath the dialog box title bar to keep track of which module you are changing. Select below for module part number assignment Displays the I/O modules already picked for each set of I/O points.
Panel Layouts or separate Rack Layout drawings using the Unity Pro Export to Spreadsheet tool. Data structure from the Unity Pro Hardware Configuration File The tree structure data that displays in the Hardware File section of the Unity Pro Import dialog box is as follows: Project node The Project node is the topmost node defined in the tree structure. The label given to the node is the file name of the hardware configuration (.xhw) file that was defined during the export from Unity Pro.
■ Module Location: displays the location of the module in the rack and is specified in the topoAddress of the .xhw file. (i.e. 1.1\1.1) ■ Module Catalog Number: displays the catalog number of the module and is specified in the partNumber element of the .xhw file. (i.e. 140CPS21400) Unity Pro to AutoCAD Electrical Mapping File The Unity Pro to AutoCAD Electrical mapping file, DEFAULT_UNITY.
■ Column 3 = ASSYCODE; column defined (left blank) ■ Column 4 = TAG; column defined (left blank) ■ Column 5 = LOC; column defined (left blank) ■ Column 6 = INST; column defined (left blank) ■ Column 7 = DESC1; partFamily variable from the .xhw file ■ Column 8 = WDBLKNAM; PLCIO Import Unity Pro files to a spreadsheet 1 In Unity Pro, right-click the configuration file in the project browser and select Export. 2 Enter a file name for the .xhw file and click Export.
5 In AutoCAD Electrical, click the arrow on the Insert PLC (Parametric) tool to access the Unity Pro Export to Spreadsheet tool. 6 Click the Unity Pro Export to Spreadsheet tool. 7 Select the Unity Pro hardware configuration file (.xhw) and click Open. 8 Select the Unity Pro I/O configuration file (.xsy) and click Open. Upon successful validation of the files selected for import, the Unity Pro Import dialog box displays.
11 Specify a file name and location for the PLC spreadsheet file and click Save. 12 Specify a file name and location for the Equipment List file and click Save. 13 Select Components ➤ Insert PLC Modules ➤ Spreadsheet to PLC I/O Utility to create the PLC drawing. (page 257) Unity Pro import This tool imports Unity Pro hardware (.xsy) and I/O variable (.xsy) files into AutoCAD Electrical to reformat the data into a PLC import spreadsheet.
■ Rack location and catalog number ■ Module location and catalog number Right-click on a node to include or exclude modules from being saved into the spreadsheet file. Upon exclusion the module icon changes to indicate that it has been excluded. You can exclude or include an entire rack node. Multiple node selection is allowed. Changed icons: NOTE If you choose to include modules that do not contain any I/O addressing, the module catalog number appears in the Code column of the spreadsheet.
Include outer terminals Defines a terminal symbol to be placed into the spreadsheet on the outer side of the in-line component (between the I/O component and the wire connected to the ladder rail). ■ All I/O addresses: Places the terminal symbol name into the row of every I/O address listed in the import spreadsheet. ■ I/O addresses defined: Places the terminal symbol name into every row where an I/O point is defined from Unity Pro.
Variable export file. This field is not editable in the dialog box. ■ Terminal: Defines the placement of a terminal symbol in line with the PLC I/O point. Select the check box to place a terminal symbol in the spreadsheet and drawing file. Since this is not defined in the Unity Pro export files, it must be defined prior to creating the AutoCAD Electrical import spreadsheet. ■ Symbol Name: Displays the AutoCAD Electrical schematic symbol file name to be placed in line with the PLC I/O points.
button to select a terminal to use from the icon menu. I/O variable grid right-click options Right-clicking in the I/O variable grid control allows you to edit the file prior to creating the PLC I/O spreadsheet. Multiple selection is allowed. Select Symbol Displays the icon menu for selection of symbol file names. Selecting a symbol file name fills in an empty grid cell or overwrites the existing text in a cell.
Create XML files for export to Unity Pro The Unity Pro Export command creates the Unity Pro I/O variable file (.xsy) in the Unity Pro XML format. You can create the file for the active project or active drawing. AutoCAD Electrical suggests naming the XML data file based on whether you select to export for the project or a drawing. The default file name is either “Projectname.xml” or “Drawing filename.xml.” The Unity Pro export file is generated from the PLC drawings and their respective PLC symbols.
maintained on the PLC module so that the file can be imported back into Unity Pro. 1 In AutoCAD Electrical, click the arrow on the Schematic Reports tool to access the Unity Pro Export tool. 2 Click the Unity Pro Export tool. 3 In the Unity Pro Export dialog box, select to create an export file (.xsy) for the project or the active drawing and click OK. 4 If you selected Project, select the drawings to process and click OK.
282
6 Component Tools In this chapter ■ Insert schematic components ■ Insert a copy of a component ■ Insert similar components ■ Insert from catalog lists ■ Use the schematic lookup file ■ Insert from panel lists ■ Manipulate Components ■ Swap contact states ■ Check coil/contact count ■ Follow signals ■ Insert dashed link lines ■ Overview of DIN Rails ■ Edit schematic lookup files ■ Overview of user data records ■ Component Cross-References ■ Circuits ■ Wire Jumpers 283
Insert schematic components Use the Insert Component tool to insert a component into the drawing. 1 Click the Insert Component tool. 2 In the Insert Component dialog box, select the starting orientation for the component: horizontal or vertical. 3 (Optional) If you want to turn off the Insert/Edit Component dialog box when inserting symbols onto the drawing select No Edit dialog. 4 (Optional) If you want to insert the component, untagged (for example, without assigning a unique Component Tag) select No Tag.
and select Properties. Use the Icon Menu Wizard to easily modify the menu. The default icon menu can also be redefined in "wd.env." Add entry "WD_MENU" for schematic icon menu and "WD_PMENU" for panel layout icon menu. Access: Click the Insert Component tool or the Multiple Insert Component tool. Click Components ➤ Insert Component or Components ➤ Multiple Insert ➤ Multiple Insert (Icon Menu).
Clicking on the icon performs one of the following functions based on the icon properties as defined by the *.dat file: ■ Inserts the symbol or circuit onto the drawing ■ Executes a command ■ Displays a submenu NOTE When you move the cursor over an icon, the icon name and block/circuit/command name display as tooltip information. Recently Used Displays the last components inserted during the current editing session; the most recently used icon displays in the top.
Scale schematic Specifies the component block insertion scale. This defaults to the value set in the Drawing Properties ➤ Drawing Format dialog box. Once set, this value is remembered until reset or until the drawing editing session ends. Scale panel Specifies the footprint insertion scale. This defaults to the value set in the Drawing Properties ➤ Drawing Format dialog box. Once set, this value is remembered until reset or until the drawing editing session ends.
Pneumatic, Hydraulic and P&ID icon menus The Menu tree structure displays the symbols for the selected component type (pneumatic, hydraulic or P&ID). The Insert Pneumatic Component, Insert Hydraulic Component and Insert P&ID Component tools are accessed on the Extra Library toolbar. Insert Pneumatic Component Insert Hydraulic Component Insert P&ID Component Insert/edit component NOTE While inserting a component for the first time, you establish its tag definition inside the project.
Access: Click the Edit Component tool and select the component to edit. Click Components ➤ Edit Component and select the component to edit. You can go back to any component at any time and make changes. NOTE Some options may not be available depending on whether you are inserting a single component or multiple components. To insert multiple components, click Components ➤ Multiple Insert ➤ Multiple Insert (Icon Menu). Component Tag Any existing tags appear in the edit box.
External List Assigns a tag from an external list file. You can reference an ASCII text file in comma or space delimited format to help annotate the component's description, tag, catalog, and other information. Options Substitutes a fixed text string for the %F part of the tag format. Enter a tag format override in the edit box. Retag Component uses this override format value to calculate a new tag for the selected component.
Previous Scans the previous project to find an instance of the selected component and returns the component values. You can then make your catalog assignment by picking from the dialog list. Drawing Lists the part numbers used for similar components in the current drawing. Project Lists the part numbers used for similar components in the project. You can search in the active project, another project, or an external file.
Ratings Specifies values for each ratings attribute. You can enter up to 12 ratings attributes on a component. Select Defaults to display a list of default values. NOTE If Ratings is grayed out, the component you are editing does not carry rating attributes. Description Up to 3 lines of description attribute text can be entered. Drawing Displays a list of descriptions found in the current drawing so you can pick similar descriptions to edit.
the associated contact count and pin number information is retrieved and placed on the parent component. Click NO/NC Setup to view or manually edit pin list data values. Installation Code Changes the installation codes. You can search the current drawing or entire project for installation codes. A quick read of all the current or selected drawing files is done and a list of installation codes used so far is returned. Select from the list to automatically update the component with the installation code.
OK-Repeat (not available when editing components) Inserts the new component onto the drawing and then inserts another 'just like' component. Insert/edit component: IEC This Insert/Edit Component dialog box is for working in IEC mode. If you are working in JIC mode, the dialog box displays differently. NOTE While inserting a component for the first time you establish its tag definition inside of the project.
file is done and a list of installation codes used so far is returned. Select from the list to automatically update the component with the installation code. Assign short installation codes to components like "PNL" and "FIELD" so you can create location-specific BOM and component lists later. Location Changes the location codes. You can search the current drawing or entire project for location codes.
Options Substitutes a fixed text string for the %F part of the tag format. Enter a tag format override in the edit box. Retag Component uses this override format value to calculate a new tag for the selected component. Description Up to 3 lines of description attribute text can be entered. Drawing Displays a list of descriptions found in the current drawing so you can pick similar descriptions to edit.
Item Specifies a unique identifier assigned to each component. The tag value can be manually typed in the edit box. Count Specifies the quantity number for the part number (blank=1). This value gets inserted into a BOM report's "SUBQTY" column. Lookup Opens the component's catalog database from which you can manually enter or select the Manufacturer or Catalog values. Search the database for a specific catalog item to assign to the selected component.
Reference NO/ Reference NC A pin list database table is consulted when a part number is added or an existing part number is changed on a parent symbol. If a match on the part number's Manufacturer, Catalog, and Assembly values in the database table is found, the associated contact count and pin number information is retrieved and placed on the parent component. Click NO/NC Setup to view or manually edit pin list data values. Ratings Specifies values for each ratings attribute.
part numbers to any schematic or panel component on-the-fly. These multiple BOM part numbers appear as sub-assembly part numbers to the main catalog part number in the various BOM and component reports. Access: On the Insert/Edit Component or Panel Layout - Component Insert/Edit dialog box, Catalog Data section, click Multiple Catalog.
Parts Catalog Lookup Lists the catalog database table that is to be referenced for the description information for the given Manufacturer/Catalog/Assembly combination. For each catalog entry you must provide a name for the catalog look-up table. For the main catalog entry this information is provided on the symbol itself but may not be there for these catalog entries. Select List to pick from a list of tables that are contained in your catalog database file or Misc to use the MISC_CAT table.
Displays a listing of all component tags found on the schematic for the project. Access: Click the Insert Component tool. Select the component type to insert and specify the insertion point on the drawing. In the Insert/Edit Component dialog box, click Tags Used: Schematic. From the Components menu, select Insert Component. Select the component type to insert and specify the insertion point on the drawing. In the Insert/Edit Component dialog box, click Tags Used: Schematic.
Displays a listing of all component tags found on the panel drawings for the project. Access: Click the Insert Component tool. Select the component type to insert and specify the insertion point on the drawing. In the Insert/Edit Component dialog box, click Tags Used: Panel. From the Components menu, select Insert Component. Select the component type to insert and specify the insertion point on the drawing. In the Insert/Edit Component dialog box, click Tags Used: Panel.
the component. The default extension for this file is ".wdx" but can also be ".csv" or ".txt." The file format is free-form. Access: Click the Insert Component tool. Select the component type to insert and specify the insertion point on the drawing. In the Insert/Edit Component dialog box, click External List. Select the .wdx, .csv, or .txt file to reference and click Open. Select a line of data from the list and click OK. From the Components menu, select Insert Component.
Pick File Selects a different file and description list. Language Displays the Language Database file (WD_LANG1.MDB) for the AutoCAD Electrical Language Conversion tool. Project Displays a project .wdd file (if not already displayed). Family Displays a family .wdd file (if not already displayed). For example, if the component has the family code “PB” for pushbuttons and a file called PB.WDD exists, it displays when you click Family. General Displays a generic file (WD_DESC.
NOTE Use the Projects ➤ Language Conversion ➤ Edit Language Database File tool to modify the language table. Select language Selects a predefined language. NOTE Language matches are not case sensitive, but phrase substitutions are made exactly as entered in the language table. Phrase list in selected language Displays a phrase list for the selected language. Pick language/Phrase to use Specifies which language to use for the selected phrase. Pick File Selects a different file and description list.
Access: Defaults. In the Descriptions dialog box, click Language. Select the phrase and language to edit and click OK. 1 Line, 2 Lines, 3 Lines Specifies whether to display the selected description text in one line or across multiple lines. Examples of what the description will look like appear next to the options. Manual edit/override Overrides the selected description text. You can use the default text or type modifications in the edit box. The "|" character forces a line break.
Access: From the Components menu, select Edit Component. Select the component to edit. In the Insert/Edit Component dialog box, Pins section, click List. Pin List The three lists display all available pins to be assigned to the component. The number in parenthesis () indicates the single or pair of pins for the component. Pins can be Unused NO Pairs, Unused Form-C contacts, and undefined.
Insert a copy of a component Use the Copy Component tool to insert a copy an existing component into the drawing. 1 Click the Copy Component tool. 2 Select a component from the drawing just like the new one you want to insert. 3 Select the insertion point. This inserts a copy of the symbol you selected and then displays the Insert/Edit Component dialog box, so you can finish annotating the component. 4 Click OK.
If you keep the insertion point, the regular Insert/Edit dialog box is displayed, where you finish annotating the component. 7 Click OK to complete the operation. Insert or edit child component Access: Click the Multiple Insert Component tool. Select the component type to insert and select the insertion point on the drawing. From the Components menu, select Multiple Insert ➤ Multiple Insert (Icon Menu). Select Relay/Contact and select the insertion point on the drawing.
Cross-reference AutoCAD Electrical automatically fills in cross-reference text when the cross-reference command is run. Installation Code Changes the installation code(s). You can search the current drawing or entire project for installation codes. AutoCAD Electrical does a quick read of all the current or selected drawing files and returns a list of all installation codes used so far. Pick from the list to automatically update the component with the installation code.
This is Insert/Edit Child Component dialog box for working in IEC mode. If you are working in JIC mode, the dialog box will display differently. Access: Click the Multiple Insert Component tool. Select the component type to insert and select the insertion point on the drawing. ClickComponents ➤ Multiple Insert ➤ Multiple Insert (Icon Menu). Select Relay/Contact and select the insertion point on the drawing. Click the Edit Component tool and select the component to edit.
Description Up to 3 lines of description attribute text can be entered. These lines are automatically filled with a copy of the parent's description text if the parent Tag name is picked using one of the methods described previously. You can enter descriptions or select a description from a component on the current drawing. Ratings Specifies values for each ratings attribute. You can enter up to 12 ratings attributes on a component. Select Defaults to display a list of default values.
NOTE This procedure uses schematic tools, but the same procedure can be done using panel tools. 1 Click the arrow on the Insert Component tool to access the Insert Component (Catalog List) tool. 2 Click the Insert Component (Catalog List) tool. 3 Sort the component list by catalog, description, or manufacturer. 4 Select the component to insert. 5 (Optional) Click Edit to make any changes to the catalog record. Modify the record in the Edit Record dialog box and click OK.
the bottom of the pick list's dialog box. The AutoCAD Electrical normal search path sequence is used to locate this file. Access: Click the arrow on the Insert Component tool to access the Insert Component (Catalog List) tool. From the Component menu, select Insert Component (Lists) ➤ Insert Component (Catalog List). Click the arrow on the Insert Footprint tool to access the Insert Footprint (Catalog List) tool. From the Panel Layout menu, select Insert Footprint (Lists) ➤ Insert Footprint (Catalog List).
Access: Click the drop-down arrow on the Insert Footprint tool to access the Insert Footprint (Catalog List) tool. From the Panel Layout menu, select Insert Footprint (Catalog List). Click Add or Edit. NOTE When you add a record you must indicate if the component or circuit is Schematic or Panel and you need to indicate if it should be inserted as a block or exploded upon insert (as you would for a circuit). Then, at a minimum, you need to define the block name and either the catalog number or description.
NOTE If the catalog number actually has a character in it like #, then precede it with the ` char, example "F120#10" would be "F120`#10" Optional Values (These options are not available for exploded inserts) Options for specifying the manufacturer code, assembly code, and text values. If the catalog information includes an ASSYCODE value, include it in the record to ensure a complete match.
project-specific .mdb file is used, it needs to be in the same subdirectory as the .wdp file. Lookup file naming convention: AutoCAD Electrical takes the target footprint's MFG code and looks for a table, in your Access schematic_lookup.mdb file with that name. For example, if the footprint's MFG value is SQD, then AutoCAD Electrical searches for a schematic lookup table called SQD; manufacturer code of AB yields the table name AB.
Table query sequence Queries on this database can be multi-level until a hit is returned. The first level is a query on the MFG/CAT/ASSYCODE fields. If 0 records are returned, a second query is done on just the CATALOG field (or the CATEGORY field if working with terminals). If 0 records are returned, a third query is done on the WDBLKNAM field. If this fails to return any records, a final query is made on keywords in the FUNCTION_DESCRIPTION field.
NOTE This procedure uses schematic tools, but the same procedure can be done using panel tools. 1 Click the arrow on the Insert Component tool to access the Insert Component (Equipment List) tool. 2 Click the Insert Component (Equipment List) tool. 3 Select the spreadsheet file to use and click Open. 4 If multiple sheets/tables were found in the data file, select the table to edit. 5 Click OK.
12 Make any changes to the component's scale, orientation, or rotation angle. 13 Select the method for inserting the component into the drawing: ■ Insert: Finds and inserts a schematic (or panel) component for the highlighted equipment list component. ■ Pick File: Picks a file for the insert. Select an existing AutoCAD Electrical extracted equipment list component list file or extract a fresh copy of panel component data from the current project's database.
Access: Insert Footprint (Equipment List). Select the spreadsheet file to use and click Open. Click the table to edit and click OK. Default settings Uses the default settings for managing equipment lists. Read settings Reads and uses the settings for a previously saved file. Spreadsheet/Table columns Defines the order of the data in the selected equipment list file.
Catalog Check Performs a Bill of Material check and displays the result. This is enabled if the selected equipment list item contains catalog data. TAG Options Specifies whether to use the component tag as listed in the equipment list or recalculate the schematic tag based on the tagging settings of the drawing. When a component that doesn't have a tag is selected from the list, this switch is automatically set to Use auto-generated schematic TAG.
selected schematic component is then annotated with the panel footprint or equipment list data and inserted into the drawing. You can also select one of the methods below to insert an alternative symbol. Access: Click Insert on the Panel terminals, Panel components, or Schematic equipment list in dialog boxes. Icon Menu Displays the icon menu from which you can select the schematic component to insert.
Component dialog box to make any additional changes to the new schematic component. 1 Click the arrow on the Insert Component tool to access the Insert Component (Panel List) tool. 2 Click the Insert Component (Panel List) tool. NOTE Click the Insert Terminal (Panel List) tool to insert a panel terminal. 3 Specify whether to extract the panel component/terminal list for the active drawing or the active project. 4 Specify any installation or location codes to extract. 5 Click OK.
Panel layout list ➤ schematic components insert This tool lists panel components extracted from your panel drawing, finds the appropriate schematic symbol, and inserts the schematic components at your pick point. Access: Click the arrow on the Insert Component tool to access the Insert Component (Panel List) tool. From the Components menu, select Insert Component (Panel List). Extract component list for Specifies to export the data for the active drawing or the entire active project.
and panel, looking for a match. For each panel component, the routine tries to find a matching schematic component based on tag, location, and installation information. If a match is found, then it compares catalog information looking for any discrepancies. Access: Click the arrow on the Insert Component tool to access the Insert Terminal (Panel List) tool. From the Components menu, select Insert Terminal (Panel List).
After the selection of the schematic component and the annotation of the device tag, all panel-related information such as descriptions, installation, and location codes are copied to the schematic. You can select to insert a single schematic component or multiple components from the panel list. Access: Click the arrow on the Insert Component tool to access the Insert Component (Panel List) tool. Select Project and click OK. Select the files to process and click OK.
Catalog Check Performs a Bill of Material check and displays the result. This is enabled if the selected panel item contains catalog data. TAG Options Specifies whether to use the panel tag as is, or recalculate the schematic tag based on the tagging settings of the drawing. When a component that doesn't have a tag is selected from the list, this switch is automatically set to Use auto-generated schematic TAG.
Pick File Picks a file for the insert. Select an existing AutoCAD Electrical extracted panel component list file or extract a fresh copy of panel component data from the current project's database. Panel terminals This presents a list of all panel terminals extracted from the project's panel layout drawings. As you pick an item from the pick list, the appropriate schematic terminal is found and inserted in the drawing at your pick point.
Catalog Check Performs a Bill of Material check and displays the result. This is enabled if the selected panel terminal contains catalog data. Last symbol used Displays the last symbol selected through the insert process. You can clear the selection and go back through the insert process to select the schematic terminal symbol or you can automatically insert the last symbol used by not making any changes. Scale Specifies the block insert scale. (1.
Cross-reference" command is required on the drawing set). If you erase a parent schematic component you will have the option to search for related child components, surf to them, and optionally delete them. Scoot components/wire segments The Scoot command lets you quickly reposition components and wire segments. Components stay connected and existing wire numbers re-center. Pick on the component to slide just the component along it's connected wire(s).
Stretch PLC modules The Stretch PLC Module command is a very handy feature, especially for PLC modules. Let's say you have a PLC module and you need to add a couple components in parallel on a particular rung and you did not leave enough room between the I/O points. What do you do? You could erase everything and rebuild the module and then reinsert the components, redo the wiring, etc. or you could use the Stretch PLC Module command. NOTE The block name itself is changed to make it unique.
Delete components 1 Click the Delete Component tool. 2 Select the components to delete. 3 Press Enter. NOTE If you erase a parent schematic component, you have the option to search for related child components, surf to them, and delete them. Scoot components/wire segments 1 Click the Scoot tool. 2 Select the component to scoot along its connected wires or select the wire segment to scoot the entire wire, including components, along the bus. A rectangle indicates the selected items.
All connected wires are adjusted, and wire numbers recentered if necessary. You can align vertically or horizontally by flipping the command with a V or H character and a [space] entered on the command line. Move components 1 Click the arrow on the Scoot tool to access the Move Component tool. 2 Click the Move Component tool. 3 Select the component to move. 4 Select the insertion point for the move. The component automatically moves to the selected position.
1 Click the arrow on the Scoot tool to access the Split PLC Module tool. 2 Click the Split PLC Module tool. 3 Select the block to split. It explodes the block into individual parts. 4 Select the objects for the new child component using a crossing window or crossing polygon. Keep windowing until all objects are selected. To cancel the selection of any object, press U and select as usual. 5 Define the origin point for the new block.
Access: From the Components menu, select Insert Connector ➤ Split Connector. Select the connector to split and specify the split point. Child Base Point Specifies the origin point for the new block. The default is in-line with the first set of pins on the split-off piece. If you do not want to accept the default, enter the coordinates or click Pick Point and select the origin point on the drawing. Break Type Specifies the break type: no lines, straight lines, jagged lines, or draw it.
Annotate ratings attributes 1 Click the Edit Components tool. 2 Click the Show All Ratings button in the Insert/Edit Components dialog box. The View/Edit Rating Value dialog box displays, letting you enter values for each ratings attribute. 3 Click the Defaults button next to the edit box to display the list of default values. 4 Select a line from the file to map its values to the available ratings attributes. Notice that a single line may carry multiple values with each value separated by a "|" character.
text file with a .WDR extension. This file is a simple text file and can be edited with any editor such as WordPad. Access: Click the Edit Component tool. Click the Show All Ratings button, and then click Defaults. From the Components menu, select Edit Component and click the Show All Ratings button, and then click Defaults. Ratings panel Displays the values for the rating attribute. Pick File Selects a different file and description list. Project Displays a project .
NOTE This tool only operates on a component with 2-wire connections (for example, limit switch contact symbol). 1 Click the arrow on the Scoot tool to access the Reverse/Flip Component tool. 2 Click the Reverse/Flip Component tool. 3 Select whether to reverse or flip the component. NOTE Components are reversed perpendicular to the axis formed by the two wire connections or flipped along the axis of the wire connection. 4 (Optional) Select to reverse or flip the graphics only.
Graphics only Specifies to reverse or flip only the graphics; component attributes are not modified. Swap contact states This tool flips a contact from one state (open or closed) to the other. It looks at the picked contact, reads its block name, and checks the 5th character position for either 1 or 2. It then substitutes 1 or 2 for the found character. 1 Click the Toggle NO/NC tool. 2 Select the component to toggle. 3 (Optional) Type Ctrl + Z to undo the contact swap if you selected the wrong component.
The Cross-Reference Check tool displays all associated and parent components to the selected component. Access: Click the arrow on the Component Cross-Reference tool to access the CrossReference Check tool. From the Components menu, select Cross-Reference ➤ Cross-Reference Check. A complete list of components is extracted from the project drawing set. The component's tag is read, then all associated components are found and listed in the dialog box.
■ Catalog lookup: Opens the parts catalog in order to look up component-specific catalog information. Follow signals Follow a signal for a source or destination signal Use the List Signal Code tool to follow a signal from a specific source or destination symbol. 1 Click the drop-down arrow on the Source/Destination Signals tool to access the List Signal Code tool. 2 Click the List Signal Code tool. 3 Select the signal marker to list. The signal code dialog box appears.
All source and destination references for the signal code are listed in the three boxed groups: Previous drawings (sheet/reference) Shows the references on upstream (previous) drawings. Current drawing Shows the references on the current drawing. Downstream drawings (sheet/reference) Shows references on downstream (next) drawings. Surf Navigates to any of the references.
Insert dashed link lines This tool draws a dashed line from a component to a "To" or "From" arrow symbol. 1 Click the arrow on the Link Components with Dashed Lines tool to access the Insert Reference Arrow - To tool (or the Insert Reference Arrow - From tool). 2 Click the Insert Reference Arrow - To tool. 3 Select the contact to draw the line from. 4 Select where the arrow endpoint should be on the drawing. 5 Insert a description for the dashed link line in the Description dialog box and click OK.
Spreadsheet fields MFG Manufacturer. CAT Catalog Number. ASSYCODE Assembly code. DESC Description used for dialog listing only. RAILWID Din rail width; distance between the top and bottom rail lines. RAILCEN Distance between the din rail centerlines. RAILCEN1 Distance between the din rail centerlines; used for nonsymmetrical din rails. RAILCEN2 Distance between bottom center line and the slot centers; used for nonsymmetrical din rails.
SLOTLEN Length of each slot. Enter a SLOTLEN of 0.0 to generate a block without slots. SLOTWID Width of each slot. CHANNEL Distance from channel line to the origin; repeated for each channel line. CHANNEL_END Distance from origin to channel end for each channel. MIN_SHIFT Length of rail to shift from one piece of rail to the next to make sure last piece is not less than the minimum length. NCHOLE Name of AutoCAD block for the drill hole. BRKT Allow standoff brackets, Yes or No.
Parametric building of wire ways You can create generic wire way records in the spreadsheet (wddinrl.xls) for parametric building of wire ways. To do so, add the following records in the spreadsheet: ■ MFG = PANDUIT ■ CAT = Generic ■ DESC = Wire duct, 3.25"x3.11" tall, slotted ■ RAILLENSTD = 72 ■ WDBLKNAM = WW ■ MFG = PANDUIT ■ CAT = Generic ■ DESC = Wire duct, 3.92"x1.89" tall, slotted ■ RAILLENSTD = 78.
columns are in this order, 0.69 0.49 -0.49 -0.69, this means the inner lines are the second and third channel columns. So the CHANNEL_PROP columns are: ■ First column: leave blank ■ Second column LTYPE HIDDEN2 ■ Third column: LTYPE HIDDEN2 ■ Fourth column: blank END_PROP Use this field to define the properties for the end lines. CHANNEL_PROP Use this field to define the properties for the channel lines.
Panel mounting Specifies to mount the panel at NC holes, standoffs, or none. Edit schematic lookup files 1 Click the arrow on the Miscellaneous Panel Tools tool to access the Schematic Database File Editor tool. 2 Click the Schematic Database File Editor tool. 3 (Optional) Click Sort to sort the database fields so that you can quickly find the record you are looking for. 4 (Optional) Click Find or Replace to jump to the next occurrence of the specified text or to replace the existing text.
Use this tool to add or modify records in the schematic_lookup.mdb file to use for mapping panel footprints and terminal representations to the equivalent schematic component block names. Access: Click the arrow on the Miscellaneous Panel Tools tool to access the Schematic Database File Editor tool. From the Panel Layout menu, select Database File Editor ➤ Schematic Database File Editor. This lookup database table is a catalog lookup Access .mdb file that can be expanded as needed.
Edit record Edit new, existing, or copied records in the schematic_lookup.mdb database. Access: Click the arrow on the Miscellaneous Panel Tools tool to access the Schematic Database File Editor tool. Click Add New, Add Copy, or Edit or double-click on a record in the Edit dialog box. From the Panel Layout menu, select Database File Editor ➤ Schematic Database File Editor. Click Add New, Add Copy, or Edit or double-click on a record in the Edit dialog box.
information is extracted and maintained in a USER table in the project database. This allows you to do queries on the project database file (in Microsoft Access format) and access all of this user information carried on all entities project-wide. This data is stored on the entities as invisible extended entity data. You are free to use this data in any way you see fit.
Delete record Removes the selected record number from the database. If no user data records are found on the block insert, an alert is displayed in the dialog box prompting you to add a new record. Use stand-alone cross-reference symbols Cross-referencing is based on collecting and annotating groups of components that carry the same TAG text string value (for example, 101CR).
it. These can be on the same drawing or scattered across the project drawing set. 1 Click the arrow on the Parent/Child Cross-Reference tool to access the Insert Stand-Alone Cross-Reference tool. 2 Click the Insert Stand-Alone Cross-Reference tool. 3 On the Insert Component dialog box, select the cross-reference symbol to insert from the Symbol Preview window. You can also enter the symbol to insert in the Type it edit box or click Browse to select a symbol to insert.
Update stand-alone cross-reference symbol annotations 1 Click the arrow on the Parent/Child Cross-Reference tool to access the Update Stand-Alone Cross-Reference tool. 2 Click the Update Stand-Alone Cross-Reference tool. The Update Wire Signal and Stand-Alone Cross-Reference dialog box displays. 3 Specify whether to update the cross-reference annotation between pairs of stand-alone cross-reference symbols. 4 Specify to update the cross-references for the entire drawing or one at a time. 5 Click OK.
NOTE This dialog box is also accessed when inserting Pneumatic, Hydraulic, or P&ID components; in-line wire labels; stand-alone cross-reference symbols; cable markers; and saved circuits. Select an icon picture or the component type from the Menu tree structure. The main menu in the tree structure is displayed as the menu heading just above the menu tree structure. Tabs ■ Menu: Changes the visibility of the Menu tree view.
Display Specifies the number of icons to display in the Recently Used list box. Enter integer numbers only; the default value is 10. Vertical/Horizontal Inserts the icon using a vertical or horizontal orientation. This is opposite the drawing's default ladder rung orientation. No edit dialog Turns off the Insert/Edit Component dialog box when inserting symbols onto the drawing. To add component detail later, click the Edit Component tool, and select the component to edit.
Right-click on the main menu or submenu in the Menu tree structure view to display the following options: ■ Expand/Collapse: Toggles the visibility of the menus. ■ Properties: Opens a Properties dialog box to view the existing menu or submenu properties like the menu name, image or submenu title. Use the Icon Menu Wizard to change any menu properties.
Stand-alone source or destination cross-reference symbol You use stand-alone cross-reference symbols just as you would wire source/destination arrow symbols but without the wires. Insert a source reference symbol and then tie one or more destination reference symbols to it. These can be on the same drawing or scattered across the project drawing set. Access: Click the arrow on the Component Cross-Reference tool to access the Insert Stand-Alone Cross-Reference tool.
Update wire signal and stand-alone cross-reference There may be times that you need to update your source or destination signals singly, drawing-wide, or project-wide. This utility updates cross-reference information for two types of cross-reference symbols: wire number signal arrow symbols and stand-alone cross-reference symbols. Access: Click the arrow on the Source/Destination Signals tool to access the Update Signal References tool.
Change cross-reference visibility This tool changes the visibility of the cross-reference XREF attribute. In most cases the cross-referencing should be visible but there are times when you may not want the cross-referencing displayed on parent symbols. 1 Click the arrow on the Component Cross-Referencing tool to access the Hide/Unhide Cross-Reference tool. 2 Click the Hide/Unhide Cross-Referencing tool. 3 Select the objects whose cross-referencing you want to hide or display.
NOTE This command will not work unless both members of a linked pair carry X?LINK attributes. See Overview of schematic attributes (page 177)for more information on X?LINK attributes. 1 Click the Link Components with Dashed Lines tool. 2 Select the contacts in the order you want the dashed link line drawn. AutoCAD Electrical changes the contact's annotation to invisible and draws a dashed link line from the bottom of the upper contact to the top of the new contact.
AutoCAD Electrical uses the drawing settings to determine the cross-reference types. During program run-time, the cross-reference command looks at the WD_M block as the definition for all referencing on the drawing. Component Cross-Reference Settings Settings are maintained at the component to override the drawing's WD_M block settings.
TIP To set display settings for a specific component that are different than the drawing, use the Copy/Add Component Override tool. 1 Click the Project Manager tool. 2 In the Project Manager, right-click the project or drawing name, and select Properties. NOTE Selecting the project applies changes to the project definition file and not the drawing. You must later apply the settings to drawings to see display changes. 3 Click the Cross-References tab.
To set the table title, select the allowable replaceable parameter entry from the selection list, enter the replaceable parameter to use, or enter text for the table title. 7 Click OK. If you selected to use the Table Format style, the table location is based on the cross reference attribute position, but you can move the table to any location on the drawing and the table will remain in the new position for that symbol.
NOTE If your format includes the sheet number %S parameter or the drawing number %D parameter, you must enter the values in the edit boxes in Sheet Values section of the Drawing Properties ➤ Drawing Settings dialog box. Component Cross-Reference Display There are different styles of cross referencing AutoCAD Electrical supports: ■ Text Format: Displays cross-referencing as text with any user-defined string as a separator between references on the same attribute.
Project and Active drawing (all) remove overrides on all components on the drawings while Active drawing (pick) removes overrides for selected components only. Text cross-reference format setup This format displays cross-referencing as text with any user-defined string as a separator between references on the same cross-reference attribute. NOTE Mtext cross-referencing can still be used on selected components that use text cross-referencing. Access: Click the Project Manager tool.
Preview Displays an image that shows an example of the cross-referencing format being defined. Options Display Unused Children (Contacts) Displays the child symbols that are not referenced or being used in the project pin list. Separate Reference Displays each unused child symbol in its own reference. Contact Count Totals Displays the total count of all unused child symbols in a single reference.
Displays the cross-reference format using a graphical font. Select to use the JIC font or the IEC/GB/JIS font. The setting is applied to the graphical font regardless of the tagging mode assigned in the project properties. This setting is taken from drawing properties if there are no cross-reference overrides specified on the inserted component.
Displays the cross-reference format using cross-referencing type values (NO, NC, NONC). IEC JIC Graphical cross-reference format setup This format displays cross-referencing using the AutoCAD Electrical graphical font or using contact mapping edit boxes while displaying each reference on a new line. Access: Click the Project Manager tool. In the Project Manager, right-click the project or drawing name and select Properties. Click the Cross-References tab.
Format In the event where there are 2 or more references for the same component, each reference is entered into a new line. Graphic Font Displays the cross-reference format using a graphical font. Select to use the JIC font or the IEC font. The setting is applied to the graphical font regardless of the tagging mode assigned in the project properties. The JIC image font style displays the cross-referencing using the JIC style normally open, normally close, and Form C contact types.
Count options. If left empty, a space appears where the referencing would be displayed. For example if you enter the text "SP" for spares, "SP" displays in the referencing. Overview of table cross-reference formats When you select to use the table cross-reference format style, the preview image changes to show you an example of what the cross-reference may look like in the drawing. Below are examples of the table cross-reference format.
Displays the cross-reference format using cross-referencing type values (NO, NC, NONC). JIC IEC Form C contacts and tables A typical type of contact is a Form C contact type which is comprised of 2 contacts; 1 open and 1 closed where they share a common terminal pin number. You can choose to display both of the Form C contacts as 2 individual symbols, or together as one symbol.
Example where a single symbol makes up the Form C contact The common pin is on the right-hand side next to the referencing column and displays in the P2 column of the table. JIC IEC Table cross-reference format setup This format displays cross-referencing in a table object that automatically gets updated in real time, so you can define the columns to display. To display component cross-referencing in a table, you must select a predefined table style and define the column labels to display.
Access: the Cross-References tab. In the component Cross-Reference Display section, select Table Format, and click Setup. NOTE You can also access this by selecting Components ➤ Insert Component. Select the component type to insert and specify the insertion point on the drawing. In the Insert/Edit Component dialog box, Cross-Reference section, select Component override, and click Setup. In the Cross-reference component override dialog box, select Table Format, and click Setup.
Options Display Parent (Coil) Displays the parent component's reference information inside the cross-reference format. Display Unused Children (Contacts) Displays the child symbols that are not referenced or being used in the project pin list. Separate Reference Displays each unused child symbol in its own reference. Contact Count Totals Displays the total count of all unused child symbols in a single reference.
Table Title Controls the replaceable parameters and carriage returns. Select the allowable replaceable parameter entry from the selection list, enter the replaceable parameter to use, or enter text for the table title. Add a carriage return inside of the string by using "|" anywhere in the Table Title edit box. NOTE If the replaceable parameter does not include a value from the drawing, a blank space is displayed in the table title. If the title line is left blank, the table will not show the title row.
Insert Component If inserting a parent component with a cross-reference table, the table inserts at the cross-reference attribute locations (XREF and XREFNO). If inserting a child component, the cross-reference table updates for the parent component. Scoot If scooting a parent component with a cross-reference table, the table also scoots along the wire.
TIP To set display settings for a specific component that are different than the drawing, use the Copy/Add Component Override tool. 1 Click the Project Manager tool. 2 In the Project Manager, right-click the project or drawing name, and select Properties. NOTE Selecting the project applies changes to the project definition file and not the drawing. You must later apply the settings to drawings to see display changes. 3 Click the Cross-References tab.
To set the table title, select the allowable replaceable parameter entry from the selection list, enter the replaceable parameter to use, or enter text for the table title. 7 Click OK. If you selected to use the Table Format style, the table location is based on the cross reference attribute position, but you can move the table to any location on the drawing and the table will remain in the new position for that symbol.
Format Graphic Font Displays the cross-reference format using a graphical font. Select to use the JIC font or the IEC/GB/JIS font. The setting is applied to the graphical font regardless of the tagging mode assigned in the project properties. The JIC image font style displays the cross-referencing using the JIC style normally open, normally close, and Form C contact types.
Contact Count Totals Displays the total count of all unused child symbols in a single reference. Fill Reference With Specifies what should be displayed in the unused reference position for both Separate and Contact Count options. If left empty, a space appears where the referencing would be displayed. For example if you enter the text "SP" for spares, "SP" displays in the referencing.
Use cross-reference exception reports The AutoCAD Electrical Component Cross-reference tool creates two text reports in the process of annotating components with cross-reference information. The Cross-reference report gives a listing of each component and quantity and locations of child contacts. The Exception/Error report lists the exceptions AutoCAD Electrical found as it processed the drawing or drawing set.
Using other dialog boxes to set cross-reference options ■ The cross-reference format is set up on the Drawing Properties ➤ Cross-Reference dialog box. This is on a per-drawing basis and can include sheet and drawing ID, line or grid-reference location, and fixed punctuation. ■ A project-wide option to fill unused contact references with a user defined text string is available using the Projects ➤ Project ➤ Project Manager tool. Right-click the project name and select Properties.
Copy circuitry This tool copies existing circuits and pastes the copied circuit to a specified location. The components are automatically retagged based on their new line reference locations. 1 Click the arrow on the Insert Circuit tool to access the Copy Circuit tool. 2 Click the Copy Circuit tool. 3 Select the components and wires to copy. Carefully window (from left to right) around the circuit, making sure to capture the connection wires and dots that tie in to the vertical bus. 4 Press Enter.
wires and dots that tie in to the vertical bus. 4 Press Enter. 5 Select the base point, and then the second point for the move. Save circuit portions for later use Use this tool to save circuit portions for later use. NOTE You can also use the AutoCAD WBLOCK command to save circuits to disk and then use the Insert Wblocked Circuit tool to insert the circuit. 1 Zoom around the circuit to save so that it fills your screen.
2 Click the arrow on the Insert Circuit tool to access the Save Circuit to Icon Menu tool. 3 Click the Save Circuit to Icon Menu tool. 4 On the Save Circuit to Icon Menu dialog box, right-click in the Symbol Preview window and select Add icon ➤ New circuit. NOTE You can also click the arrow on the Add tab and select New circuit. 5 On the Create New Circuit dialog box, specify: ■ Name of the icon. ■ Image file to use. Make sure to select Create PNG from current screen image.
Add existing circuits to the icon menu Use the Save Circuit to Icon Menu tool to add existing circuits to the icon menu. You can then select the circuit from the Insert Component dialog box for insertion into a drawing. 1 Click the arrow on the Insert Circuit tool to access the Save Circuit to Icon Menu tool. 2 Click the Save Circuit to Icon Menu tool. 3 On the Save Circuit to Icon Menu dialog box, right-click in the Symbol Preview window and select Add icon ➤ Add circuit.
Insert a saved circuit 1 Click the arrow on the Insert Circuit tool to access the Insert Saved Circuit tool. 2 Click the Insert Saved Circuit tool. 3 On the Insert Component dialog box, select the circuit you want to insert into the drawing from the Symbol Preview window. 4 Click OK. 5 On the Circuit Scale dialog box, click OK to use the defaults or specify a scale and then click OK. 6 Specify the insertion point on the drawing.
Select Projects ➤ Project ➤ Project Manager. Right-click the project name and select Properties. Use the Icon Menu Wizard to easily modify the menu. The default icon menu can also be redefined in "wd.env." Add entry "WD_MENU" for schematic icon menu and "WD_PMENU" for panel layout icon menu. Access: Click the Insert Component tool or the Multiple Insert Component tool. Click Components ➤ Insert Component or Components ➤ Multiple Insert ➤ Multiple Insert (Icon Menu).
Clicking on the icon performs one of the following functions based on the icon properties as defined by the *.dat file: ■ Inserts the symbol or circuit onto the drawing ■ Executes a command ■ Displays a submenu NOTE When you move the cursor over an icon, the icon name and block/circuit/command name display as tooltip information. Recently Used Displays the last components inserted during the current editing session; the most recently used icon displays in the top.
Scale schematic Specifies the component block insertion scale. This defaults to the value set in the Drawing Properties ➤ Drawing Format dialog box. Once set, this value is remembered until reset or until the drawing editing session ends. Scale panel Specifies the footprint insertion scale. This defaults to the value set in the Drawing Properties ➤ Drawing Format dialog box. Once set, this value is remembered until reset or until the drawing editing session ends.
Pneumatic, Hydraulic and P&ID icon menus The Menu tree structure displays the symbols for the selected component type (pneumatic, hydraulic or P&ID). The Insert Pneumatic Component, Insert Hydraulic Component and Insert P&ID Component tools are accessed on the Extra Library toolbar. Insert Pneumatic Component Insert Hydraulic Component Insert P&ID Component Save circuit to icon menu You can save windowed portions of circuitry for later reuse.
Tabs Symbol Preview window ■ Menu: Changes the visibility of the Menu tree view. ■ Up one level: Displays the menu that is one level before the current menu in the Menu tree view. ■ Views: Changes the view display for the Symbol Preview window. The current view option is indicated with a check mark. Options include: Icon with text, Icon only or List view. ■ Add: Modifies the icon menu by adding icons for circuits or a new submenu.
■ Properties: Opens a Properties dialog box to modify the existing symbol icon properties like the icon name, image or block names. The existing data in the *.dat file is overwritten with your changes. Circuit scale This tool allows you to specify the scale and options for circuit insertion. Access: Click the arrow on the Insert Circuit tool to access the Insert Saved Circuit or the Insert WBlocked Circuit tool. From the Components menu, select Insert Saved Circuit or Insert WBlocked Circuit.
Define wire jumpers You can create internal jumpers on a selected component using the Add/Edit Internal Jumper tool. When wire numbers are inserted using AutoCAD Electrical, these internal jumpers are read and wire numbers are assigned accordingly. If you select to jumper two pins on a component together, an alert displays indicating that internal jumpering will cause a conflict with the existing wire number assignments.
3 After you select the terminals, press Enter and the dialog displays. Notice that the selected terminals are highlighted in the list. 4 Click Add to finish defining the jumper. Change an existing jumper assignment 1 Select Components ➤ Component Miscellaneous ➤ Add/Edit Internal Jumper. 2 Select the terminal from the list on the right. Once selected, the terminals that are part of this jumper assignment are highlighted on the terminal list.
Delete Removes the selected jumper assignment from the list. Pick Selects the terminals to add to a jumper assignment. Try to select as close to the terminal as you can. AutoCAD Electrical finds the closest connection terminal to your selected point. Show Jumpers Displays the current jumper assignments. AutoCAD Electrical draws temporary lines between the jumpered terminals. These graphics disappear the next time you do a Regen.
7 Component Attribute Tools In this chapter ■ Edit attribute values ■ Force attributes to layers ■ Manipulate component text ■ Manipulate terminal text ■ Move description values ■ Manipulate Attributes ■ Set tags to fixed ■ Retag components ■ Change to multi-line text ■ Add location codes ■ Update child codes ■ Location Mark Symbols ■ Location box ■ Change attribute justification ■ Change attribute text style ■ Change attribute text size ■ Modify library symbols ■ Add at
Edit attribute values You can use three different tools to edit a component's information. Using the Edit Component tool The standard way is to use the regular Edit Component command and edit the tag value from the Insert/Edit Component dialog box. 1 Click the Edit Component tool. 2 Select the component to edit. 3 Edit the tag value in the Insert/Edit Component dialog box. 4 Click OK to complete the edit. Using the Edit Selected Attribute tool Lets you pick right on the attribute.
Using the Move/Show Attribute tool You can use the AutoCAD Electrical Move/Show Attribute command to edit a component's attribute text. 1 Click the Move/Show Attribute tool. 2 Pick on the component's graphics (not on the attribute text itself; otherwise it flips into Attribute Move mode). If there are no graphics to pick on (such as wire number block/attribute or ladder line reference block/attribute), type "B" and space and then pick on any attribute on the block insert.
on invisible attributes. It will find and display the closest attribute to your pick point on a block insert. Access: Click the arrow on the Edit Component tool to access the Edit Selected Attribute tool. From the Components menu, select Attributes ➤ Edit Selected Attribute. Attribute value Specifies the attribute text. You can click on the arrow keys to increment or decrement the attribute value. Pick Selects another attribute whose text you want to use for the selected attribute.
Force attributes to layers This tool changes the layer assignment for selected attributes. 1 Click the arrow on the Move/Show Attribute tool to access the Change Attribute Layer tool. 2 Click the Change Attribute Layer tool. 3 Specify the target layer: ■ Type the name in the box. ■ Click List to select from a list of layers in the active drawing. ■ Click Wires to change to the layer used for wire numbers on wires. The default layer is WIRENO; this is defined on the WD_M block’s WIRENO_LAY attribute.
Access: From the Components menu, select Attributes ➤ Change Attribute Layer. Change to Layer Specifies the target layer. List Lists the layers in the active drawing. Select a layer from this list or enter the layer name in the Change to Layer box. Wires Forces the tool to change to the layer used for wire number text placed on wires.
Find, edit, or replace component text 1 Click the arrow on the Retag Components tool to access the Find/Edit/Replace Component Text tool. 2 Click the Find/Edit/Replace Component Text tool. 3 Choose to process either the current drawing or the project and click OK. The drawing or project set is scanned to find all the AutoCAD Electrical components and the current attribute text values. ■ If you chose to process the project, select the drawings to process and add them to the Drawings to Process list.
■ Set the Location Code find value to "PNL1." ■ Set the Location Code replace value to "PNL2A." ■ Click All so the text will only be replaced if the entire text value matches the find value. Find/edit/replace (drawing or project) This tool finds and replaces component and terminal text values or sub-strings within those values. You can do this on the current drawing or across the project drawing set.
Find/edit/replace component text Use this tool to find and replace component and terminal text values or find and replace substrings within those values. You can do this on the active drawing or across the project drawing set. Access: Click the arrow on the Retag Components tool to access the Find/Edit/Replace Component Text tool. From the Components menu, select Component Tagging ➤ Find/Edit/Replace Component Text.
Find or replace terminal text 1 Click the arrow on the Retag Components tool to access the Find/Replace Terminal Text tool. 2 Click the Find/Replace Terminal Text tool. 3 Select to replace the Full, exact match or a substring match. 4 If you chose to perform a substring match, select whether only the first occurrence within the text value should be replaced. 5 Define your find and replace with values. 6 Click OK to begin the find and replace operation.
the active drawing, the entire active drawing, or across the project drawing set. Access: Click the arrow on the Retag Components tool to access the Find/Replace Terminal Text tool. From the Components menu, select Component Miscellaneous ➤ Find/Replace Terminal Text. Full,exact match Specifies to replace the text only if the entire text value matches the find value. Substring match Specifies to replace the text if any part of the text value matches the find value.
■ Push Description Down: DESC1 and DESC2 are pushed up to the DESC2 and DESC3 attribute positions when blanks are found. Manipulate component attributes Move component attributes 1 Click the Move/Show Attribute tool. 2 Select the attributes to move and press Enter. You can pick the components individually or by windowing. The attributes highlight with a rectangular box drawn around them. 3 Select the base and insertion points for the move.
Show attributes 1 Select Components ➤ Attributes ➤ Hide/Unhide Attribute ➤ Unhide Attribute (Window/Multiple). 2 Select the attributes to display by drawing a crossing window around the attributes on the drawing. 3 Press Enter. 4 Select one or more attribute to flip to visible from the list. 5 Click OK. Rotate component attributes 1 Click the arrow on the Move/Show Attribute tool to access the Rotate Attribute tool. 2 Click the Rotate Attribute tool.
NOTE To unfix a component tag, in the Fixed/Unfixed Component Tag Marking dialog box, select Force selected tags to unfixed (normal), click OK, and select the tag to unfix. 1 Click the arrow on the Edit Component tool to access the Fix/UnFix Component Tag tool. 2 Click the Fix/UnFix Component Tag tool. 3 In the Fixed/Unfixed Component Tag Marking dialog box, select whether to force selected tags to fixed or switch a tag between being fixed or unfixed and click OK.
Fixed/unfix component tag Use this tool to mark a component tag as fixed. The tag is unaffected if the drawing is later reprocessed by a Retag command. Access: Click the arrow on the Edit Component tool to access the Fix/UnFix Component Tag tool. From the Components menu, select Component Tagging ➤ Fix/UnFix Component Tag. Select whether to force selected tags to fixed, force selected tags to unfixed, or switch a tag between being fixed or unfixed.
Change to multi-line text This tool converts a long string of relay coil or source/destination cross-reference text to a multiline text entity (MTEXT). The underlying attribute value is maintained, but flipped to visible. The MTEXT entity is created at the same XY location as the underlying attribute. The MTEXT entity updates, scoots, and behaves as if it is an attribute tied to the component block.
First, set your project to use automatic fill for Location values, and then set the default for the drawing. You have a default Location value for each new component that you insert (whether field or panel) on the same drawing. 1 Click the Project Manager tool. 2 In the Project Manager, right-click the project name, and select Properties.
Update child location codes A child contact should carry the same location code that is present on its parent component. If relay coil CR101 is marked "PNL1," then all CR101 contacts should also carry this location code. In addition, if a child component carries MFG and CAT attributes, they should carry the same information as the parent. 1 Click the arrow on the Component Cross-Reference tool to access the Child Location/Description Update tool. 2 Click the Child Location/Description Update tool.
Installation/Location Attributes Installation codes Specifies to update the child and panel components with the parent installation code. Location codes Specifies to update the child and panel components with the parent location code. Description text Specifies to udpate the child and panel components with the parent description text. Description to always match parent Specifies that the description should always match the parent description text.
Substitute location mark symbols for text location codes You can insert location marks on symbols that are identified with location code in text form.
marker. Once you insert a location code, a location mark symbol can be associated to it and the component. 1 Click the Location Symbols tool. 2 Select a component to add the symbol to and press Enter. If a location code is not associated to the component, the Add Location to Component dialog box displays. 3 Specify the location code by typing it, clicking on component that carries the location value, or by selecting from a list of location codes used on the drawing or in the project. 4 Click OK.
Remove a location mark symbol ■ ■ Click the Location Symbols tool. Select a component to remove the symbol from and press Enter. The location mark symbols are removed and the original location attribute is visible again. Add a new symbol to the menu The Location Symbols menu is driven by a text file (wd_locs.dat) that you can modify. 1 Create the mark symbol, save it to the \Program Files [(x86)]\Autodesk\Acade {version}\Libs\jic1\ subdirectory with a file name that begins with "WDXX" (for example, "WDXX
geometric symbols for text "location" code values. The location text is hidden and replaced by a geometric shape. These are smart in that they update if the underlying component location code changes. Access: Click the Location Symbols tool. Select a component to add the symbol to and press Enter. From the Components menu, select Component Tagging ➤ Location Symbols. Select a component to add the symbol to and press Enter.
Main Operator sta | wdxx_mos | wdxx_mos Wash-down sta | wdxx_wds | wdxx_wds **M101 L2 CUSTOMERSYMBOLS Customer power | wdxx_cp | wdxx_cp Customer furnished | wdxx_cf | wdxx_cf NOTE You only need to define the L*W row if you plan on using this .dat file in a version of AutoCAD Electrical prior to AutoCAD Electrical 2008. Location box The Location Box tool will draw a dashed box around selected components.
Pick Like Picks the loation code from a component in the active drawing. Dashed Box Information Description Height Specifies the description height. Description height can be entered in the edit box or picked from an existing device from the active drawing. Box Description Specifies the description text. Description Insert Point Specifies the description insertion point: top, bottom, left or right. Drawing Searches the active drawing for location box descriptions.
Change attribute justification Use this tool to change the justification of wire number text, component description text, or any attribute. 1 Click the arrow on the Move/Show Attribute tool to access the Change Attribute Justification tool. 2 Click the Change Attribute Justification tool. 3 Select the appropriate justification from the list, or click Pick Master to select an attribute on the drawing that has the justification you want to use.
Change attribute text style Use this tool to adjust the font assignment (either project-wide or drawing-wide) to the text style “WD” or “WD_IEC.” 1 Click the arrow on the Project Manager tool to access the Project-Wide Utilities tool. 2 Click the Project-Wide Utilities tool. 3 In the Project-Wide Utilities dialog box, Change Attribute section, select Change Style and click Setup.
Use the change attribute size utility 1 Click the arrow on the Move/Show Attribute tool to access the Change Attribute Size tool. 2 Click the Change Attribute Size tool. 3 Select your new attribute size by either picking on a similar text or attribute entity or by manually entering the size value into the edit box. 4 Enter the new width factor into the edit box. Make sure you click to apply the width.
3 In the Project-Wide Utilities dialog box, Change Attribute section, select Change Attribute Size and click Setup. 4 In the Project-Wide Attribute Size Change dialog box, select the attribute types to change. 5 Enter the text height and optional width factor and click OK. 6 In the Project-Wide Utilities dialog box, click OK. 7 In the Batch Process Drawings dialog box, select to process the project and click OK. 8 In the Select Drawings to Process dialog box, select the drawings to process and click OK.
attribute tool to expand an attribute. Each click on the attribute dynamically changes the attribute's width factor by 5%. 1 Click the arrow on the Move/Show Attribute tool to access the Squeeze Attribute/Text tool. 2 Click the Squeeze Attribute/Text tool. 3 Select the attribute text to change. The text is automatically compressed. 1 Click the arrow on the Move/Show Attribute tool to access the Stretch Attribute/Text tool. 2 Click the Stretch Attribute/Text tool. 3 Select the attribute text to change.
Width Specifies the attribute width value. Apply Applies the new size or width values to the selected attributes. Single Changes the size of the attributes as you select them. By name Changes all attributes of a certain type. Select an example attribute for AutoCAD Electrical to determine the attribute's name. All attributes of the same name are found and adjusted to your specified size. Type it Specifies an attribute name for AutoCAD Electrical to match, wildcard characters are allowed.
The Symbol Library Attribute Text/Scale Resize dialog box displays. You can change the attribute size based on the AutoCAD Electrical attribute type. 3 Select the attributes to change. Notice that you can change the attributes for parent/stand-alone symbols separate from the child/contact symbols. 4 Enter the new value and click Start. The first library symbol is immediately opened, the changes are made to the selected attributes, the drawing is saved, and the operation moves on to the next symbol.
tion codes, position, state, component terminal pins, parent and child descriptions and cross-references. Add attributes to blocks Use this toolto add an attribute to one insert instance of a block. The block does not need to be an AutoCAD Electrical block. 1 Click the arrow on the Move/Show Attribute tool to access the Add Attribute tool. 2 Click the Add Attribute tool. 3 Select the block. 4 Define the attribute name, value, height, justification, and visibility. 5 Click OK to create the attribute.
Adds a new attribute to an instance of an AutoCAD Electrical block already inserted into the drawing file. The attribute can be user-defined or an AutoCAD Electrical-specific attribute. Access: Click the arrow on the Move/Show Attribute tool to access the Add Attribute tool. From the Components menu, select Attributes ➤ Add Attribute. Name Specifies text used to identify the attribute (attribute tag). Value Specifies the attribute text. This value is displayed on the drawing and used in reports.
8 Wire/Wire Number Tools In this chapter ■ Overview of wires ■ Insert 3-phase bus wiring ■ Insert wires ■ Trim wires ■ Stretch wires ■ Overview of wire color/gauge labels ■ Insert cable markers into wires ■ Insert shield symbols ■ Insert in-line wire markers ■ Wire Gaps ■ Ladder Tools ■ Wire Numbers ■ Wire Sequencing ■ Source and Destination Markers 433
Overview of wires AutoCAD Electrical treats line entities as wires when the lines are found on an AutoCAD Electrical-defined wire layer. You can have many wire layers set up on your drawing. Each wire layer has a descriptive name like "RED_16" or "BLK_14_THW" and is assigned a screen color to visually mimic the wire color. Wires do not have to begin or end at snap points, and they do not have to be orthogonal (they can be skewed at any angle).
Insert 3-phase bus wiring 1 Click the arrow on the Insert Wires tool to access the Insert Multiple Wires tool. 2 Click the Insert Multiple Wires tool. 3 Set the horizontal and vertical spacing for the wires. 4 Specify where to start the wires. 5 Set the number of wires to 3, and click OK. During wire insertion, the current wire type displays at the command prompt. The current wire type indicates the layer name in which the new wires are drawn.
latch on to their appropriate vertical wires. You can see the 3 wires stretch straight across the screen. As you pull the 3-phase wire out, you can turn a corner by moving your cursor out of line with the bus. To reverse the turn's phase sequence, press F. 7 Right-click to terminate the wires. The wires and wire connection dots insert, and loops are automatically inserted at wire crossing points.
any existing wiring, wire-crossing gaps automatically insert (if the drawing is so configured). Access: Click the arrow on the Insert Wire tool to access the Multiple Wire Bus tool. From the Wires menu, select Multiple Wire Bus. NOTE You can use the Scoot command to adjust bus spacing after insertion. Horizontal Specifies the horizontal spacing between the wires. Vertical Specifies the vertical spacing between the wires. Insert wires You can insert single or angled (22.5, 45, or 67.
NOTE The AutoCAD Insert Line command can also be used to insert AutoCAD Electrical wires on a valid wire layer. 1 Click the Insert Wire tool (or click the arrow on the Insert Wire tool to access the Insert 22.5, 45, or 67.5 Degree Wire tools). 2 Select the starting point of the wire. You can start a wire segment in empty space, from an existing wire segment, or from an existing component.
NOTE A wire connection point should only have up to 3 wire connections tied to it. Adding more wires to a single point prevents the angled wire connection to tie uniquely to the wire connection point. Trim wires Use this tool to remove a wire segment and dots as required. You can pick on a single wire or draw a fence through multiple wires to trim. 1 Click the Trim Wire tool. 2 Select the wire segment to remove on the drawing or type F followed by a [space] to remove multiple wires at once.
Stretch wires Use this tool to lengthen a wire until it meets another wire or an AutoCAD Electrical component. 1 Click the arrow on the Insert Wires tool to access the Stretch Wire tool. 2 Click the Stretch Wire tool. 3 Select the end of the wire to stretch. Overview of wire color/gauge labels When you select a wire to label, AutoCAD Electrical reads the wire's layer name, retrieves the matching text label, and inserts it as a label/leader on the drawing.
About automatic wire leaders AutoCAD Electrical places wire numbers on leaders when it determines that the wire number text bumps into something (it does not check if the leader itself will collide with something). AutoCAD Electrical first makes 15 tiny step checks in the "up" direction. If this fails it checks 15 steps in the down direction. If this fails, it tries at approximately 60-degree angles. If all checks fail, it leaves the wire number where it originally was going to put it.
Map wire type labels to each wire layer This tool maps a wire color/gauge/wire type label to each wire layer. 1 Click the arrow on the Wire Number Leader tool to access the Wire Color/Gauge Labels tool. 2 Click the Wire Color/Gauge Labels tool. 3 Click Setup to change the text size, arrow style, and layers for the label. ■ Select the layer name to add/modify the default color/gauge text string for wire labels and leaders.
Access: From the Wires menu, select Wire Numbers Miscellaneous ➤ Wire Color/Gauge Labels. Setup Sets the default color/gauge text string, text size, arrow size, gap size, and arrow type for the wire label/leaders. To add or modify the default color/gauge text string, select the layer name from the list in the Wire label color/gauge setup dialog box. To add new wire layer names, use the Wires ➤ Create/Edit Wire Type dialog box.
Insert cable markers 1 Click the Cable Markers tool. 2 In the Insert Component dialog box, select the cable marker to insert and pick the insertion point on the drawing. The Insert/Edit Cable Marker dialog box displays. 3 Set the cable tag by keeping the default, using the buttons, or typing in a new tag. Make sure you select Fixed if you want this tag to be marked so that it won't be updated on a future re-tag. 4 Define the wire color by selecting it from a list or typing the color id in the edit box.
Insert multiple cable markers AutoCAD Electrical provides a way to insert all the markers for a particular cable from one dialog. In addition, you can edit existing cable marker sets, or even delete cable markers from a single dialog. 1 Click the arrow on the Cable Markers tool to access the Multiple Cable Markers tool. 2 Click the Multiple Cable Markers tool. 3 Select to run a report for the project or drawing and click OK.
9 Assign the catalog information, description, location and installation codes, and references for the tag. 10 Click Insert/Update Now to insert the cable or click Insert/Update Later to save the changes for later. If you chose Now, any affected drawings are opened and the cable markers are inserted or updated. If you chose to insert/update later, your changes are saved in a file called 'projnam_cblmrkin.upd' in the same directory path as your project file.
Select an icon picture or the component type from the Menu tree structure. The main menu in the tree structure is displayed as the menu heading just above the menu tree structure. Tabs ■ Menu: Changes the visibility of the Menu tree view. ■ Up one level: Displays the menu that is one level before the current menu in the Menu tree view. This is unavailable if the main menu is selected in the Menu tree view. ■ Views: Changes the view display for the Symbol Preview window and Recently Used window.
Vertical/Horizontal Inserts the icon using a vertical or horizontal orientation. This is opposite the drawing's default ladder rung orientation. No edit dialog Turns off the Insert/Edit Component dialog box when inserting symbols onto the drawing. To add component detail later, click the Edit Component tool, and select the component to edit. No tag Inserts the component, un-tagged (i.e. without assigning a unique Component Tag).
Right-click on the main menu or submenu in the Menu tree structure view to display the following options: ■ Expand/Collapse: Toggles the visibility of the menus. ■ Properties: Opens a Properties dialog box to view the existing menu or submenu properties like the menu name, image or submenu title. Use the Icon Menu Wizard to change any menu properties.
Cable markers carry a cable TAG value, just like any parent/child device combination. They can also carry a conductor color value (carried as a RATING1 attribute value on the marker block symbol). The parent symbol has provision to carry MFG/CAT part number information and, if the particular cable is referenced in the AutoCAD Electrical cable conductor database table (_W0_CBLWIRES within your Access catalog file), then AutoCAD Electrical can track conductors used versus conductors available.
Wire Color/ID Sets the conductor color code by manually entering it in the edit box or select from a generic color pick list. Drawing Lists the wire colors used for similar cable markers in the current drawing. Project Lists the wire colors used for similar cable markers in the project. Catalog Data You can instruct AutoCAD Electrical to do a drawing-wide or project-wide listing of similar cable markers with their catalog assignments.
Previous Scans the previous project to find an instance of the selected cable marker and returns the marker values. You can then make your catalog assignment by picking from the dialog list. Drawing Lists the part numbers used for similar cable markers in the current drawing. Project Lists the part numbers used for similar cable markers in the project. You can search in the active project, another project, or in an external file.
Description One, two, or three lines of description attribute text can be entered. Drawing Displays a list of descriptions found in the current drawing so you can pick similar descriptions to edit. Project Displays a list of descriptions found in the project so you can pick similar descriptions to edit. Defaults Opens an ASCII text file from which you can select standard descriptions. Pick Picks a description from a cable marker on the current drawing.
current or selected drawing files and returns a list of all location codes used so far. Pick from the list to automatically update the component with the location code. Assign short location codes to components like "PNL" and "FIELD" so you can later take full advantage of the AutoCAD Electrical ability to extract wire and cable from/to reports, and location-specific BOM reports (for example, BOM for all field cables, BOM for all PNL cables).
Location Changes the location codes. You can search the current drawing or entire project for location codes. A quick read of all the current or selected drawing files is done and a list of location codes used so far is returned. Select from the list to automatically update the component with the location code.
Defaults Opens an ASCII text file from which you can select standard descriptions. Pick Picks a description from a component on the current drawing. Catalog Data You can instruct AutoCAD Electrical to do a drawing-wide or project-wide listing of similar cable markers with their catalog assignments. During your editing session, the last MFG / CAT / ASSYCODE assignment for each component type you insert into your wiring diagram is remembered.
Drawing Lists the part numbers used for similar cable markers in the current drawing. Project Lists the part numbers used for similar cable markers in the project. You can search in the active project, another project, or in an external file. ■ Active project: All the drawings in the current project are scanned and the results are listed in a dialog box. Select from the list to assign your new cable marker with a catalog number that is consistent with other similar cable markers in the project.
Child conductor references AutoCAD Electrical automatically fills in cross-reference text when the cross-reference command is run. Show/edit miscellaneous View or edit any attributes that are not predefined AutoCAD Electrical attributes. Insert or edit cable marker (2nd+ wire of cable) Cable markers carry a cable TAG value, just like any parent/child device combination. They can also carry a conductor color value (carried as a RATING1 attribute value on the marker block symbol).
Wire Color/ID The conductor color code can be manually entered into the edit box or selected from a generic color pick list. If the parent marker carries a part number, you can select the next unused color from a used/unused pick list. Drawing Lists the wire colors used for similar cable markers in the current drawing. Project Lists the wire colors used for similar cable markers in the project. Description Up to 3 lines of description attribute text can be entered.
from/to reports, and location-specific BOM reports later (for example, BOM for all field cables, BOM for all PNL cables). Show/edit miscellaneous View or edit any attributes that are not predefined AutoCAD Electrical attributes. Insert or edit cable marker (2nd+ wire of cable): IEC Cable markers carry a cable TAG value, just like any parent/child device combination. They can also carry a conductor color value (carried as a RATING1 attribute value on the marker block symbol).
Component Tag The parent cable tag value can be manually typed into the edit box or selected from a drawing-wide or project-wide list of existing cables. If the parent is visible on screen, click Parent/Sibling and select the parent or another related marker. This automatically transfers all information to the child marker being inserted/edited. Description Up to 3 lines of description attribute text can be entered.
Electrical Wire Sequence command to define wire connection sequencing for wire networks that have three or more interconnected components). Access: Click the arrow on the Cable Markers tool to access the Multiple Cable Markers tool. From the Wires menu, select Cables ➤ Multiple Cable Markers. From/To report for Specifies to process the report for the project, the entire drawing, or picked components in the drawing.
Wires from extract Lists the wires that match the From/To locations (from the Wire From/To Report) and aren't part of a cable yet (meaning that no cable marker has been inserted on this wire). Use Add All, Add, Remove All, and Remove to define which wires are part of the cable. Sort the lists to make it easier to find the wires. Click Change Format to define which fields of information to show in the list to facilitate finding the wires to include in your cable.
Location Code Assign short location codes to components like "PNL" and "FIELD" so you can take full advantage of the AutoCAD Electrical ability to extract wire and cable from/to reports, and location-specific BOM reports later (for example, BOM for all field cables, BOM for all PNL cables). Catalog Data MFG and CAT numbers can be manually entered or picked from Catalog lookup. The Assembly code is used to link multiple part numbers together.
AutoCAD Electrical reads the line of text from the file and breaks it into its component parts. These are displayed in the left-hand dialog list. For each relevant item, highlight it and then pick the appropriate category button in the center column. The highlighted item is transferred to the corresponding category (and then to the Insert/Edit dialog box once OK is clicked). Multiple Catalog Inserts or edits extra catalog part numbers on to the selected cable.
Insert/Update Later Saves your changes in a file called 'projnam_cblmrkin.upd' in the same directory path as your project file. The changes are accumulated in this file until you are ready for them. Select Wires ➤ Cables ➤ Multiple Cable Markers Update from the menu to insert or update the cable markers that were saved. Insert shield symbols AutoCAD Electrical provides a few special Shield symbols that graphically represent the cable shield type.
Add a second shield to a cable/shield represenation You can add a second shield representation to an existing set of cable/shield markers. 1 Using the Cable Markers tool, select to insert a 2nd shield. 2 Select an existing shield marker (either select the first or last cable/marker shield symbol). 3 Specify the insertion point and right-click to end the selection. Insert in-line wire markers You can insert a special in-line marker into any wire.
NOTE The wire breaks around the inline marker. 1 Click the arrow on the Wire Leaders tool to access the In-Line Wire Label tool. 2 Click the In-Line Wire Labels tool. The Insert Component dialog displays with a selection of predefined in-line markers and user-defined markers. 3 Select a marker and place it on a wire. NOTE If the label is too wide, use the Squeeze Attribute/Text tool.
"WD_MENU" for schematic icon menu and "WD_PMENU" for panel layout icon menu. Access: Click the Insert Component tool or the Multiple Insert Component tool. Click Components ➤ Insert Component or Components ➤ Multiple Insert ➤ Multiple Insert (Icon Menu). NOTE This dialog box is also accessed when inserting Pneumatic, Hydraulic, or P&ID components; in-line wire labels; stand-alone cross-reference symbols; cable markers; and saved circuits.
■ Executes a command ■ Displays a submenu NOTE When you move the cursor over an icon, the icon name and block/circuit/command name display as tooltip information. Recently Used Displays the last components inserted during the current editing session; the most recently used icon displays in the top.
Scale panel Specifies the footprint insertion scale. This defaults to the value set in the Drawing Properties ➤ Drawing Format dialog box. Once set, this value is remembered until reset or until the drawing editing session ends. Type it Manually type in the component block to insert. Browse Browses to and selects the component to insert.
Hydraulic Component and Insert P&ID Component tools are accessed on the Extra Library toolbar.
Manipulate wire gaps Insert wire gaps AutoCAD Electrical automatically inserts a gap/loop when a new wire crosses another. Under some conditions you may need to manually add a loop gap at the point of two crossing lines. 1 Click the arrow on the Insert Wire tool to access the Insert Wire Gap tool. 2 Click the Insert Wire Gap tool. 3 Select the wire to remain solid. 4 Select the crossing wire to have the gap. The gap inserts into the second wire.
Remove wire gaps Use the Delete Wire Gap command if a gap/loop is no longer needed in an existing wire. 1 Click the arrow on the Insert Wire tool to access the Delete Wire Gap tool. 2 Click the Delete Wire Gap tool. 3 Select the wire segments near the unneeded gaps. The gap is removed from the second wire. Flip wire gaps Use the Flip Gap command to flip the gap to the other wire. 1 Click the arrow on the Insert Wire tool to access the Flip Wire Gap tool. 2 Click the Flip Wire Gap tool.
There is no limit to the number of ladders that can be inserted into a drawing, but ladders may not overlap each other. You can insert a new ladder at any time.
vertically aligned along their left-hand side. Note that these limitations do not apply when X-Y Grid or X-Zone referencing is selected. 1 Click the Insert Ladder tool. 2 Specify the width and spacing of the ladder. 3 Specify the 1st reference, index and rungs. Index is the increment number for line reference numbering (default = 1). If you don't want every line reference number to show up then you can use the AutoCAD Erase command to get rid of the extras. Do not erase the top-most line reference number.
8 Specify the last reference number for the ladder. If you entered values in the step above, this step is not necessary. 9 Left mouse click to insert the ladder. NOTE Use AutoCAD Move to relocate an entire ladder. Make sure you that get the entire ladder including the very first line reference number (the MLR block insert). Select the Revise Ladder button and then click Cancel on the dialog. Using this command forces AutoCAD Electrical to re-read and update its internal ladder location list.
■ PH3SPACE: default 3-phase spacing 3 Save and exit the drawing. You can permanently change the relative position of line reference numbers and text size by modifying the RUNGFIRST attribute definition. 1 Display the MLR block's drawing. The file names (found at: \Program Files [(x86)]\Autodesk\Acade {version}\libs\jic1\) are: ■ WD_MLRH.dwg: for horizontal rung / vertical ladders ■ WD_MLRV.dwg: for vertical rung / horizontal ladders ■ WD_MLRHX.
wire type from the Set/Edit Wire Type dialog box. The new wire type becomes the current wire type and the command continues with the ladder insertion. Width Specifies the width of the ladder. Spacing Specifies the spacing between each rung. Length Specifies both the length of the ladder and the number of rungs. You can enter the total ladder length, the number of ladder rungs, or leave both blank and manually pick the beginning and ending points of the ladder.
Modify an existing ladder Renumber an existing ladder 1 Click the arrow on the Insert Ladder tool to access the Revise Ladder tool. 2 Click the Revise Ladder tool. 3 Enter the new beginning line reference number and click OK. NOTE This does not update existing components or wire numbers. 4 Select Components ➤ Component Tagging ➤ Retag Components to update component tags to match the new line reference number. 5 Select Wires ➤ Insert Wire Numbers to update the wire numbers. Select Tag/retag ALL.
To lengthen or shorten the ladder: 1 Click the arrow on the Insert Ladder tool to access the Revise Ladder tool. 2 Click the Revise Ladder tool. 3 Change the column of line reference numbers to match the appropriate ladder length and click OK. 4 Select the AutoCAD Stretch command from the menu to lengthen or shorten the ladder. To widen or compress the ladder: 1 Click the Scoot tool. 2 Select the ladder's vertical rail and pull it out or push it in.
Change rung spacing 1 Click the arrow on the Insert Ladder tool to access the Revise Ladder tool. 2 Click the Revise Ladder tool. 3 Change the column of line reference numbers to the desired rung spacing and ladder length. 4 Select Components ➤ Scoot (or the AutoCAD Stretch command) to move the existing rungs to their new rung locations.
2 Select the top line reference number and press Enter. The Modify Line Reference Numbers dialog box displays. 3 Specify the desired rung spacing, ladder length, and starting reference number. 4 Click OK. Modify line reference numbers This tool adjusts the line reference numbering along the side of the ladders,; however it doesn't change existing ladder rung spacing.
Index Specifies the line reference number increment value (default=1). Selecting Redo forces a refresh of line reference numbering. Wire number format Specifies the format for placing wire numbers. (default = configure wire number format value) You can specify a unique automatic wire numbering format on a per ladder basis (ex: one ladder of 24 volt wiring requiring wire numbers with a unique prefix or suffix, ex: %NVDC).
Wire tag formats The origin of a wire number block must lie on the wire segment, though the text attribute may be moved away from the wire. AutoCAD Electrical uses the concept of a wire tag format string with replaceable parameters. One replaceable parameter, %N, must always be part of the wire format string. A typical format string might be just this %N parameter.
Check line entities Some problems with wire numbering (or lack thereof) can be traced to line wires not being on a valid wire layer. Use the Show Wires tool to make a quick check of what is a wire and what is not. The solution to the problem may be as simple as moving some line entities to a valid AutoCAD Electrical wire layer (per the drawing's property setting for wire layer names). Show Wires highlights every line entity in bright red that is found to be on a valid AutoCAD Electrical wire layer.
continuous mode. You can insert a long series of incrementing wire numbers and assign each, in turn, to the wires you pick. 1 Click the arrow on the Insert Wire Numbers tool to access the 3 Phase Wire Numbers tool. 2 Click the 3 Phase Wire Numbers tool. 3 Enter a base starting number in the edit box or click Pick to select an existing attribute value on the active drawing. If the picked text carries a numeric substring, this is extracted and inserted into the Base edit box.
■ You can add to the default prefix and suffix list display. Create an ASCII text file and list each prefix/suffix entry, one per line in the file. Name the file .3ph (where "projectname" is the name of your active project) or default.3ph and put the file in any folder that is part of AutoCAD Electrical's search path list.
AutoCAD Electrical processes wire line entities into wire networks, and inserts or updates wire numbers associated with them. Access: Click the Insert Wire Numbers tool. From the Wires menu, select Insert Wire Numbers. To do Specifies to process all the wiring or just the untagged (new) wires. Wire tag mode Specifies to use the sequential or line-reference based setting for the drawing.
Wire tagging (project-wide) AutoCAD Electrical processes wire line entities into wire networks, and inserts or updates wire numbers associated with them across a project. Access: Click the Insert Wire Numbers tool. Select Sequential and click Project-Wide. From the Wires menu, select Insert Wire Numbers. Select Sequential and click Project-Wide. Wire tag mode Specifies to use the sequential or line-reference based setting for the drawing.
Use wire layer format overrides Overrides the default wire number format (set in the Layers section Insert as fixed Forces all wire numbers to be fixed (they do not update if wire number retagging is run again at a later date). of the Drawing Properties ➤ Drawing Format dialog box) by using layer-defined formats. 3 phase wire numbering This tool speeds up the process of inserting special wire numbering generally associated with 3-phase bus and motor circuits. It can also be used in a continuous mode.
Wire Numbers Displays a preview of the wire numbers to be inserted onto the drawing. TIP Tab out of an edit box to trigger the Wire Numbers listing to update. Maximum Specifies the maximum number of wire numbers. When you select a new option (3, 4, or None) the Wire Numbers section automatically updates with a preview based on the value selected in relation to the options specified for the prefix, base, and suffix values.
TIP Change the position of an existing wire number using the Toggle Wire Number In-Line tool. 1 Click the Project Manager tool. 2 In the Project Manager, right-click on the project name and select Properties (or click the drawing name, and select Properties ➤ Drawing Properties). If you change this setting in the project properties, the drawings already in the project do not get this setting. NOTE You can also automatically set wire number placement using the Drawing Properties tool. Follow the steps below.
Apply a drawing-specific wire number settings that are maintained inside the drawing's WD_M block. Access: Click the Project Manager tool. In the Project Manager, right-click the drawing name, and select Properties ➤ Drawing Properties. From the Projects menu, select Project ➤ Project Manager. In the Project Manager, right-click the drawing name, and select Properties ➤ Drawing Properties. Wire Number Format Wire number tags can be sequential or reference-based.
Sequential Enter the starting sequential number (alpha, numeric, or alphanumeric) for the drawing. If you enter the same starting sequential number for every drawing of your wiring diagram set, AutoCAD Electrical confirms at insertion time that a new sequential wire number tag is not repeated on any other drawing. If you set DEMO1 to 100 and DEMO2 to 200, the wire numbers on DEMO1 start at 100 and those on DEMO2 start at 200.
Gap Setup Defines spacing between the inline wire number and the wire itself. Below Wire Places the wire number below the physical wire. Offset Specifies to insert the wire number tags the specified offset distance. Centered Specifies to insert the wire number tags in the center of each wire segment. Offset Distance Specifies a fixed, user-defined offset distance from the left or top of the first wire segment found on the wire network. Leaders (This option is unavailable for in-line wire numbers.
Wire Number Format Wire number tags can be sequential or reference-based. Format Specifies the way new wire number tags are created. The wire number tag format must include the %N parameter that is the base sequential or reference-based value per the selection above. If your format includes the sheet number %S parameter or the drawing number %D parameter, you must enter the values in the edit boxes in the Drawing Properties ➤ Drawing Settings dialog box.
If you set DEMO1 to 100 and DEMO2 to 200, the wire numbers on DEMO1 start at 100 and those on DEMO2 start at 200. If DEMO1 has more than 100 wire numbers it starts using wire number 200 and above while DEMO2 would begin its wire numbers where DEMO1 left off (making sure that duplicate wire numbers are not assigned). Increment The default is "1". Setting it to "2" with a starting sequential of "1" would yield wire numbers 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11, and so on. Line Reference Sets the wire number tag suffix.
network, the line reference value of the upper left-most terminal is used. Hidden on Wire Network with Terminal Displaying Wire Number Specifies to automatically hide the wire number for a wire network that has a wire number-type terminal. On per Wire Basis Specifies to assign a wire number for each wire rather than the default one wire number per wire network. Exclude Specifies the wire number ranges to exclude if using sequential wire numbers.
Offset Distance Specifies a fixed, user-defined offset distance from the left or top of the first wire segment found on the wire network. Leaders (This option is unavailable for in-line wire numbers) AutoCAD Electrical places wire numbers on leaders when it determines that the wire number text bumps into something (it does not check if the leader itself overlays another object). Select the method for inserting new wire numbers as leaders: As Required, Always, or Never.
Find or replace wire number text This tool lets you find and replace wire number text values or find and replace sub-strings within those values. You can do this on the current drawing or across the project drawing set. 1 Click the drop-down arrow on the Edit Wire Number tool to access the Find/Replace Wire Numbers tool. 2 Click the Find/Replace Wire Numbers tool.
Access: From the Wires menu, select Wire Number Miscellaneous ➤ Find/Replace Wire Numbers. Full, exact match Specifies to replace the text only if the entire text value matches the find value. Substring match Specifies to replace the text if any part of the text value matches the find value. First occurrence only Specifies that only the first occurrence within the text value should be replaced. Find Specifies the value you wish to find.
into the wire number itself. For example, you can have wire numbers like 123-RD-14 or 124-BLK-10 instead of 123 or 124. 1 Click the Project Manager tool. 2 In the Project Manager, right-click the project name, and select Properties. 3 In the Project Properties dialog box, click the Wire Numbers tab. 4 In the Wire Number Options section, select Based on Wire Layer and then click Layer Setup. The Assign Wire Numbering Formats by Wire Layers dialog box opens.
Assign wire numbering formats by wire layers The default format of a wire number is defined in the AutoCAD Electrical Project Properties dialog box. This format is used for all wire numbers inserted on a drawing. However, there may be times when you want certain types of wires to be numbered in a different way (i.e. to carry a different format). AutoCAD Electrical allows you to override the default wire number format by using layer defined formats.
Wire number format for layer Defines the format override. Starting wire sequence Specifies the sequential start number for the layer. Use this if you are using Sequential Mode. Wire number suffix list for layer Specifies a unique suffix list. The suffix list must be a comma delimited string. Use this if you are using Reference Mode.
Fix Wire Numbering Fix a wire number In some cases, you may find that certain wire numbers must be preassigned. These might include motor wiring that needs to include special suffix values or other wiring, such as instrumentation, that might not follow the default numbering convention. Manually edit the wire number and flip it to fixed.
Fixing a wire number means that the wire number tag is left unchanged if later processed or reprocessed by the automatic wire numbering utility. 1 Click the Edit Wire Number tool. 2 Select a wire or select an existing wire number. If a wire number exists, the Modify/Fix/Unfix dialog box displays. However, if a wire number doesn't exist on the selected wire, the Insert Wire Number dialog box displays. 3 Edit the wire number or enter a new wire number.
You can quickly fix or unfix all wire numbers across the active project using the Project-Wide Utilities tool. 1 Click the arrow on the Project Manager tool to access the Project-Wide Utilities tool. 2 Click the Project-Wide Utilities tool. 3 In the Project-Wide Utilities dialog box, Wire Numbers section, select Set all wire numbers to fixed or Set all wire numbers to normal, and click OK. 4 Select the drawings to process and click OK.
NOTE An error log file is created for every project regardless whether you chose to display the real time warning dialog or not. The real time warning is saved in the log file named "_error.log" and is saved in the User subdirectory. Pick Prefills the wire number edit box with the text entity you select. Use Up or Down to quickly increment or decrement the wire number. Make it Fixed Fixes the wire number so that it does not change if later processed by the automatic wire numbering utility.
Component Tags Select to maintain the component tags or to set all parent component tags to fixed or normal across the current project. For each drawing Enter the name or browse to a command script file to be used for each drawing in the current project or to purge all blocks. Change Attribute Change Attribute Size Click Setup to select the attributes to change, and then enter the height and width definitions for the selected attributes.
Reposition Wire Numbers Scoot wire numbers If you want to move a wire number along its wire segment, use Scoot and pick right on the wire number. 1 Click the Scoot tool. 2 Select the wire number to slide along its connected wires or select the wire segment itself to scoot the entire wire, including the components, along the bus. You can scoot an entire rung up or down. A rectangle drawn in temporary graphics indicates the selected items.
1 Click the arrow on the Move/Show Attribute tool to access the Rotate Attribute tool. 2 Click the Rotate Attribute tool. 3 Select the wire number text to rotate 90 degrees from its current orientation. Each click on the wire number text rotates it another 90 degrees counter-clockwise. Reposition the wire number text with an attached leader If you want to reposition the wire number text with an attached leader, use the Wire Number Leader command. 1 Click the Wire Number Leader tool.
it. 3 Select the base and insertion points for the move. The attribute follows your cursor and is automatically moved to the selected position. The attributes remain tied to the parent block inserts. NOTE Avoid using the AutoCAD MOVE command to reposition a wire number. An AutoCAD Electrical smart wire number is an invisible block with one visible wire number attribute associated with it. The block's X-Y insertion point needs to physically lie on the wire segment.
box. If you assign a color to this layer that is different than the normal wire number and fixed wire number layers, then it is easy to tell them apart from the network's main wire number. 1 Click the Copy Wire Numbers tool. 2 Select the wire location where you want the extra wire number to insert.
You may want some wire numbers to appear in-line with the wire rather than above or below the wire. 1 Click the arrow on the Copy Wire Numbers tool to access the Copy Wire Number (In-Line) tool. 2 Click the Copy Wire Number (In-Line) tool. 3 Specify the insertion point for the wire number. 4 In the Insert Wire Number dialog box, enter the wire number, use Pick to select similar text from the drawing, or click the arrows to increment or decrement the wire number. 5 Click OK.
width even if the wire number is a single character or has been blanked out. The gap is adjusted for the selected wire number. Mirror a wire number 1 Click the Flip Wire Number tool. 2 Select the wire number to mirror. Each wire number selected is mirrored across its associated wire. TIP Use the Toggle Wire Number In-Line tool to move a wire number from above/below the wire to in-line, and vice-versa.
Apply a drawing-specific wire number settings that are maintained inside the drawing's WD_M block. Access: Click the Project Manager tool. In the Project Manager, right-click the drawing name, and select Properties ➤ Drawing Properties. From the Projects menu, select Project ➤ Project Manager. In the Project Manager, right-click the drawing name, and select Properties ➤ Drawing Properties. Wire Number Format Wire number tags can be sequential or reference-based.
Sequential Enter the starting sequential number (alpha, numeric, or alphanumeric) for the drawing. If you enter the same starting sequential number for every drawing of your wiring diagram set, AutoCAD Electrical confirms at insertion time that a new sequential wire number tag is not repeated on any other drawing. If you set DEMO1 to 100 and DEMO2 to 200, the wire numbers on DEMO1 start at 100 and those on DEMO2 start at 200.
Gap Setup Defines spacing between the inline wire number and the wire itself. Below Wire Places the wire number below the physical wire. Offset Specifies to insert the wire number tags the specified offset distance. Centered Specifies to insert the wire number tags in the center of each wire segment. Offset Distance Specifies a fixed, user-defined offset distance from the left or top of the first wire segment found on the wire network. Leaders (This option is unavailable for in-line wire numbers.
NOTE You can also do this by creating an electrical template drawing with the wd_m block pre-inserted and the increment value pre-assigned. Change the default wire number size You will need to change several block inserts in each of the symbol libraries you use. The wire number block drawings you need to adjust are: wd_wnh.dwg (horizontal wire number), wd_wnv.dwg (vertical wire number), wd_wch.dwg (horizontal extra wire number copy), and wd_wcv.dwg (vertical extra wire number copy).
Erase or Hide Wire Numbers Erase a wire number If you erase a wire number and select right on an extra wire number copy, AutoCAD Electrical will erase just that copy but leave the networks main wire number and any other copies in place. 1 Select Wires ➤ Delete Wire Numbers. 2 Select the wire number or pick on any wire in the network. 3 Press Enter. The wire number is automatically deleted. Extra wire number copies can also be deleted.
AutoCAD Electrical automatically hides wire numbers when the wire number is on the same network as a terminal symbol that carries a copy of the wire number (WIRENO attribute). There may be times when you want to manually hide or unhide wire number(s). 1 Click the arrow on the Edit Wire Number tool to access the Hide Wire Numbers tool. 2 Click the Hide Wire Numbers tool. 3 Select a wire number or the wire it is associated to.
Use this tool to insert the X grid labels for drawings that use X Zones for the Format Referencing. You can also change other settings from here (such as origin) instead of going back into the Drawing Properties dialog box. NOTE Your drawing must be configured for X Zones. Set the Format Referencing in the Drawing Properties ➤ Drawing Format dialog box to X Zones. Access: Click the arrow on the Insert Ladder tool to access the X Zone tool.
Use this tool to insert the X-Y grid labels for drawings that use X-Y Grid for the Format Referencing. You can also change other settings from here (such as origin) instead of going back into the Drawing Properties dialog box. NOTE Your drawing must be configured for X-Y Grids. Set the Format Referencing in the Drawing Properties ➤ Drawing Format dialog box to X-Y Grid. Access: Click the arrow on the Insert Ladder tool to access the XY Grid tool.
Insert X-Y grid labels (only available when accessed from the toolbar or menu) Specifies whether to insert the grid labels. If you select to insert the labels, enter the horizontal and vertical column counts. PLC I/O wire numbers This tool inserts wire numbers based upon the I/O address that each PLC connected wire touches. Wire numbers go in as FIXED which means that they do not change if a wire number retag is run later on.
by first grouping devices by common Location codes and sequentially reports each group’s inter-wiring. It then ties each common Location group together with a single from/to wire connection. For wire connections with the same Location group (or if all devices have the same Location value or no Location value), AutoCAD Electrical attempts to sort the wire connections by physical location on the drawing and report the from/to connections in that order.
connection attribute). When any of the AutoCAD Electrical From/To reports processes wire networks containing this incrementing sequencing data, the from/to wire connections order accordingly. NOTE Schematic wire connection and Direct-to-Terminal sequencing methods on a given wire network take precedence over all other sequencing methods.
Edit a wire network's connection sequence You can explicitly define the wire connection sequence of any wire networks consisting of three or more interconnected devices.
Edit a wire sequence This tool predefines a wire network's connection sequence. The network can be either fully contained on the active drawing or pass across multiple drawings using signal source/destination symbols. 1 Click the arrow on the Insert Wire tool to access the Edit Wire Sequence tool. 2 Click the Edit Wire Sequence tool. NOTE You can also access this tool by right-clicking on any wire segment in the wire network. 3 Select any wire segment on the wire network you want to process.
wire connections (as Xdata on the wire connection attributes and optionally to terminal symbols in the case of Direct-toTerminal Secondary sequencing). 7 (Optional) Right-click on a wire on the wire network and select Wire Sequence ➤ Show Wire Sequence. Press the spacebar to advance through the sequence. You can also view the results of your sequencing by running the Wire From/To report. Show a defined wire sequence This tool shows the wire sequence defined using the Edit Wire Sequence tool.
You cannot insert a tee connection symbol into empty space. A valid line wire ending (not crossing) at a tee intersection somewhere along the length of another line wire is needed. This means that it does not insert a tee connection symbol at a simple 90-degree wire turn. You can right-click on any of your inserted tee markers for access to editing tools such as Toggle Angled Tee Markers, Delete Component, Scoot, or Insert Wire.
NOTE For these dot and angled tee markers to insert automatically as each wire tee intersection is created, set the default Wire Tee connection in the Wiring Style section of the Drawing Properties ➤ Styles dialog box. 1 Click the arrow on the Wire Tee Markers tool to access the Insert Angled Tee Markers tool. 2 Click the Insert Angled Tee Markers tool. 3 Select at or near the intersection point. If a dot marker is present, it is deleted and replaced by the angled tee symbol.
2 Click the Toggle Angled Tee Markers tool. 3 Select or window the tee connections to change. 4 Right-click or press the spacebar to toggle through the various tee connection orientations, and press Esc when the desired one displays. This replaces any dot tee symbols with angled tee symbols and then toggles through the 4 possible orientations for each. Edit wire connection sequence This tool defines the wire connection sequence of any wire networks containing three or more interconnected devices.
NOTE Your dialog box differs depending on whether you selected to modify the sequence of a wire network that is connected to a terminal. When a terminal is part of the selected wire network, you have an option to define secondary Direct-to-Terminal wire connection sequences. Wire Connection Sequence Lists the wires and terminals found in the circuit.
Add Moves the selected components to the Direct-toTerminal Secondary Sequences list along with a copy of the selected terminal. You must select the components and terminal to sequence together for this button to be available. If you select multiple components to daisy-chain to the terminal (by holding CTRL key down), the first selected component displays ties directly to the terminal.
work. This sequence data is then maintained inside of the drawing file and subsequently extracted into the project scratch database file to control the format of wire connections listed in the WFRM2ALL table. Add custom signal arrow styles The icon menu graphics that display for the various signal styles are bitmap files saved to your C:\Program Files [(x86)]\Autodesk\Acade {version}\Acade\ folder where AutoCAD Electrical's Insert Signal utilities and Drawing Properties tool can access them.
Access: From the Wires menu, select Signal References ➤ Destination Signal Arrow. Code Specifies the code for the destination signal. Enter a unique number/word/phrase, 32-character maximum, for AutoCAD Electrical to use to internally link the destination wire network to any/all source wire networks. Description (optional) Specifies the description for the destination signal. Defaults Opens an ASCII text file from which you can quickly pick standard descriptions.
number/word/phrase, 32-char maximum, for AutoCAD Electrical to use to internally link the source wire network to any/all destination wire networks. Access: Click the drop-down arrow on the Source/Destination Signals tool to access the Source Signal Arrow tool From the Wires menu, select Signal References ➤ Source Signal Arrow. Code Specifies the code for the source signal.
and retrieves its signal code for use on this new source arrow. Signal Arrow Style Specifies the arrow style to use for the source signal. Select from the 4 pre-defined styles or a userdefined style. OK + Update Destination Finishes the source arrow insert and updates the destination arrow with this source arrow. Project properties: styles tab Modify your project default settings for various component styles.
TIP For instructions on how to add custom Fan-In/Out marker styles, see Add custom fan-in/out marker styles. (page 548) Layer List Lists the Fan In/Out layers. Add Defines layer names as Fan In/Out layers. Remove Removes the selected layer from the defined layer list. Wire Cross Specifies the default mode of operation when wires cross each other: insert gap with no loop, insert gap and loop, or solid (no gap). Wire Tee Specifies the default wire tee marker: none, dot, angle1 or angle2.
TIP For instructions on how to add custom PLC module styles, see Add a new PLC style. (page 251) Fan-In/Out Marker Style Defines the default Fan In/Out marker style and the layers for wires going out of a Fan In/Out Source marker and those coming into a Destination marker. TIP For instructions on how to add custom Fan-In/Out marker styles, see Add custom fan-in/out marker styles. (page 548) Layer List Lists the Fan In/Out layers. Add Defines layer names as Fan In/Out layers.
exception report that lists problem areas such as a destination signal with no source found or a source signal that doesn't tie to a destination. Click Format on the subdialog box to select from a listing of report settings files found that have a prefix equal to the selected report type.
Conductor 24 Conductor color or ID code Gauge 24 Conductor gauge description Recnum N/A Auto number field (used internally) For a given cable part number there is a record for each conductor within that cable. For example, a 15-conductor Belden type 8486 cable has 15 records; one for each conductor in that cable type. The Manufacturer and Catalog fields for all 15 records are marked "BELDEN" and "8486." The Conductor field carries each conductor's unique color id.
When a Fan In/Out marker is inserted, AutoCAD Electrical breaks the wire and changes the layer of one side of the wire to a special layer. If you are inserting a source marker, then the wire coming out of the marker is changed. If it is a destination marker, the wire coming into the marker is changed. You can use the AutoCAD Electrical Fan In/Out - Single Line Layer command to change a wire to one of these layers.
Add source markers 1 Click the arrow on the Source/Destination Signals tool to access the Fan In/Out Source tool. 2 Click the Fan In/Out Source tool. 3 Select the style and orientation for the markers and click OK. 4 Select the insertion point on the screen for the marker. The Signal-Source Code dialog box displays. 5 Enter a source code for the marker and optionally a description.
NOTE If the destination wires are nearby it may be easiest to insert them right away. If they are on another drawing you can wait until later to insert them.
Add destination markers 1 Click the arrow on the Source/Destination Signals tool to access the Fan In/Out Destination tool. 2 Click the Fan In/Out Destination tool. 3 Select the style and orientation for the markers and click OK. 4 Select the wire for the destination marker. The Insert Destination Code dialog box displays. 5 Enter the code or select Recent to see a list of the recent markers inserted. 6 Specify the arrow style to use for the destination signal.
Define fan-in/out layers A special layer or set of layers can be defined for the wires going out of a Fan In/Out Source marker and the wires coming into a Destination marker. 1 Click the arrow on the Source/Destination Signals tool to access the Fan In/Out - Single Line Layer tool. 2 Click the Fan In/Out - Single Line Layer tool. The list displays only layers that are already assigned as Fan In/Out Layers as defined in the drawing properties setup.
NOTE If the resulting bitmap is too small or off-center, open the source drawing in AutoCAD again. Resize your AutoCAD graphics window so that it is more square. Center the image and resave. Repeat until you are satisfied with the result. Fan-in/fan-out signal source Uses set of in-line source/destination symbols that follow the naming format of ha#s?_inline.dwg and ha#d?_inline.dwg where # = style number and ? = 1,2,3,4 orientation number (just like with existing source/destination arrows).
connected common wires on the fan-out side to non-wire layer but leaves the individual segments on the opposite side of marker on the original wire layer. The AutoCAD Electrical source/destination update or Automatic Wire Number command then makes the match-up annotation, whether the fan-in/fan-out are on the same or different drawings. Access: Click the arrow on the Source/Destination Signals tool to access the Fan In/Out Destination tool.
Change existing wires only (no convert) Changes only the layers of wires that are already defined as Fan In/Out wires. Otherwise AutoCAD Electrical can convert any selected lines to the Fan In/Out layer. One pick gets all connected wires Changes all of the wires to the selected layer that is associated with the selected wire network. If this option is not selected, only the selected wire changes. Make selected layer current Makes the selected layer the current layer.
552
9 Terminal Tools In this chapter ■ Overview of connection sequencing ■ Insert terminals and connectors ■ Multi-Level Terminals ■ Edit terminal jumpers ■ Resequence terminal numbers ■ View terminal wire connections ■ Terminal Strips ■ Terminal Properties Lookup 553
Overview of connection sequencing The Multi-Connection Sequence Terminal symbol allows a single in-line schematic symbol to represent a sequence of wire connections passing through two or more (up to six) terminal strips. For example, a wire connection that must pass through a series of shipping split terminal strips can be represented by a single in-line wire schematic symbol (instead of having to show each individual terminal in the sequence). Two sample symbols are provided.
Edit multi-connection sequence terminal symbol Access: Click the Insert Component tool. Enter "H--1_MULTI_CONN_NOCHG" in the Type It box and click OK. Specify the insertion point on the drawing. From the Components menu, select Insert Component. Enter "H-1_MULTI_CONN_NOCHG" in the Type It box and click OK. Specify the insertion point on the drawing. Select any entry within a group to view/edit that group.
you can substitute this single "multi-connection sequence" terminal representation and manually define the connection sequence. Tag - ID Terminal strip tag-ID Terminal Number Terminal strip terminal number Miscellaneous Edit box shows saved data values defined by selections below. Installation Code Changes the installation code assignment. You can search the current drawing or entire project for installation codes.
the previous component's catalog assignment is set as the default (assuming a previous one was made during the current editing session). Find Scans each drawing for the target component type and returns a list of what was found. You can make your catalog assignment by selecting from the list. Catalog Lookup Opens the component's catalog database from which you can manually enter or select the Manufacturer or Catalog values.
Catalog Check Displays what the selected item will look like in a Bill of Material template. Wire entering this connection Click Internal, External, or Both to change the Connection Code (I=Internal, E=External). The code changes the Miscellaneous value as follows: LEFT_TERMDESC=I (for Internal), LEFT_TERMDESC=E (for External). Wire leaving this connection Click Internal, External, or Both to change the Connection Code (I=Internal, E=External).
Insert new after this one Pushes all of the following sequences down one position and creates a new, empty entry just after the displayed entry. There is a maximum of 6 total positions. Insert terminals and connectors Terminal symbols on the schematic are a representation of wire connection points. The terminal symbol representation on the schematic can have associations with the physical terminal block on the panel drawing.
Insert terminals You can select from five main terminal styles (square, round, hexagon, diamond and triangle). Each type of terminal behavior is controlled by the terminal block name. 1 Click the Insert Component tool. 2 Click the Terminals/Connectors button. 3 Select a terminal symbol to insert. 4 Specify the insertion point. 5 On the Insert/Edit Terminal Symbol dialog box, annotate the terminal symbol including (but not limited to) the terminal number, tag strip value, and catalog information.
NOTE Assign short installation or location codes to components like "PNL" and "FIELD" to later take full advantage of the AutoCAD Electrical ability to create installation or location-specific Bill of Materials and component lists. Installation Changes the installation codes. Click Browse to search the active drawing, entire project and an external list (default.inst) for installation codes. Pick from the list to automatically update the component with the installation code.
NOTE You cannot associate terminals using the Add/Modify or Break Out options when you insert a terminal using the Insert Terminal (Panel List) tool. However, once the terminal is inserted onto the drawing, you can modify the associations using these tools.. Add/Modify Displays the Add/Modify Associations dialog box where you can select terminal strips and their respective blocks to make an association to the terminal symbol being inserted or edited.
You can double-click in the list to modify the terminal association in the Add/Modify Associations dialog box. Label Lists the level description defined in the terminal block properties. This data is entered into the LnnLABEL attribute if present; otherwise, it is placed into xdata. Number Lists the terminal numbers defined in the association. Only one terminal number is allowed per level and each level displays its respective terminal number or text.
Numbers Used Lists all terminal numbers found, either drawingwide or project-wide, whose Tag Strip value matches the highlighted Tag Strip value. Catalog Data You can do a drawing-wide or project-wide listing of similar terminals with their catalog assignments. During your editing session, the last MFG / CAT / ASSYCODE assignment for each terminal type you insert into your wiring diagram is remembered.
the list to assign your new terminal with a catalog number that is consistent with other similar terminals in the project. ■ Other project: Scans each listed drawing in a previous project for the target terminal type and returns the catalog information in a sub-dialog box. Make your catalog assignment by picking from the dialog list. ■ External file: You can pull catalog assignments from a generic ASCII file created by a word processor or output from a spreadsheet or database program.
Pick Picks a description from a component on the current drawing. Ratings You can enter up to 12 ratings attributes on a component. The View/Edit Rating Values dialog box lets you enter values for each ratings attribute. Select the Defaults button next to the edit box to display a list of default values. NOTE If this button is grayed out, the component you are editing does not carry any rating attributes.
The default level for any terminal symbol that is placed into the project that is not associated to another is 0. Manufacturer Displays the Manufacturer value that is currently assigned to the terminal being edited. Catalog Number Displays the Catalog Number value that is currently assigned to the terminal being edited. Assembly Code Displays the Assembly Code value that is currently assigned to the terminal being edited. Levels Specifies the number of levels for the terminal.
Terminal block property attributes The values in the grid are stored as follows, where “nn” represents the level number and is always stored as two digits (i.e.
block properties. If a block property is modified, all of the terminal symbols update. The terminal symbols are associated by an ID value held on the LINKTERM attribute or xdata. When a terminal symbol is inserted, by default it is seen as a standalone terminal (it has no associations) and receives a new LINKTERM value. When the terminal is associated to another, the LINKTERM value updates so that each terminal carries the same LINKTERM value.
You can associate a schematic and panel terminal automatically using either the Insert Panel Terminal from Schematic tool or the Insert Schematic Terminal from Panel tool. In the case of multi-level terminals, the Insert Panel Terminal from Schematic tool shows only one terminal for insertion regardless of how many schematic terminal symbols/levels there are for that multi-level block. The Insert Schematic Terminal from Panel tool shows one terminal for each level for insertion.
Associating a panel terminal provides a way to define a particular panel footprint to represent a schematic block property definition. 1 Click the arrow on the Miscellaneous tool to access the Associate Terminals tool. 2 Click the Associate Terminals tool. 3 Select a terminal symbol to use as the master. This is used as the basis for any terminal property definition. NOTE Your terminal symbol must have block properties defined.
Show terminal associations Use the Show Terminal Associations tool to display the current associations for the selected terminals. AutoCAD Electrical draws temporary lines between the associated terminals. These graphics disappear the next time you do a Regen. 1 Select Components ➤ Terminals ➤ Show Terminal Associations. 2 Select the terminals you want to view the associations of. Red dashed lines are drawn between the terminals that are associated to the selected terminal.
in the association exceeds the total allowed, an alert displays and the properties are not copied. 1 Click the arrow on the Miscellaneous tool to access the Copy Terminal Block Properties tool. 2 Click the Copy Terminal Block Properties tool. 3 Select the master terminal to copy properties from. 4 Select the terminals to apply the properties to. 5 Press Enter. Edit terminal jumpers Use the Edit Jumper tool to jumper two or more terminals together in a schematic diagram.
6 (Optional) If you selected to edit the jumpers, make modifications in the Edit Terminal Jumpers dialog box and click OK. 7 (Optional) Enter Show s at the command line to draw temporary broken lines between the primary terminal and secondary terminals within the same drawing. Workflow 2: 1 Select Components ➤ Terminals ➤ Edit Jumper. 2 Enter Browse (B) at the command line. 3 Select the terminals to be jumpered (from the left tree view) and copied to the right tree view.
As you select a terminal, the drawing in which that terminal resides displays under the tree views or under the terminal preview window. Schematic Terminals Lists all of the terminal strips and terminals in the active project. Select the terminals to jumper together; as you make your selection, the terminals are bolded in the left tree and added to the Jumper Terminals list. Terminal nodes have a graphic on the left side to indicate whether the terminal has a jumper attached to it.
Hide/Show Switches the visibility of the preview window at the bottom of the dialog box. Preview window Shows a graphical representation of the selected terminals. You can pan the image using the left mouse button or the Pan tool. You can zoom the image using the mouse wheel or the various zoom tools. Edit terminal jumpers Use this to edit the jumper information (such as adding catalog data) or delete the jumper. Access: Click Components ➤ Terminals ➤ Edit Jumper.
Delete ■ Lookup: Displays the catalog database from which you can select the Manufacturer and Catalog values. ■ Drawing: Lists the part numbers used for similar components in the active drawing. ■ Project: Lists the part numbers used for similar components in the active project. Select the jumper label, terminal strip or a single terminal to perform one of the following actions: ■ Jumper label: Deletes the jumper from all of the terminals.
Resequence terminal numbers AutoCAD Electrical provides utilities to make it easy to resequence the terminal numbers across one or many drawings. These utilities do not resequence terminals that carry a wire number as the terminal number. 1 Select Components ➤ Components Miscellaneous ➤ Terminal Strip Utilities. 2 Select a method to use for resequencing the terminal strips. ■ Terminal Renumber (Pick Mode): Enter the first terminal number to use and press Enter. Select each terminal in order on the screen.
NOTE This utility does not resequence terminals that carry a wire number as the terminal number. Tag-ID Specifies the terminal strip ID to use when searching each drawing for terminals. Only terminals with this ID are updated. Include Installation/Location in terminal strip Tag-ID match Updates a terminal only if it matches the Terminal Strip ID, Location, and Installation values specified. Installation code Refines the search by including an installation value.
Show terminal internal/external connections This tool shows the state of the invisible attribute values for selected objects. The values are shown with red and green arrows. 1 Click the arrow on the Insert Wires tool to access the Terminal: Show Internal/External Connections tool. 2 Click the Terminal: Show Internal/External Connections tool. 3 Select the objects to show the connection codes for. You can pick on individual objects or select a group of objects using a boundary box.
1 Click the arrow on the Insert Wires tool to access the Terminal: Show Internal/External Connections tool. 2 Click the arrow on the Terminal: Show Internal/External Connections tool to access the Terminal: Mark External Connections tool. 3 Click the Terminal: Mark External Connections tool. 4 Select near a terminal's wire connection point. The attribute will be marked with an arrow to indicate whether it is an external value.
Create terminal strips Use the Terminal Strip utility to create non-intelligent terminal strips. The terminal numbers can be imported from a file, windowed on one or more drawings, individually picked, typed in by hand, or all of the above. 1 Select Components ➤ Components Miscellaneous ➤ Terminal Strip Utilities. 2 Select a method to use for creating the terminal strips.
Access: From the Components menu, select Components Miscellaneous ➤ Terminal Strip Utilities ➤ Terminal List (Manual Picks). From the Components menu, select Components Miscellaneous ➤ Terminal Strip Utilities ➤ Terminal List (From File). You can sort, add, remove, and re-arrange the terminal strip layout. You can even go to other schematic drawings and add more to the list (just click Cancel, go to the next drawing, and re-invoke the utility - it remembers what you have accumulated so far).
Terminal strip representation - setup Annotates the text size, height and width sizes, and orientation of the terminal strip. Access: From the Components menu, select Components Miscellaneous ➤ Terminal Strip Utilities ➤ Terminal List (Manual Picks). Select the terminal to modify and click OK. From the Components menu, select Components Miscellaneous ➤ Terminal Strip Utilities ➤ Terminal List (From File). Select the terminal to modify and click OK.
Between Entries Creates lines between entries in the terminal strip. Start Line Specifies which line the terminal strip will start at. End Specifies which line the terminal strip will end at. Layer Specifies the layer for the table ruling lines. The selected layer is displayed next to the button on the dialog box. Terminal Strip Orientation Vertical Specifies to vertically display the terminal strip.
The Installation (INST), Location (LOC) and Tag Strip (TAG_STRIP) values are used to determine a terminal strip’s uniqueness no matter which standard is used in the active project (such as IEC or JIC). After changes have been made with the Terminal Strip Editor, the changes are written back to the schematic drawing for future updates, and a graphical or tabular drawing of a terminal strip layout is created. Your drawing must be part of the active project in order to perform updates.
Insert a terminal strip using the Terminal Strip Editor 1 On the Panel Layout toolbar, click the Terminal Strip Editor tool. 2 On the Terminal Strip Selection dialog box, click New. NOTE If you want to use the Installation, Location, and Tag Strip values from an existing terminal, select the terminal before you click New. 3 On the Terminal Strip Definition dialog box, specify the Installation code, Location code, Tag Strip value, and number of terminal blocks to be defined on the terminal strip. 4 Click OK.
2 Select which terminal strip to edit on the Terminal Strip Selection dialog box and click Edit. 3 Select the tab to edit: Terminal Strip, Catalog Code Assignment, Cable Information or Layout Preview. ■ Terminal Strip tab: Modify the terminal block properties, spare terminals, accessories, multi-level terminals, and destination locations.
Sort the entire table by selecting the individual column headers. Do any of the following: ■ To edit an existing terminal strip, select the terminal strip and click Edit. ■ To create a new terminal strip, click New. ■ To create a new terminal strip based on an existing one, select the terminal strip and click New. Terminal strip definition This dialog box controls the naming of the terminal strip, Installation and Location codes, and default options for the terminal blocks being created.
Number of Terminal Blocks Specifies the number of blocks the terminal strip is made up of. This value is not maintained on any of the terminal symbols in the graphical terminal strip layout. If the Installation and Location values are left blank, the terminal strip is created using only the strip tag name. The Installation (INST), Location (LOC) and Tag Strip (TAG_STRIP) values are used to determine a terminal strip’s uniquness no matter which standard is used in the active project (such as IEC or JIC).
NOTE You can right-click any row in the terminal listing to access any of the editing tools found in the button groupings at the bottom of the dialog box. You can also right-click to select or deselect all of the terminals in the strip. Internal Destination Displays the devices on the left side of the terminal strip. Terminal Block Information Displays the terminal block number and terminal device pin connection descriptions.
Terminal Edit Terminal Modifies the selected terminal block. Any modifications to the ID (Installation, Location, Terminal Strip) removes the terminal block from its current terminal strip into the modified or newly defined terminal strip. You can perform a search of the project for current installation and location codes. Reassign Terminal Moves the highlighted terminal blocks from the active terminal strip to the terminal strip defined in the Reassign Terminal dialog box.
NOTE Spare terminal assignments are temporary for the current session of the Terminal Strip Editor. Place the graphical terminal strip layout on the drawing during the current session if you want to keep the spare terminal assignments. Insert Accessory Inserts one or more accessories (such as terminal end barriers or partitions) into the terminal strip. NOTE Accessory terminal assignments are temporary for the current session of the Terminal Strip Editor.
Move Destination Moves the destinations within the terminal/level definition. All the selected destinations are moved up or down within the level they belong to. Only the destinations for cloned blocks due to wire constraints can cross the boundary of the level they originally belong to. Multi-Level Associate Terminals Combines two or more terminal blocks from any drawing into a single multiple-level terminal block. You are alerted if you select too many levels to associate.
Modifies terminal catalog numbers. The terminals display in the center of the list box, with associated catalog number information and destinations on both sides. Access: On the Panel Layout toolbar, click the Terminal Strip Editor tool. Make your selection on the Terminal Strip Selection dialog box and click Edit or New. Click the Catalog Code Assignment tab. Click Panel Layout ➤ Terminal Strip Editor. Make your selection on the Terminal Strip Selection dialog box and click Edit or New.
display in the Terminal Listing with a blue background indicating that they are associated to the terminal block. External Destination Displays the devices on the right side of the terminal strip. A single line entry terminal block has only two wires connected with its destinations on opposing sides (left/right). Use the terminal block properties to connect more wires to the terminal block, which changes the block into a multiple-line terminal entry.
Renumber Terminals Renumbers all, or a partial list, of terminal blocks from the active terminal strip. On the Renumber Terminal Strip dialog box, specify the new starting number and other options for renumbering the terminal. NOTE You cannot renumber a terminal that uses a wire number as its terminal number. Additionally, duplicate terminal numbers are not restricted.
Delete Spare Terminals/Accessories Deletes the spare terminal block or accessory on the terminal strip listing. Destinations Toggle Location Toggles an entire location code from an Internal destination to an External destination or from an External destination to an Internal destination. You don't have to select any terminal blocks from the terminal listing.
levels or use the Break Apart Terminal Associations tool to separate out one of the levels in the new association. Break Apart Terminal Associations Separates one or more levels from the multiple level terminal block into separate terminal blocks. When the new terminal definitions are created, they retain the same properties as the original terminal. ■ One terminal: Breaks the selected levels from their original association and adds them into a new association together.
Paste Catalog Number Pastes one terminal's catalog part numbers (and terminal block properties) to another single terminal or multiple terminal blocks within the Terminal Strip Editor. Terminal strip editor: cable information tab Displays cable previews for terminal blocks. The terminals are displayed in the center of the list box with the cable name, wire conductor information, and device destination information on both sides. Access: On the Panel Layout toolbar, click the Terminal Strip Editor tool.
NOTE You can right-click on any row in the terminal listing to access any of the editing tools found in the button groupings at the bottom of the dialog box. You can also right-click to select or deselect all of the terminals in the strip. Internal Destination Displays the devices on the left side of the terminal strip. Terminal Block Information Displays the terminal block number, terminal device pin connection descriptions, and cable information.
Terminal Edit Terminal Modifies the selected terminal block. Any modifications to the ID (Installation, Location, Terminal Strip) removes the terminal block from its current terminal strip into the modified or newly defined terminal strip. You can perform a search of the project for current installation and location codes. Reassign Terminal Moves the highlighted terminal blocks from the active terminal strip to the terminal strip defined in the Reassign Terminal dialog box.
NOTE Spare terminal assignments are temporary for the current session of the Terminal Strip Editor. Place the graphical terminal strip layout on the drawing during the current session if you want to keep the spare terminal assignments. Insert Accessory Inserts one or more accessories (such as terminal end barriers or partitions) into the terminal strip. NOTE Accessory terminal assignments are temporary for the current session of the Terminal Strip Editor.
Move Destination Moves the destinations within the terminal/level definition. All the selected destinations are moved up or down within the level they belong to. Only the destinations for cloned blocks due to wire constraints can cross the boundary of the level they originally belong to. Terminal strip editor: layout preview tab Controls a preview display of the terminal strip in graphical or tabular layout.
Default pick list for Annotation format Lists some common formatting types. You are not limited to the selections provided by the default pick list. The replaceable parameter variables can be displayed in any combination including hard-coded characters such as dashes, brackets, and parenthesis. Annotation Format Determines the formatting of the wiring information associated with the terminal destination. You can define variable information to display the contents of the Terminal Strip Editor.
can leave this field blank if you do not want a header added to the preview. Terminal Table Row Block Defines the individual terminal block rows in the table and displays the terminal, wiring, cabling, and terminal destination information. The default name for the Terminal Table Row Block is TERMLAY_ROW.DWG. You can create your own terminal row symbols by modifying the attribute requirements, and then click Browse to search for the new row block to be used in this tabular terminal strip layout.
Scale on Insert Specifies the scale to use when inserting the graphical representation onto the drawing file. Angle on Insert Specifies the angle to use when inserting the graphical representation onto the drawing file. Select from the list of predefined angles. Tabular Layout for a Table Object The following options are available if you selected to create a Tabular Terminal Strip (Table Object). Table Rows Displays the total number of rows needed to create the tabular terminal strip layout.
Table Layer dialog box, select the layer name from the list of layers on the active drawing and click OK. The selections are stored in the table when it is inserted and the next time the terminal is edited, the settings are read back in. Table Title Defines a title for the table. Enter a title, select from a list of variables or use a combination of both. When selecting from the list, the selection is added to the end of the string if one exists in the edit box.
Refresh (Available for tabular terminal strips created from table objects only.) Refreshes the data within an existing tabular terminal strip; a new table is not inserted. Terminal block properties Use this dialog box to control the number of levels assigned to a multiple level terminal block. You can control the level description, number of wires per connection, pins right and pins left. The terminal block properties are maintained on every terminal symbol in its association.
levels specified. You can then define the level description, wires per connection and pins. Terminal Block Property Definition grid Displays the terminal levels. You can edit and maintain properties of the terminal block here. ■ Level Description: Specifies the description for the levels of the terminal block. Text you enter here displays in the Insert/Edit Terminal Symbol and Multiple Level dialog boxes. This is a terminal property that is maintained on every symbol in its association.
NOTE If thse attributes are not present, the data is placed into Xdata with the same name, only wth a “VIA_WD_” prefix. Edit terminal Edits individual terminals/levels. Access: On the Panel Layout toolbar, click the Terminal Strip Editor tool. Make your selection on the Terminal Strip Selection dialog box and click Edit. On the Terminal Strip, Catalog Code Assignment, or Cable Information tab, select the level to modify. In the Terminals section, click Edit Terminal.
minal number. You can also click Pick to select a text object or an attribute on the active drawing to use for the terminal number. When inserting a new terminal, the highest terminal number in the strip is identified and the default terminal number for the new terminal increments by 1. NOTE This is unavailable when the terminal symbol does not have a TERM01 attribute or when the terminal number is the same as the wire number.
found in the active drawing, entire project or an external list (default.inst). Pick from the list to automatically update the component with the installation code. Location Code Specifies the Location code for the selected terminal. If there is an existing name, it appears in the edit box. If not, you can enter a new value. Click Browse to display a list of existing location values found in the active drawing, entire project or an external list (default.inst).
Start with bottom level Indicates to process the terminals starting with the last level and work its way back to 1, in order (5,4,3,2,1). If unselected, the tool starts with level 1 and moves forward (1,2,3,4,5). Ignore non-numeric terminal numbers Indicates to process only the terminals that are a numeric value, all terminals containing an alpha character are ignored and are not renumbered. Ignore accessories Indicates to ignore any accessories in the terminal strip during the renumber command.
Increment. For example, if you insert 3 spare terminals and they are defined as 3 level terminals, all three levels on terminal 1 are designated as 1, 2 as 2, and 3 as 3. If you want to modify these, edit the spare terminal or use the Renumber Terminals tool to get the numbering format you want. Quantity Specifies a numeric value for the number of spare terminals to insert. The default value is 1. Use < or > to increment the value by a single step.
Inserts terminal accessories such as end barriers and dividers, into the terminal strip. Access: On the Panel Layout toolbar, click the Terminal Strip Editor tool. Make your selection on the Terminal Strip Selection dialog box and click Edit. On the Terminal Strip, Catalog Code Assignment, or Cable Information tab, select the a terminal in the list. In the Spare section, click Insert Accessory. Click Panel Layout ➤ Terminal Strip Editor.
top of the dialog box with the database hits listed in the dialog's main window. Insert Above/Insert Below Once you define the starting number and the number of accessories to insert, click Insert Above to insert the defined accessories above the selected terminal in the grid, or Insert Below to insert the accessories below the selected terminal. Toggle location codes Toggles destinations based on their location codes from one side of the terminal to the other.
Toggles destinations based on their installation codes from one side of the terminal to the other. Access: On the Panel Layout toolbar, click the Terminal Strip Editor tool. Make your selection on the Terminal Strip Selection dialog box and click Edit. On the Terminal Strip, Catalog Code Assignment, or Cable Information tab, Destinations section, click Toggle Installation. From the Panel Layout menu, select Terminal Strip Editor. Make your selection on the Terminal Strip Selection dialog box and click Edit.
Access: Click Panel Layout ➤ Terminal Strip Editor. Make your selection on the Terminal Strip Selection dialog box and click Edit. On the Terminal Strip or Catalog Code Assignment tab, select the level to modify. In the Multi-Level section, click Associate Terminals. The number of levels you selected to add to the association displays at the top of the dialog box. Terminals Lists only the terminals that have enough available levels that can accommodate the number of levels you chose to associate.
Pin numbering is related to the terminal level and not the terminal tag number instance. ■ Associate Reference: Lists the terminal symbol’s reference location in the project. The syntax is “Sheet,Reference” based on the drawing configuration. Adds the selected terminal symbol to the terminal association selected on the Terminal Strip Editor dialog box.
Terminal Lists available row cell styles from the selected table style. Select a specific row style to be used for terminals, spare terminals and extra terminals that are inserted due to wiring constraints. Accessory Lists available row cell styles from the selected table style. Select a specific row style to be used for accessories. Terminal strip table data fields to include Defines the columns for your tabular terminal report.
Cell Style Specifies the cell style for the table. Within the table styles, you can define different cell styles to use. These give the added flexibility to customize how the terminal strip appears. As you select one of the fields to report you can assign a cell style to the selection. Name Displays the name for the field that is selected in the Fields to Report section of the dialog box. Use the default name or enter a new name in the edit box.
T2 Right T column in the Terminal Strip Editor grids. Manufacturer Manufacturer column in the Terminal Strip Editor Catalog Code Assignment grid. Catalog Catalog column in the Terminal Strip Editor Catalog Code Assignment grid. Conductor2 Right Conductor column in the Terminal Strip Editor Cable Information grid. Cable2 Right Cable column in the Terminal Strip Editor Cable Information grid. Type2 Right Type column in the Terminal Strip Editor grids.
Generate terminal strip tables Insert terminal strip tables onto drawings Use the Terminal Strip Table Generator tool to insert terminal tables onto drawings. A new drawing file is created with each section break and automatically added to the active project. 1 Click the arrow on the Terminal Strip Editor to access the Terminal Strip Table Generator tool. 2 Click the Terminal Strip Table Generator tool. 3 Select the terminal strips to create tables from. 4 Specify the file name for the first drawing.
installation code, location code, and tag are written to the Drawing Description Field inside of the project file (*.wdp). Access: Click the arrow on the Terminal Strip Editor tool to access the Terminal Strip Table Generator tool. Click Panel Layout ➤ Terminal Strip Table Generator. NOTE You can create only one section per drawing file. Each new terminal strip selected creates a new section and a new drawing. Terminal Strip Selection Lists all terminal strips in the active project.
Table Blocks/Table Object Specifies the type of table to generate. The dialog box options change depending on whether you are creating a table as blocks or as an AutoCAD table object. Table Layout (for Table Blocks) Terminal Table Header Block Defines columns in the table and display the terminal strip identification. The default name for the Terminal Table Header Block is TERMLAY_HEADER.DWG. Click Browse to search for a header block to be used in this tabular terminal strip layout.
the left-hand side, while the other is for the righthand side of the terminal footprint. Default Format Updates the Annotation Format fields to reflect the default allowed replaceable parameters (page 126). You are not limited to the selections provided by the default pick list. The replaceable parameter variables can be displayed in any combination including hardcoded characters such as dashes, brackets, and parenthesis Rows Per Section Specifies the number of rows per section.
Layer Defines the specific layer for the table to be placed on when inserted. On the Select Table Layer dialog box, select the layer name from the list of layers on the active drawing and click OK. The selections are stored in the table when it is inserted and the next time the terminal is edited, the settings are read back in. Table Title Defines a title for the table. Enter a title, select from a list of variables or use a combination of both.
NOTE If the selected terminal strip is not found in the project, an alert displays asking if you want to insert the missing strip in a new drawing. If you click Yes, the terminal strip is inserted. If you click No, the terminal strip is not inserted. The terminal strips that were found are updated. Refresh in Existing Drawing Refreshes the data within an existing tabular terminal strip; a new table is not inserted.
Structure of the terminal properties database table RECNUM (Microsoft Access internal use) MANUFACTURER Manufacturer code (value must be consistent with the catalog lookup files; 24 characters maximum) CATALOG Catalog number (use wild cards as much as possible; 60 characters maximum) ASSEMBLYCODE AutoCAD Electrical internal assembly code (must be consistent with the catalog lookup files; 60 characters maximum) LEVELS Number of levels for the terminal LEVELDESCRIPTION Levels description/level defi
2 In the Select Terminal Properties Table dialog box, select the table to edit and click Edit. NOTE You can also create a new table by entering the manufacturer name in the edit box and clicking Create. 3 In the Edit dialog box: ■ To edit an existing record, click Sort, Filter, or Find to search for the record to edit. Select the record from the list and click Edit. ■ To create a new record, click Add New, or select an existing record and click Add Copy to create a new record based on an existing one.
Create (Available only when you enter the name of a manufacturer.) Creates a new table in the catalog database with the specified name and adds the table to the list of manufacturers. Once a table is created, the Edit (Table: _TERMPROPS_manufacturer) dialog box displays so you can edit the new table. NOTE The following characters are not allowed in the table name: ~ @ # $ % ^ & * - + = \ { } “ ‘ ; : ? / < > , ! [ ] |. These characters are replaced with an underscore (_) if entered in the edit box.
Replace Indicates to replace the find value with the new text string that you specify. Filter Filters the listing based on certain values in the table. Picking the blank entry in the list removes the filter for that field. After you define the values to filter, apply the filter in the database editing window. Edit Displays the Edit Record dialog box for modifying the existing record in the database. Add New Displays the Edit New Record dialog box for entering a new record into the database.
LEVELS Number of levels for the terminal LEVELDESCRIPTION Levels description/level definition (255 characters maximum) TPINL Pin label definition for the left side of the terminal (255 characters maximum) TPINR Pin label definition for the right side of the terminal (255 characters maximum) WIRESPERCONNECTION Definition of the wiring constraints (255 characters maximum) When dealing with a multi-tier terminal, a comma (,) is used as a delimiter for the LevelDescription, TPINL, TPINR and WiresPerCo
10 Point-to-Point Wiring Tools In this chapter ■ Working with Connectors ■ Bend wires at right angles ■ Insert multiple bus wiring ■ Import data from Autodesk Inventor Professional Cable & Harness ■ Overview of the spreadsheet import file structure ■ Insert splices 635
Use point-to-point wiring tools The Point-to-Point wiring tools help you more easily create and work with point-to-point style wiring schematics (as opposed to ladder-style schematics). Though you may find some of these tools and enhancements useful for ladder-style schematics, these tools are tuned to work well with drawings that are heavy on inter-wired, multiple-pin connectors.
Scoot Wire Use the Scoot tool to move wires attached to pins on the connectors. The wire scoots and the connector pin along with it while the overall connector shell stays fixed. Insert Wires Use the Insert Wires tool to route single-wire connections. Use the Multiple Wire Bus tool, Component mode, to insert and route multiple wires in one tool. NOTE A wire connection point should only have up to 3 wire connections tied to it.
Insert connectors Use this tool to insert a parametrically generated connector symbols. 1 Click the Insert Connector tool. 2 In the Insert connector dialog box, specify the pin spacing and pin count. (Optional) For pin count, click Pick and draw a fence showing the length of the appropriate connector. 3 Specify whether to build the connector using fixed pin spacing or to have it compress or expand to match the pins up with underlying wire crossings.
drawing. Reverse connector using the Tab key Prior to committing the connector outline to the drawing, you can press Tab to reverse the connector either about its long axis or end for end. If the connector is vertical, a series of TAB keystrokes cycles the image through these 4 orientations: Start point TAB 1 TAB 2 TAB 3 Rotate connector using the V key Press "V" at the command prompt to switch between vertical and horizontal orientations.
the wires so the connector stretches to align each pin with the underlying wire spacing. The connector stretches only to meet the underlying spacing when the first pin lands on a wire. If the size of the connector exceeds the total number of wires underlying the connector, the remaining pins follow the specified fixed spacing value. Rotate connectors Use this tool to rotate the connector about its insertion point in 90-degree increments.
NOTE This command differs from the standard ROTATE command in that it renames the wire connection attributes to maintain full compatibility with the Insert Wire command, and it can hold the terminal pin text and tag-ID attributes in their current orientation. 1 Click the arrow on the Insert Connector tool to access the Rotate Connector tool. 2 Click the Rotate Connector tool. 3 Specify whether to hold the current attribute orientation.
Example: Hold attribute orientation = no Original First Rotate Second Rotate Third Rotate Reverse connectors Use this tool to reverse the orientation of the connector about its horizontal or vertical axis.
the reverse side of the connector and you will have to resolve wiring using the wire editing tools. 1 Click the arrow on the Insert Connector tool to access the Reverse Connector tool. 2 Click the Reverse Connector tool. 3 Select the connector to reverse. The connector automatically reverses depending on its original orientation.
that fell beyond the connector shell. You identify which end of the connector is to be altered and the measurement of displacement. 1 Click the arrow on the Insert Connector tool to access the Stretch Connector tool. 2 Click the Stretch Connector tool. 3 Specify the end of the connector to stretch. 4 Specify where you want the connector to end (second point of displacement). Either drag your mouse to the appropriate location or enter coordinates.
Split connector Use this tool to split the parametric connector into 2 separate block definitions (for example, parent and a child or a child and another child). 1 Click the arrow on the Insert Connector tool to access the Split Connector tool. 2 Click the Split Connector tool. 3 Select the connector block to split. 4 Specify the split point (i.e. pick between two sets of pins). 5 (Optional) Define the origin point for the new block.
Once the connector is inserted onto the drawing you can edit the connector pins found inside of the connector shell. You may need to make room for the insertion of new pins by either stretching the connector shell (Stretch Connector), moving existing pins (Move Connector Pin), or scooting wires with attached pins (Scoot) to make room for your new pins. 1 Click the arrow on the Insert Connector tool to access the Add Connector Pins tool. 2 Click the Add Connector Pins tool. 3 Select the connector.
■ Pins can be added between the original pins; pins can then be moved or scooted to accommodate spacing. ■ Pins can be lined up with a pin on another connector. After selecting the Add Connector Pins tool, select the connector to add the pin to, press Shift + right-click to display the Object Snaps options, select Insert and click the pin to align the new pin to. The new pin is inserted onto the selected component and is lined up with the pin on the other connector.
pin to be re-inserted later on this connector or on a related child of this connector. 1 Click the arrow on the Insert Connector tool to access the Delete Connector Pins tool. 2 Click the Delete Connector Pins tool. 3 Pick the pins to delete from the connectors. The pin number attribute on the connector block disappears. This attribute along with associated wire connection and description attributes are not immediately removed from the connector. They are renamed so that they are effectively ignored.
NOTE You cannot swap a combination connector with a single plug or receptacle connector. Additionally, you cannot use this tool to swap pins from one side of a connector to the other. 1 Click the arrow on the Insert Connector tool to access the Swap Connector Pins tool. 2 Click the Swap Connector Pins tool. 3 Select the connector pin to swap. Temporary graphics are drawn around the selected pin number indicating that it has been included in the "swap" list.
Edit connector pin numbers Once the connector is inserted onto the drawing file's block definition, you can edit the connector pins found inside of the connector. Use the Connector Pin Numbers in Use dialog box to edit the pins defined on the parametric connector. Connector symbols have attributes to define Installation and Location codes, manufacturing data, component tagging and descriptions, and pin assignments. 1 Click the Edit Component tool. 2 Select the connector.
Layout Determines the overall appearance of the parametric connector, including pin spacing and pin count. Pin Spacing Specifies the distance between the pin wire connections. This value initially defaults to the Rung Spacing defined Drawing Properties ➤ Drawing Format ➤ Ladder Defaults - Spacing setting for the drawing file. Pin Count Specifies the number of pins associated with the connector. This is required to parametrically build the connector.
set to 8 generates a connector with pins labeled "1" through "8." On the other hand, a pin list entry of "1,2,3,4,A,B,C,GND" generates an 8-pin connector with pins labeled "1", "2", "3", "4", "A", "B", "C", "GND." If the Pin List edit box is left blank, the connector numbering starts at 1 and continues up through the Pin Count value. If you define more pin list data than pin count, the pins are used in the order they are defined. The entire list is saved on the connector as PINLIST xdata.
NOTE This insert of a continued, broken connector must be done during the current AutoCAD Electrical session. ■ Cancel Custom: Inserts the remaining pins into the connector without any further prompts. Start Connector As Child Defines the new connector block definition as a child of a parent connector. This means that after it is created it needs to be linked to a parent connector through a common tagID value (select Edit Component and link to parent using any of the normal methods).
Type Determines the type of connector to be built as to whether it includes the plug/receptacle combination or if it will display either the plug side or the receptacle side. Plug/Receptacle Combination Creates the connector as a single block file showing both the plug and receptacle. Wire Number Change Sets the property of the connector symbol to change the wire number through a plug/receptacle connector symbol. By default, the wire numbers are maintained through a plug/receptacle connector.
Options include vertical with the plug to the left, vertical with the plug to the right, horizontal with the plug to the bottom, or horizontal with the plug to the top. Pins Specifies which pin numbers are visible or hidden on the connector. In the case of a plug/receptacle combination, options include showing both sides, showing the plug only, showing the receptacle only, or hiding both.
Insert Inserts the connector symbol on the drawing. If a pin count was not defined, an error message appears indicating that you must define a pin count before proceeding. A preview outline of the connector displays for placement on the drawing. It shows angled corners for the plug side of the connector. An 'x' indicates the insertion point of the connector.
At Wire Crossings Modifies the connector to have the pins coincide with underlying wires. The connector stretches or compresses to match up with underlying wires as it inserts on to the drawing. If the connector has more pins than underlying wires, the excess pins are added at the end of the connector using the default fixed spacing value.
■ Cancel Custom: Inserts the remaining pins into the connector without any further prompts. Connector pin numbers in use Lists all of the pins previously used in the project and the available pins that can be assigned to a connector. The connector tag and pin count displays below the title bar in the dialog box. Access: Click the Edit Component tool. Select the connector to edit. In the Insert/Edit Component dialog box, Pins section, click List. From the Components menu, select Edit Component.
Description Displays the terminal descriptions that are associated to the wire connection point. The first Description column displays the description for the plug; the second displays the description for the receptacle. Receptacle Displays the receptacle pin number. The value changes automatically if you edit it in the Pin Numbers section of the dialog box.
NOTE This tool terminates if the bend attempts to connect two different wire networks or if the bend bypasses more than a single right-angle turn. 1 Click the arrow on the Insert Wires tool to access the Bend Wire tool. 2 Click the Bend Wire tool. 3 Select one of the two wires that make up a right-angle turn. 4 Select the opposing wire that makes up the right-angle turn. The additional wire segments are added based on the rightangle direction. 5 Right-click to exit the command.
■ Starting in empty space: Select the starting direction (Horizontal or Vertical), select the number of wires (using the buttons or type in the edit box), and click OK. Specify the starting point in space for the first wire of the new bus. During wire insertion, the current wire type displays at the command prompt. If starting at a component or in empty space, you can override this by typing in the hotkey "T" and selecting a new wire type from the Set/Edit Wire Type dialog box.
Import data from Autodesk Inventor Professional Cable & Harness From the XML export from Autodesk Inventor Professional (AIP) into AutoCAD Electrical, you can select from a list of connectors defined in the export, and then place the connectors onto a 2D drawing file. After the connectors are inserted onto the drawing, click Wire on the Connector Selection dialog box to place all wire connections to all components on the drawing file.
Autodesk Inventor Professional properties mapped to AutoCAD Electrical attributes There are 4 Autodesk Inventor Professional assembly entity types that get general and custom properties: component occurrences, Wire (From/To) occurrences, cable occurrences, and splice occurrences.
Various user-defined * Definition, Custom Defined in the wire library definition (part editing) - Xdata in AutoCAD Electrical Various user defined * Occurrence, Custom Defined in the harness occurrence level - Xdata in AutoCAD Electrical Cable ID Occurrence Unique cable ID - TAG 1 attribute in AutoCAD Electrical Cable Definition Definition Cable library definition data saved in Cable & Harness library XML - Xdata in AutoCAD Electrical Cable Wire Name Definition Cable conductor ID - RATING1 att
Various user-defined * Occurrence, Custom Defined in the harness occurrence level - Xdata in AutoCAD Electrical * Properties that are not defined in Autodesk Inventor Professional but are still usable in AutoCAD Electrical. Import connector wire lists Use the Insert Connector from List tool to import a connector wire list from another application, such as Autodesk Inventor Professional Cable & Harness.
5 Click the arrow on the Insert Connector tool to access the Insert Connector from List tool. 6 Click the Insert Connector from List tool. 7 In the Connector List File Selection dialog box, select a connector list file to import into AutoCAD Electrical and click Open. 8 In the Connector Selection dialog box, define the connectors to be inserted onto the drawing. An 'x' in the Placed column indicates if the connector is placed or was previously placed into the project.
NOTE You can place the connectors on the drawing and add wires at a later time. To do so, follow steps 1 - 9. When you want to add wires, open the Connector Selection dialog box, and click Wire It. Connector selection From the XML export from Autodesk Inventor Professional into AutoCAD Electrical, you can select from a list of connectors defined in the export, and then place the connectors onto a 2D drawing file. Access: On the Insert Connector toolbar, click the Insert Connectors from List tool.
Tag Displays the connector's reference designation (RefDes) from the Autodesk Inventor Professional (AIP) assembly or tags found in the XML import file. Total Pins Displays the total pin count for the tag. Wired Pins Displays the number of pins wired inside of the AIP assembly found in the import file. Description Displays the occurrence name of the part defined in the AIP browser. The occurrence name is typically the part number of the component, however you can overwrite the name.
At Wire Crossings Modifies the connector to have the pins meet the underlying wires. AutoCAD Electrical searches the wires and stretches the connector before adding the block definition to the drawing If there are more pins associated to the connector than there are wires, AutoCAD Electrical finds the wires first, then continues the connector definition at the fixed spacing Wired Pins Creates the connector using the number of pins wired in the AIP assembly and found in the import file.
Orientation Quickly change the connectors orientation prior to placing it into the drawing file. This orientation change also modifies the preview to reflect the selection. Rotate Switches the orientation of the parametric connector insertion between horizontal and vertical. Flip Flips the connector insertion about its long axis. Type Determines the overall style of the connector. Plug/Receptacle Combination Creates the connector as one AutoCAD Electrical block file with both the plug and receptacle.
will be displayed, whether the connector goes in vertically or horizontally, and whether the pins are visible. Connector Specifies whether the connector comes into the drawing vertically or horizontally relative to other connectors and the drawing border. Plug Specifies which direction the plug portion of the connector comes in relative to the overall plug/receptacle parametric build. The plug representation is displayed with rounded corners.
When the connector is built, the plug side wire connection attribute is moved from the insertion point on the divider line to the outside line representing the plug. The associated terminal pin attribute (TERM01_) travels half the distance as the wire connection attribute placing itself in the middle between the dimension on the divider line. Top Specifies the distance from the top or breaking point of the connector to the first or next wire connection point.
end of the wire is placed on the drawing and the Wire It command is run again. ■ When neither connection for a wire are on the active drawing, the wiring command is ignored until you add the connectors into the drawing file.
NOTE The structure of this file does not apply to an XML import.
18 ASM2 Assembly code for CMP2 Text 19 WIRENO Wire number (may be blank) Text 20 WIRELAY Wire layer name Text 21 CBLINST Cable Installation Code Text 22 CBLLOC Cable Location Code Text 23 CBL Cable tag name Text 24 CBLWCLR Cable wire (conductor) color Text 25 CBLCAT Cable catalog item Text 26 CBLMFG Cable catalog manufacturer Text 27 CBLASM Cable assembly code Text The MDB file must contain a table with the abovementioned 27 columns.
2 Define cable tags and conductor IDs and their connections in the assembly file. 3 Select the harness ID in the model browser and select Export Harness Data from the Cable and Harness panel. You are prompted to select a file name and location for the export of harness component and wiring data. An XML file is created for import into AutoCAD Electrical. 4 In AutoCAD Electrical, create a new drawing file.
5 Click the arrow on the Insert Connector tool to access the Insert Connector from List tool. 6 Click the Insert Connector from List tool. 7 In the Connector List File Selection dialog box, select a connector list file to import into AutoCAD Electrical and click Open. 8 In the Connector Selection dialog box, define the connectors to be inserted onto the drawing. An 'x' in the Placed column indicates if the connector is placed or was previously placed into the project.
NOTE You can place the connectors on the drawing and add wires at a later time. To do so, follow steps 1 - 9. When you want to add wires, open the Connector Selection dialog box, and click Wire It. Connector selection From the XML export from Autodesk Inventor Professional into AutoCAD Electrical, you can select from a list of connectors defined in the export, and then place the connectors onto a 2D drawing file. Access: On the Insert Connector toolbar, click the Insert Connectors from List tool.
Tag Displays the connector's reference designation (RefDes) from the Autodesk Inventor Professional (AIP) assembly or tags found in the XML import file. Total Pins Displays the total pin count for the tag. Wired Pins Displays the number of pins wired inside of the AIP assembly found in the import file. Description Displays the occurrence name of the part defined in the AIP browser. The occurrence name is typically the part number of the component, however you can overwrite the name.
At Wire Crossings Modifies the connector to have the pins meet the underlying wires. AutoCAD Electrical searches the wires and stretches the connector before adding the block definition to the drawing If there are more pins associated to the connector than there are wires, AutoCAD Electrical finds the wires first, then continues the connector definition at the fixed spacing Wired Pins Creates the connector using the number of pins wired in the AIP assembly and found in the import file.
Orientation Quickly change the connectors orientation prior to placing it into the drawing file. This orientation change also modifies the preview to reflect the selection. Rotate Switches the orientation of the parametric connector insertion between horizontal and vertical. Flip Flips the connector insertion about its long axis. Type Determines the overall style of the connector. Plug/Receptacle Combination Creates the connector as one AutoCAD Electrical block file with both the plug and receptacle.
will be displayed, whether the connector goes in vertically or horizontally, and whether the pins are visible. Connector Specifies whether the connector comes into the drawing vertically or horizontally relative to other connectors and the drawing border. Plug Specifies which direction the plug portion of the connector comes in relative to the overall plug/receptacle parametric build. The plug representation is displayed with rounded corners.
When the connector is built, the plug side wire connection attribute is moved from the insertion point on the divider line to the outside line representing the plug. The associated terminal pin attribute (TERM01_) travels half the distance as the wire connection attribute placing itself in the middle between the dimension on the divider line. Top Specifies the distance from the top or breaking point of the connector to the first or next wire connection point.
end of the wire is placed on the drawing and the Wire It command is run again. ■ When neither connection for a wire are on the active drawing, the wiring command is ignored until you add the connectors into the drawing file.
Insert splices The splice symbol is an in-line connection symbol allowing one or more wires to connect at each end. The default splice symbol is set up to trigger a wire number change through the symbol. 1 Click the arrow on the Insert Connector tool to access the Insert Splice tool. 2 Click the Insert Splice tool. The Splice Symbols dialog box displays.
686
11 Project-Wide Tools In this chapter ■ Move from reference to reference ■ Move between drawings ■ Plot one or more drawings ■ Create a project-wide script file ■ Project-wide update or retag ■ Track drawing changes ■ Translate description text ■ Publish to the web ■ Title Block Utility 687
Move from reference to reference Use the Surfer tool to move from reference to reference across the project drawing set. A new window opens and the original window closes when Surf is selected unless you hold the Shift key while running the command.
Start the Surfer 1 Click the Surfer tool. 2 Select a component tag, catalog number, or wire number on the current drawing, or press Enter to use the Type it to Surf it dialog box to enter the component tag, catalog number, or wire number. NOTE You can also select a report table cell containing any of these to surf on. If the selected cell does not contain any of the surf-able fields, AutoCAD Electrical looks in the selected row for a surf-able field.
5 Click Close. Continue a previous surf session At any time, a previous surf session can be continued from the point where it left off. 1 Click the Continue Surfer tool. From the Projects menu, select Project > Continue Surfer. All references relating to the component, including panel layout and panel nameplate references, are displayed in the Surf dialog box. 2 Double-click any reference listed in the Surf dialog box to zoom in on the selected reference.
Catalog or Wire Number cell) the Tagstrip value is surfed for the terminal strip. Access: Click the Surfer tool on the Main toolbar. From the Projects menu, select Project ➤ Surfer. NOTE Your dialog box may differ depending on whether you're moving from reference to reference across the project drawing set or looking for problems related to wire signal source or destination codes.
Zoom In Increases the apparent magnification of the drawing area. The zoom factor is related to the smaller of the active drawing’s default dimension text size (DIMTXT) and text size (TEXTSIZE). The smaller this value is, the closer the zoom is on the reference. Delete Delete the instance that is currently displayed. NOTE Child and other related devices will not be deleted. Pick New List Changes the component terminal or signal reference you want to surf.
Move between drawings Use Next and Previous to move among the drawings inside of the active project.
Next or Previous are selected unless you hold the Shift key while running the commands. 1 Open a drawing file from the active project. 2 Click Next or Previous on the Main Electrical toolbar to move to another drawing file within the project. 3 Continue moving among the drawings until the file you are looking for is opened. 4 Select Window ➤ {drawing file name} to close the drawing after you make any modifications.
device is connected, and various device specific settings. ■ Use layout tab's default: Click to use the default plotter configuration. 6 Click Detailed Plot Configuration mode to turn on or turn off the options set within the Detailed Plot Configuration Option dialog box. 7 Click ON or OFF. 8 Select the order in which the plot will be out: ■ OK: Output plots in the selected order. ■ OK-Reverse: Output plots in the reverse order. 9 Click OK to save any open drawings. 10 Click OK Project.
Run a post-plot command script file Run an optional script file containing a list of commands to execute AFTER the plot command is issued. The default script file name is postplot.scr, located in AutoCAD Electrical user subdirectory. NOTE Changes to drawings are not saved during the plotting process. Additionally, the plot time and date stamp text is discarded after the plot is complete. To preserve changes made during the plotting process, add the QSAVE command into the pre- or post-plot script file.
Order OK Outputs plots in the selected order OK-Reverse Outputs plots in the reverse order. Create a project-wide script file An AutoCAD script file can be run against one or more drawings in the current project. For example, to ensure all drawings are set to model space and zoomed extents: 1 Create an ASCII text script file called model_ext.scr. 2 Add the following AutoCAD commands and AutoLISP functions: (setvar "TILEMODE" 0) ZOOM EXT (load "c:\\myprograms\\chktitle.
Access: Click the arrow on the Project Manager tool to access the Project-Wide Update/Retag tool. From the Projects menu, select Project-Wide Update/Retag. Component Retag Retag all nonfixed components. NOTE If Ladder References Resequence selected, the component retag process is performed after the ladder resequencing is complete. Component Cross-Reference Update Updates the cross-referencing for components on selected drawings.
2 For all subsequent drawings: ■ Select to use the next sequential reference. ■ Select Skip, drawing to drawing count to enter an amount to skip for the next drawing's first ladder reference. Bump Up or Down Moves ladder references up if drawings have been added to the middle of a project or moves ladder references down if drawings have been removed from the project. NOTE Enter a negative number to move ladder references down.
Track drawing changes The Mark/Verify tool can help you track changes made to a project drawing set during any phase in the engineering process. Before you send your drawings out for review, use the Mark option. Each AutoCAD Electrical component, wire number, and beginning ladder reference is invisibly marked and referenced in a table in the current project's scratch database file. When the drawings are returned, you can use the Verify option to generate a report of changes.
Track changes made to a drawing set Use this tool to insert comments in your drawings before sending them for review. Once the drawings are returned to you, run this tool again to see any changes that were made to the drawing set. 1 Click the arrow on the Project Manager tool to access the Mark/Verify Drawings tool. 2 Click the Mark/Verify Drawings tool. 3 Specify to mark either the project or the current drawing. 4 Specify to mark AutoCAD Electrical components.
10 Specify to display the data in the AutoCAD Electrical report format, save the report, or print the changes. You can also select to surf through the list to examine each detected change in context. Mark and verify This tool places an invisible mark on each component before sending the drawings to a client. When the drawings are returned, a list is generated that includes any components or wire numbers that have been modified, edited, or copied.
Current drawing statistics Displays any mark data found on the drawing. Translate description text Use this to convert description or switch position component text from one language to another. When AutoCAD Electrical finishes it displays a report listing what was successfully translated and what was not. You can use this report to surf to the problem areas (where a phrase could not be translated) and make manual edits one by one.
Translates component description text from one language to another. Description text and switch position text is processed on schematic and panel components. Access: Click the arrow on the Project Manager tool to access the Language Conversion tool. From the Projects menu, select Language Conversion ➤ Language Conversion. Run language swap on Performs language translation on the entire project, the active drawing, selected drawings, or on selected objects in the drawing.
Add a Language Adds a new column to the database with a blank entry for each existing phrase associated with the new language name. Delete Language Deletes a language from the predefined language table. Phrase list in selected language Displays a phrase list for the selected language. New phrase Adds a blank entry to the end of each language list and the translations for phrase list at the bottom of the dialog box.
■ JPEG: Joint Photographics Experts Group files are raster-based. This format is not recommended for large files that contain text. ■ PNG: Portable Network Graphics files are raster-based like JPEG images, but PNG provides a higher quality output. 4 Click OK. 5 Select one or more drawing to publish to the web. ■ Do All: Selects all drawings from the project drawing list to be copied to the new project. ■ Process: Selects one or more drawings from the project drawing list to be copied to the new project.
Creates a Web page of selected drawings in the current project. The Web pages and associated support files are saved in the specified folder, enabling preview and testing prior to posting to the Web. If the folder does not exist, one is created. Access: On the Project Manager, click the arrow on the Publish/Plot tool, and select Publish to Web. From the Projects menu, select Publish to Web. DWF Design Web format files are vector-based representations of drawing (.DWG) files.
Title Text Creates the text that appears below the banner. The default is the current project's first four project description LINEx values. Layout to output Creates the drawing images using the AutoCAD Plot to DWF function. The plot mode can be Model, Layout1, or As Saved. Configuration name Uses the plot configuration file for generating the .DWF drawing images. NOTE To override, set WD_DWF_PC3 in the wd.env environment settings file.
If not found, AutoCAD Electrical then looks for DEFAULT.WDT (if not found, AutoCAD Electrical aborts the command). Title block attributes When you instruct AutoCAD Electrical to do a project-wide title block update, AutoCAD Electrical reads this attribute mapping file. Attributes on title block are mapped to AutoCAD Electrical project data lines and several AutoCAD Electrical settings values.
IEC_L drawing's location value PLOTTIME current time (24hr military format) PLOTTIME12 current time (12hr am/pm format) PLOTDATE current date (MM:DD:YYYY format) PLOTDATEMMDDYY current date (MM:DD:YY format) PLOTDATEYYMMDD current date (YY:MM:DD format) PLOTDATEYYYYMMDD current date (YYYY:MM:DD format) Example: your title block has attributes SH for the sheet number and DSTAMP for a plot date stamp and TSTAMP for a plot time stamp value.
into the block name that AutoCAD Electrical searches for. For example, the following line encoded in the ".wdt" file triggers AutoCAD Electrical to look for and update not only a block called "TB" but also two other blocks. BLOCK = TB,TB-REV,TB-ISSUE You can also use wild-cards to define title blocks. Your drawing could have any of 3 different title block sizes, perhaps named TITLE-SIZEB, TITLE-SIZEC, or TITLE-SIZED. The following line encoded in the ".
Update the title block project-wide 1 Click the Project Manager tool. 2 In the Project Manager, right-click the project name, and select Descriptions. A list of the current values for the project-wide LINEx values displays. 3 Change values for the title, job number, date, scale, or other description attributes. 4 Click OK. 5 In the Project Manager, right-click the project name, and select Title Block Update. The Update Title Block dialog box displays.
Automates updating title block information for the current drawing or the entire project drawing set. Project and drawing specific settings are linked to one or more attributes contained in the title block. This tool assumes that you have a border with mapped attributes using the .wdt file or a mapping attribute file (WD_TB) inside of the border. This specifies which attribute on the border should be updated with text from the Update Title Block dialog box.
LINE8 Checked By LINE9 Scale Select Lines to Update (these are per-drawing values) Lists drawing-specific values. Drawing Description The drawing descriptions in the project. Up to 3 drawing descriptions can be added to a drawing. The drawing description codes DD1(or DWGDESC), DD2 and DD3 are used for the 3 description lines. Drawing Section The drawing sections in the project. Drawing Sub-section The drawing subsections in the project. Filename The file name without an extension.
Resequence sheet %S values Renumbers the sheet number for each drawing in the project set or for a selected portion of the project drawing set. Activate each drawing to process Specifies to activate every drawing so you can update the title block lines on selected drawings in the project. OK Active Drawing Only Updates the text for the selected lines on the active drawing only. OK Project-wide Updates the text for the selected lines on the selected drawings in the project.
DEFAULT.WDT Create a default mapping file in the project's subdirectory that is referenced if a project-specific file is not found and if a WD_TB attribute is not present in the title block. DEFAULT.WDT Create a default mapping file in the default AutoCAD Electrical subdirectory that is referenced if a project-specific file is not found and if a WD_TB attribute is not present in the title block.
Add New Adds new title blocks to the project. Enter a block name. For multiple blocks, separate with a comma. For example, DEMOTBLK,DEMOTBLK2,DEMOTBLK3 Edit Edits the selected title block. Remove Removes the selected title block. Pick on Selects an attribute directly on the drawing if you do not know the name of attribute. Attribute Specifies the attribute to use for the drawing, project, or plotting value. Select an attribute from the list.
(getvar LOGINNAME) to attribute DWGBY, or you can assign YourName to DWGBY. Update list Adds the text constant or AutoLISP expression to the user-defined list. Link information to the title block You can link some AutoCAD Electrical project description data entries and some of the AutoCAD Electrical drawing values to the attributes that appear in the drawing title blocks. There are 2 methods to do this: using an attribute mapping file and mapping information embedded on the title block.
Electrical project data or drawing specific data that AutoCAD Electrical should copy to that attribute. The PLOTTIME and PLOTDATE entries also appear in this file but they are used only by the AutoCAD Electrical batch plotting routine. You can include other non-AutoCAD Electrical-mapped attributes as well in this mapping file. For example, the line DRAWN_BY = "Joe Doe" This triggers AutoCAD Electrical to look for an attribute named "DRAWN_BY" and, if found, insert a value of "Joe Doe.
Customize LINEx labels The generic LINEx labels that display in the various title block and project description dialog boxes can be customized to match the field names in your title block. 1 Create a file called either projname_wdtitle.wdl or default_wdtitle.wdl in the project subdirectory. Use any generic text editor like Notepad or Wordpad. 2 The file should contain one line per label in the format LINEx=label. The entries do not have to be in order and line numbers may be skipped.
5 If WD_SUP_ALT is defined in the wd.env file, look for DEFAULT_WDTITLE.WDL in the specified path 6 Look for DEFAULT_WDTITLE.WDL in base AutoCAD Electrical directory 7 Look for DEFAULT_WDTITLE.WDL in ACAD paths (if WD_ACADPATHFIRST flag isn't set in wd.env) Map a title block Create a mapping for the title block. 1 From the Projects menu, select Title Block Setup. 2 Select the title block link method: ■ Method 1: Text mapping file with .WDT extension.
The link between AutoCAD Electrical and the title block is defined by either an external text file (.wdt) or by an invisible WD_TB attribute added to your existing title block. If the WDT method is used, you can use a project-specific file or the Default.wdt file. In either case, the title block attribute names are mapped to the project-wide LINEx values and to several drawing-specific setting values. Access: From the Projects menu, select Title Block Setup. Method 1 Project.
Title block setup Defines attribute mappings. The lines that follow the title block name list the attribute names on that block and what pieces of AutoCAD Electrical project data or drawing specific data that AutoCAD Electrical should copy to that attribute. Access: From the Project menu, select Title Block Setup. Specify the title block link method, enter a block name, and click OK. Title block name Lists the available title block names. Add New Adds new title blocks to the project. Enter a block name.
Assigns text constants and AutoLISP expressions to a title block attribute. Access: From the Project menu, select Title Block Setup. Specify the title block link method, enter a block name, and click OK. Click User Defined on the Title Block Setup dialog box. Current User-Defined Assignments Lists the attributes and assigned text constant or AutoLISP expression. Attributes Modify an existing link by selecting it from the attribute list. To clear an existing link, select -none- from the attribute list.
the attribute that is mapped to LINE12 (mapped in the .wdt file or on the WD_TB attribute value carried by the title block). NOTE If the expression is a full AutoLISP function, it must return a string value (not an integer, real, list, or nil value). The program must be encoded into the project description data as "(load 'filename.lsp')." It must be self-starting upon load. Setup title block update Automates updating title block information for the active drawing or the entire project drawing set.
Method 2 The title block contains an invisible attribute with a value that defines the mapping between the title block and AutoCAD Electrical. No external WDT file is required because the mapping information is self-contained on the title block. The attribute name = WD_CODE mapping information is encoded on the WD_TB attribute on the title block of the drawing. The attribute's value gives the mapping information in the format of a semi-colon delimited text string.
Attribute Specifies the attribute to use for the drawing, project, or plotting value. Select an attribute from the list. Project Values / Drawing Values / Plotting Values Displays the project, drawing-specific and plotting values. User Defined Maps attributes to text constants or AutoLISP values. Title block setup (user-defined) Assigns text constants and AutoLISP expressions to a title block attribute. Access: From the Project menu, select Title Block Setup.
728
12 Icon Menus In this chapter ■ Overview of the Icon Menu Wizard ■ Use alternate icon menus ■ Modify Icon Menu File Directly 729
Overview of the Icon Menu Wizard Use the Icon Menu Wizard to easily customize the icon menus. You can copy, cut, and paste icons from one submenu into another, drag icons within the Symbol Preview window to place those that are commonly used at the top and those that are used less frequently at the bottom of the window, and create new icons to use when inserting components.
AutoCAD Electrical icon menu, and then populate them with your own custom symbols. Each new page can have icon selections that cascade down to other new menu pages. Use this dialog box to add an icon that is then used for inserting components or circuits onto the drawing, running an AutoCAD Electrical command, or opening a submenu page to the icon menu. You can also change the properties of existing icons.
Add a new icon to the menu 1 Create your new AutoCAD Electrical compatible library symbol. For schematic symbols, follow the guidelines regarding the symbol ".dwg" file naming convention and required attributes. 2 Click the arrow on the Miscellaneous tool to access the Icon Menu Wizard tool. 3 Click the Icon Menu Wizard tool. 4 On the Select Menu File dialog box, select the menu file (.dat) to modify and click OK. 5 On the Icon Menu Wizard dialog box, select Add ➤ Component to add a new icon to the menu.
The icon options to define differ depending on which type of icon you are adding to the menu file (.dat). 7 Click OK. The new icon displays at the bottom of the Symbol Preview window. 8 On the Icon Menu Wizard dialog box, click OK. 9 Click Components ➤ Insert Component. On the Insert Component dialog box, select the new icon. Edit the properties of an existing icon in the menu 1 Create your new AutoCAD Electrical compatible library symbol.
7 Click OK. Icon menu wizard Use this to modify the icon menu. You can rearrange icons using drag and drop in the Symbol Preview window, add icons, create new submenus, delete icons, cut/copy/paste icons, and modify icon properties. Access: Click the arrow on the Miscellaneous tool to access the Icon Menu Wizard tool. Click Components ➤ Symbol Library ➤ Icon Menu Wizard. NOTE You can lock the icon menu (.
NOTE Whn you move the cursor over an icon, the icon name and block/circuit/command name display as tooltip information. Right-click menus Options for the Menu tree structure view Right-click a menu or submenu in the Menu tree structure view to display the following options: ■ Expand/Collapse: Toggles the visibility of the menus. ■ New submenu: Creates a new submenu in the tree structure and the Symbol Preview window.
Right-click an icon or in empty space in the Symbol Preview window to display the following options: ■ View: Changes the view display for the Symbol Preview window. The current view option is indicated with a check mark. Options include: Icon with text, Icon only or List view. ■ Add icon: Adds new icons (component, command, or circuit) or adds an existing circuit into the Symbol Preview window. ■ New submenu: Creates a new submenu in the Symbol Preview window and the tree structure.
TIP To determine which *.dat file is active, in the Project Properties dialog box, Project Settings tab, Library and Icon Menu Paths section, expand the Schematic Icon Menu File option. This is the schematic icon menu file listed in the *.wdp file. Icon Details Defines the icon name and image. Preview Displays an image preview of the specified image file. Name Specifies the name to appear in the icon, the description text and the tool tip for the icon.
NOTE The image file name cannot contain invalid characters such as \ / : " ? < > | and only .png and .sld image files are supported. Create PNG from current screen image Creates the .png image file from the current screen image. If the specified image file does not exist, this option is selected by default. If you do not want to create the icon from the current drawing's displayed image, deselect the check box.
Block Name to Insert Defines the symbol block that is inserted when you click the icon in the Insert Component dialog box. Block Name Specifies the symbol block name. The symbol's file name can be typed into the edit box or you can enter it using one of the following methods: ■ Browse: Finds an existing WBlocked drawing (*.dwg) file to assign to the icon. In this case the complete path of the drawing file is inserted in the edit box.
You can also access this dialog box by right-clicking in the Symbol Preview window of the Icon Menu Wizard dialog box and selecting Add Icon ➤ Command. TIP To determine which *.dat file is active, in the Project Properties dialog box, Project Settings tab, Library and Icon Menu Paths section, expand the Schematic Icon Menu File option. This is the schematic icon menu file listed in the *.wdp file. Icon Details Defines the icon name and image. Preview Displays an image preview of the specified image file.
Create PNG from current screen image Creates the .png image file from the current screen image. If the specified image file does not exist, this option is selected by default. If you do not want to create the icon from the current drawing's displayed image, deselect the check box. NOTE This option is unavailable if you enter an image file name with the syntax {slide_library or dll file (slide or .png)}” For example, “S2(pb)” or “S7(control_relay)”.
box. The icon then displays at the end of the existing icon images in the Symbol Preview window of the Insert Component dialog box. Access: Click the arrow on the Miscellaneous tool to access the Icon Menu Wizard tool. Select the menu file to modify and click OK. In the Icon Menu Wizard dialog box click Add, and then select New Circuit. Click Components ➤ Symbol Library ➤ Icon Menu Wizard. Select the menu file to modify and click OK. On the Icon Menu Wizard dialog box click Add, and then select New Circuit.
if the active drawing name is “demo005,” then the image file edit box has “demo005” listed as the file name. The browsed image is copied to the User folder if wd_userckt_dir is disabled in the .env file. NOTE The User folder can be overridden by the wd_userckt_dir defined folder if the environment code is enabled in the .env file.
Location (This appears once the Image file is specified) Indicates the full path of the image file location where the new images are created or the browsed images are copied to. If you entered a file name with the syntax {slide_library or dll file (slide or .png)} for the image file, the path of the .dat file or the WD_SLB folder displays here. Circuit Drawing File Defines the circuit file name that is created. File Name Specifies the file name for the circuit. Enter a drawing file name to use.
TIP To determine which *.dat file is active, in the Project Properties dialog box, Project Settings tab, Library and Icon Menu Paths section, expand the Schematic Icon Menu File option. This is the schematic icon menu file listed in the *.wdp file. Icon Details Defines the icon name and image. Preview Displays an image preview of the specified image file. Name Specifies the name to appear in the icon, the description text and the tool tip for the icon.
or it can follow the syntax {slide_library or dll file (slide or .png)}. For example, "S2(pb)" or "S7(control_relay)." NOTE The image file name cannot contain invalid characters such as \ / : " ? < > | and only .png and .sld image files are supported. Create PNG from current screen image Creates the .png image file from the current screen image. If the specified image file does not exist, this option is selected by default.
box. The icon then displays at the end of the existing icon images in the Symbol Preview window of the Insert Component dialog box. Access: Click the arrow on the Miscellaneous tool to access the Icon Menu Wizard tool. Select the menu file to modify and click OK. In the Icon Menu Wizard dialog box click Add, and then select New Submenu. From the Components menu, select Symbol Library ➤ Icon Menu Wizard. Select the menu file to modify and click OK.
The browsed image is copied to the Images folder and saved as a relative path in the .dat file. However, you can enclose the image path in quotation marks if you do not want the image copied to the Images folder and to save the complete path instead of the relative path in the .dat file. The entered image file name can be names like "PB1" or "CONTROL RELAY," file names with an extension such as “pb1.png,” or it can follow the syntax {slide_library or dll file (slide or .png)}.
Menu Title Specifies the submenu title that is used in the Insert Component dialog box. This is automatically specified but you can edit the title if desired. NOTE The submenu icon name and the menu title can be different. For example, the icon name is Cable Markers but the submenu title is Special Cable Markers. Properties - main menu Use this tool to modify the existing menu properties such as changing the menu name. Your changes overwrite the information in the .
Use this tool to modify the existing symbol icon properties such as changing the icon name, image or block name. Your changes overwrite the information in the .dat file. Access: Click the arrow on the Miscellaneous tool to access the Icon Menu Wizard tool. Select the menu file to modify and click OK. In the Icon Menu Wizard dialog box right-click on the component icon to modify and select Properties. From the Components menu, select Symbol Library ➤ Icon Menu Wizard.
“demo005,” then the image file edit box has “demo005” listed as the file name. The browsed image is copied to the Images folder and saved as a relative path in the .dat file. However, you can enclose the image path in quotation marks if you do not want the image copied to the Images folder and to save the complete path instead of the relative path in the .dat file. The entered image file name can be names like "PB1" or "CONTROL RELAY," file names with an extension such as “pb1.
copied to. If you entered a file name with the syntax {slide_library or dll file (slide or .png)} for the image file, the path of the .dat file or the WD_SLB folder displays here. Block Name to Insert Defines the symbol block that is inserted when you click the icon in the Insert Component dialog box. Block Name Specifies the symbol block name. The symbol's file name can be typed into the edit box or you can enter it using one of the following methods: ■ Browse: Finds an existing WBlocked drawing (*.
Icon Details Defines the icon name and image. Preview Displays an image preview of the specified image file. Name Specifies the name to appear in the icon, the description text and the tool tip for the icon. Image file Specifies the image file to use for the new icon. You can enter the image file name (or complete path) or select it using one of the following methods: ■ Browse: Finds an existing image to use for the icon. You can browse for .sld or .png images.
NOTE This option is unavailable if you enter an image file name with the syntax {slide_library or dll file (slide or .png)}” For example, “S2(pb)” or “S7(control_relay)”. It is also unavailable if the Image File edit box contains the image file path instead of the image file name. Zoom (Available only when Create PNG from current screen image is selected) Zooms in on the current screen image using AutoCAD Pan command.
Use this tool to modify the existing symbol icon properties such as changing the icon name, image or block name. Your changes overwrite the information in the .dat file. Access: Click the arrow on the Miscellaneous tool to access the Icon Menu Wizard tool. Select the menu file to modify and click OK. In the Icon Menu Wizard dialog box right-click on the circuit icon to modify and select Properties. From the Components menu, select Symbol Library ➤ Icon Menu Wizard.
If the circuit drawing file name contains the path of the drawing file referring to the User folder or the wd_userckt_dir defined folder, the browsed image is copied to the User folder if wd_userckt_dir is disabled in the .env file or the wd_userckt_dir defined folder if wd_userckt_dir is enabled in the .env file. If the file does not exist, the Create Circuit alert dialog box displays asking you if you want to create the circuit.
Location (This appears once the Image file is specified) Indicates the full path of the image file location where the new images are created or the browsed images are copied to. If you entered a file name with the syntax {slide_library or dll file (slide or .png)} for the image file, the path of the .dat file or the WD_SLB folder displays here. Circuit Drawing File Defines the circuit file name that is created. File Name Specifies the file name for the circuit. Enter a drawing file name to use.
Icon Details Defines the icon name and image. Preview Displays an image preview of the specified image file. Name Specifies the name to appear in the icon, the description text and the tool tip for the icon. Image file Specifies the image file to use for the new icon. You can enter the image file name (or complete path) or select it using one of the following methods: ■ Browse: Finds an existing image to use for the icon. You can browse for .sld or .png images.
NOTE This option is unavailable if you enter an image file name with the syntax {slide_library or dll file (slide or .png)}” For example, “S2(pb)” or “S7(control_relay)”. It is also unavailable if the Image File edit box contains the image file path instead of the image file name. Zoom (Available only when Create PNG from current screen image is selected) Zooms in on the current screen image using AutoCAD Pan command.
subdirectory. You can create alternate or project-specific icon menus and have AutoCAD Electrical automatically use them instead of these defaults. An icon menu can be tied to a project so that when the project is active, AutoCAD Electrical references that special icon menu instead of the AutoCAD Electrical normal menu. The alternate menu's full path and file name is saved in the project's .wdp file. You can save an alternate menu for schematic symbols and one for panel symbols.
is important to maintain the menu file structure, otherwise your menu may not activate properly. Here are the first few lines of the first page and a submenu (JIC: Push Buttons) of the ACE_JIC_MENU.DAT file. Refer to this in the following sections.
Push Buttons Description text of the icon. This is also the tooltip for the submenu page, command, or component to insert. In this example, clicking Push Buttons in the Insert Component dialog box opens a submenu. s2(s_pb) Image information with the syntax: slide_library_name(slide or .png). In this example the slide library (or resource dll library) is “s2” and the slide file (or .png image) is “s_pb.” NOTE If both s_pb.png and s_pb.sld exist, AutoCAD Electrical searches for the .png file first.
SPECIALSYMBOLS Explanation: **M101 Menu page number. User-created menu pages should begin at 100 since AutoCAD Electrical uses 1-99 for its own use. SPECIALSYMBOLS Menu page title Icon function - insert component Push Button N.O. Description text of the icon. This is also the tool tip for the component to insert. In this example, clicking Push Button N.O. in the Insert Component dialog box inserts the component in the drawing.
3 Pole Disconnect |s1(shds13)|$c=wd_3unit HDS11 3 Pole Disconnect Description text of the icon. This is also the tool tip for the command. In this example, clicking 3 Pole Disconnect in the Insert Component dialog box runs a command. s1(shds13) Image information with the syntax: slide_library_name(slide or .png). In this example the slide library (or resource dll library) is “s1” and the slide file (or .png image) is “shds13.” $C=wd_3unit Code that executes a command.
13 BOM and Catalogs In this chapter ■ Use catalog tables ■ Overview of the catalog database table structure ■ Use the merge utility ■ Catalog Assignment ■ Contact Quantity/Pin List Lookup 765
Use catalog tables Sample catalog information is furnished with the default AutoCAD Electrical installation. The information is held in tables in an Microsoft Access Database file (.mdb) which are populated with sample vendor data. You must expand and modify these tables to meet your specific BOM reporting needs. Use tools provided with AutoCAD Electrical or through the use of a database program that can read/write the Access file format. The .mdb file is a single file that is named _cat.
If your symbol does not carry the WDBLKNAM attribute: 1 The symbol is checked for the WDBLKNAM attribute (or Xdata). It is not found. 2 The block name is read (“HCR1_MC_PWR”) minus its first character (the orientation character “H” or “V”). The default_cat.mdb file is searched for a table named “CR1_MC_PWR.” 3 If this table exists, it is used.
5 If this table exists, it is used. If it does not exist, a MISC_CAT table is looked for if the active project’s properties are set up to use this catch-all table. 6 If all of these items fail, AutoCAD Electrical stops looking (if running a report) or prompts you to add a table to the default_cat.mdb file (if you are inserting or editing a component).
Family Code/Table Name Description _TERMPROPS Default terminal properties data table. AutoCAD Electrical also contains manufacturer-specific terminal properties tables that have the same format as the _TERMPROPS table. The naming convention for manufacturer-specific tables is: _TERMPROPS_AB or _TERMPROPS_AROMAT. AutoCAD Electrical first searches manufacturer-specific tables; if not found, it then searches the default _TERMPROPS table. See Edit terminal properties database.
Family Code/Table Name Description LT Lights, pilot lights MISC Miscellaneous MO Motors MS Motor starters/contactors NP Nameplates OL Overloads PB Push buttons PE Photo switches PLCIO Programmable logic controllers PM Power meters PS Pressure switches PW Power supplies PX Proximity switches RE Resistors SS Selector switches SU Surge suppressors SW Toggle switches 770 | Chapter 13 BOM and Catalogs
Family Code/Table Name Description TD Timer relays TRMS Terminal blocks TS Temperature switches VM Volt meters WO Cables, multi-conductor cables WW Wire ways XF Transformers Modify or expand catalog tables You can edit entries in a catalog table or even add new catalog items on-the-fly using AutoCAD Electrical. 1 Force AutoCAD Electrical to reference the desired catalog table.
you can do it from the Electrical pulldown menu. Select Projects ➤ Reports ➤ Insert Spreadsheet Data to Table. Move the catalog database file Click Projects ➤ Project ➤ Project Manager. Right-click the project name and select Settings to find the location of the default_cat.mdb file. If you want to move this file to some other directory, such as a shared network drive, then you must edit a small text file to tell AutoCAD Electrical where to look. 1 Move the file to your new drive:directory. 2 Exit AutoCAD.
You can sort the catalog database information by clicking on the column headings. Manufacturer/Type/Style Sorts the catalog database by manufacturer type, component type, and style. Show list ordered by catalog part number Sorts the catalog entries by catalog number. By default, the entries are shown in the order they appear in the catalog database. Subassembly values in pulldowns Displays subassemblies in the catalog display.
You can delete or change existing cables or add new ones to the list. Add Provides a template, prefilled with default values, for a new catalog item that is added to the catalog database file. Edit Edits an existing catalog record. Select the catalog record to edit from the Parts Catalog dialog box and make any changes in the Edit Catalog Record dialog box. Component Creates a component-specific catalog table.
Provides a template, prefilled with default values, for a new catalog item that is added to the catalog database file. You can also edit an existing catalog record. Access: Click the Insert Component tool. Select the component type to insert and specify the insertion point on the drawing. Click Catalog Data: Lookup. In the Parts Catalog dialog box, click Add or Edit. From the Components menu, select Insert Component. Select the component type to insert and specify the insertion point on the drawing.
Assembly Code Specifies the code to flag that this item has subassembly items. "As main- ➤ subassembly" activates the Assembly Code edit box. Use a unique name code to link this main catalog item with other subassembly items. This code can be up to 60 characters. Spaces are allowed. Assembly List Specifies the code to flag this is a subassembly item of a main item. To enter the ASSEMBLYLIST value, select "As subassembly" and enter the exact name of the ASSEMBLYCODE value carried by its main component.
spelling and capitalization. The list box beside each field helps maintain consistency as you add new catalog items. AutoCAD Electrical does a quick scan of the existing catalog file, collects and then displays a listing of all of the different field values it finds in the catalog. If one of the displayed values works for your new catalog item, then select it from this list (instead of typing in a brand new value). All upper case Displays all of the specified values in all upper case.
Field Name Width Description MISCELLANEOUS2 100 Second miscellaneous text field (header cell is based on the component family). ASSEMBLYCODE 60 Code to flag that this item has subassembly items. Use a unique name code to link this main catalog item with other subassembly items. Spaces are allowed. ASSEMBLYLIST 24 Code to flag this is a subassembly item of a main item. ASSEMBLYQUANTITY 8 Subassembly quantity (blank = quantity of 1). USER1 100 Field #1 for user's use.
For example, a current catalog entry needs to annotate the component block attributes RATING1 and RATING2 with "ON DELAY" and "5-30 sec" respectively. Insert the following text string into the TEXTVALUES edit box: RATING1=ON DELAY;RATING2=5-30 sec TIP The Rating attributes should be common among all component types to make the population of the catalog database easier.
A dimmed WEBLINK edit box in the Edit Record dialog box means that the catalog lookup table does not have a WEBLINK field defined as the fifteenth field. If dimmed, you can add this field by manually adding it to your own copy of Microsoft Access. A Weblink assignment can show up in the Surf dialog box.
TIP Option 2 or 3 is preferred. Use the merge utility Use the Merge Utility to migrate database and panel symbol data from previous versions of AutoCAD Electrical to a newer version. You can merge PLC, catalog, and footprint databases, or panel drawing files. A backup of the destination database is created before merging, however backup files are not created during panel content (folder) merges.
Folder cannot be written to, might be Read-Only The destination folder cannot be in the read-only state. Table mapping file for catalog merges You can choose to impose an input mapping file to direct where the data will be placed inside of the catalog destination database. The mapping file (named ACEDBMergeUtil.map) is located in the same directory as the main executable program. NOTE There are additional mappings for vendors, catalog numbers, and fields.
Merge files Upon installation, you should run this utility to merge old database and/or symbol content into your newer version. 1 Click the arrow on the Miscellaneous tool to access the Merge Utility tool. 2 Click the Merge Utility tool. 3 Select the content to merge (multiple selections are allowed). 4 Click Next. 5 Select the database from which to copy files. Click Browse to browse for a previous version of an AutoCAD Electrical database. 6 Select the database that the information will be copied to.
with the same destination database creates a new backup file, which will not overwrite any existing backup files. NOTE The specified source and destination databases/folders cannot be the same. Access: Click the arrow on the Miscellaneous tool to access the Merge Utility tool. From the Projects menu, select Extras ➤ Merge Utility. Select items to merge Specifies the content to merge (multiple selections are allowed). PLC Content merges the PLC database (ace_plc.
specified for the database or panel symbol content) is automatically filled in. You can browse for alternative databases/folders to copy the records into. Keep Duplicate Records in Destination Database/Folder (Merge New Only) Copies only new records from the source database/folder into the destination database/folder when duplicate items are found in the destination database/folder.
either default_cat.mdb or_cat.mdb. AutoCAD Electrical references this file first before looking in the user subdirectory or the catalogs subdirectory (as defined in wd.env). Use a miscellaneous catalog file You can set up a general catalog table within the .mdb file with all component types in it. AutoCAD Electrical will reference this table, if it exists. The table name is MISC_CAT. If found, this catalog information will display in the dialog for component catalog number selection.
dialog box, Catalog Data section, click Project. In the Find: Catalog Assignments dialog box, select External file, and click OK. Pull from your own external database application AutoCAD Electrical provides a means to bypass its internal catalog part number look-up and temporarily pass control to your custom catalog part number selection application. In the Insert/Edit dialog box, Catalog Data section, click Lookup.
selection of catalog numbers. This filter removes invalid selections from the catalog lookup window. 3 In the Parts catalog dialog box, select the vendor and catalog part number to use. The block's invisible MANUFACTURER, CATALOG, and ASSEMBLYCODE attributes are populated with the key values pulled from the selected record in the target table.
Field name Width Description MANUFACTURER 24 Manufacturer code to default to (Catalog lookup dialog's 1st pulldown) LIST2 60 Type value to default to (Catalog lookup dialog's 2nd pulldown) LIST3 60 Rating value to default to (Catalog lookup dialog's 3rd pulldown) RECNUM n/a AutoNumber field (used internally) Leaving a MFG, LIST2, or LIST3 field blank causes the respective pull-down to default to ALL.
Copy catalog assignments from component to component This utility allows you to insert or edit catalog part numbers onto the currently selected component or footprint. 1 Click the arrow on the Edit Component tool to access the Copy Catalog Assignment tool. 2 Click the Copy Catalog Assignment tool. 3 Select the master component from which the catalog data will be copied. 4 Select the part number information by clicking Catalog Lookup, Find: Drawing Only, Multiple Catalog, or Catalog Check.
This tool allows you to insert or edit extra catalog part numbers on to the currently selected component or footprint. You can add up to 99 additional part numbers to any schematic or panel component on-the-fly. These multiple BOM part numbers appear as sub-assembly part numbers to the main catalog part number in the various BOM and component reports. Access: On the Insert/Edit Component or Panel Layout - Component Insert/Edit dialog box, Catalog Data section, click Multiple Catalog.
Parts Catalog Lookup Lists the catalog database table that is to be referenced for the description information for the given Manufacturer/Catalog/Assembly combination. For each catalog entry you must provide a name for the catalog look-up table. For the main catalog entry this information is provided on the symbol itself but may not be there for these catalog entries. Select List to pick from a list of tables that are contained in your catalog database file or Misc to use the MISC_CAT table.
Show missing catalog assignments Use the Components ➤ Component Miscellaneous ➤ Show Missing Catalog Assignments tool to graphically indicate or list the parent or stand-alone components that do not carry catalog information on the active drawing. Show Displays the components that do not carry catalog information. They are marked on the screen with a red diamond shape drawn around the symbol's insertion point in temporary graphics. A REDRAW restores the screen to its original state.
parent, AutoCAD Electrical checks the pin information carried on the parent and verifies that a contact of the proper type is available. If so, it retrieves the next pair of contact pin numbers from the parent and displays as defaults for the new contact. The AutoCAD Electrical automatic pin list lookup and assignment at component insertion time is not limited to devices that have contacts. You can encode two wire devices like pilot lights or proximity switch into the database file.
Modify the pin list database The pin list database file can be viewed, edited, and expanded using the Pin List Database Editor tool. NOTE This tool is not limited to relays and timers, but can be extended to other switch types that can have extra contacts, plug/jacks, and stand-alone PLC I/O points. 1 Click Component ➤ Cross-Reference ➤ Pin List Database Editor. 2 In the Select Pin List Table dialog box, select the table to edit and click Edit.
Select the table to edit or enter a name for a new one. Table Displays the proper table name in the catalog database. This text changes depending on which manufacturer is selected. For example, if you select SQD, then _PINLIST_SQD displays. Create (available only when you enter the name of a manufacturer) Creates a new table in the catalog database with the specified name and adds the table to the list of manufacturers.
Use your own copy of Microsoft Access or use this dialog box to add new entries, add entries based on existing entries, edit, and delete entries from the table. Sort Sorts the list of database records using either an alphanumeric sort or number values. You can specify 4 sorts to perform on the list. Find Sorts the list of database records using either an alphanumeric sort or number values. You can specify 4 sorts to perform on the list.
ASSEMBLYCODE AutoCAD Electrical internal assembly code (must be consistent with the catalog lookup files) COILPINS Terminal pin numbers for coils (separate multiple pins with commas) PINLIST Contact type and pin numbers PEER_COILPINS Terminal pin numbers for peer coil PEER_PINLIST Contact type and pin numbers Edit record Access: Click Components ➤ Cross-Reference ➤ Pin List Database Editor. Specify the table to create and click Create or select the table to edit and click Edit.
parent itself can be either a N.O. or N.C. contact, encode the COILPINS field in a manner similar to the PINLIST field. For example, "1,A1,A2;2,B1,B2" for the COILPINS field for a target mfg/cat record in the _PINLIST table will apply pins "A1/A2" to the parent device pins if the device is a generic N.O. and "B1/B2" if it is a generic N.C. device. Repeat these values in the PINLIST field so that AutoCAD Electrical can correctly track all contacts. PINLIST Specifies the Contact type and pin numbers.
flags "Form-C", "8" is the common pin, "5" is the NO pin, and "6" is the NC pin. PEER_COILPINS, PEER_PINLIST There can be two additional "PEER_" fields in the _PINLIST table for defining special cases where a single part number calls out two parent devices. For example, a reversing motor starter part number might include two parent contactor coils, one for forward and one for reverse. Each parent coil symbol needs to have its own pin list assignment.
contact pin combinations are for the auxiliary contacts and which ones are for the starter contacts. 4A,1L,2L;4A,1R,2R;4C,L1,T1;4C,L2,T2;4C,L3,T3 When either symbol is inserted and associated with the parent, AutoCAD Electrical sees the symbol's PINLIST_TYPE value. The contact combinations that do not apply to the inserted component type are filtered out. Inserting a N.O.
802
14 Reports In this chapter ■ Generate reports ■ Schematic Reports ■ Panel Reports ■ Overview of format files ■ Run automatic reports ■ Modify spreadsheet data ■ Create user-defined attributes ■ Export to Autodesk Inventor Professional 803
Generate reports There is a lot of flexibility with AutoCAD Electrical reports, which can be run manually or automatically. AutoCAD Electrical extracts multiple fields into each report type. Different reports contain different fields of information. When running a report, you can select which fields to include and which fields to ignore. You can also add your own fields by creating a user-defined attribute support file (.wda) using the User Defined Attributes List tool.
Place reports on drawings Once you generate a report you can place it on a drawing or drawings by clicking "Put on Drawing" in the Report Generator dialog box. This displays the Table Generation Setup dialog box where you can select options to format the look of the table. Report tables can be updated once they have been inserted, saving you the trouble of the setup each time.
updated and edited as one report using the AutoCAD Electrical Edit Component command. Breaking a Report Table across Multiple Drawings You can break a report table across multiple drawings if the scope of the report is set to Project and not Active Drawing. In the Table Generation Setup dialog box, once you have defined a break as described above, you can define how many table sections should be placed on each drawing.
Update Existing Updates existing tables. If existing tables do not exist, new updatable tables are inserted. Text Defines the height, color, and line spacing for the text used in the table. To define the text color, click the Text Color box. The standard AutoCAD color selection dialog box opens, displaying the color selections. The minimum Spacing value is based on the specified text height and the vertical cell margin of the table style.
Include title line Shows the report's title above the table. When the checkbox is active, you may modify the default report title. Include special break values Specifies to include special break values for the title line of each section. Special break values will appear on each respective section regardless if the Show Title on First Section Only checkbox is selected. Title color Specifies what color to use for the table title. To define the text color, click the Title Color box.
Row Definition Specifies the number of table rows, the start and end lines, the number of rows for each section, and whether to build the table from the bottom up. Start Line/End The starting and ending lines reflect the total number of rows displayed in the Report Generator dialog box. These values default to previously used values on subsequent runs of the report. Build Up Creates the table from the bottom to the top; meaning that the last line is created first and the first line is created last.
Y-Distance Specifies the Y-distance from the end of one table section to the beginning of the next. The sections are on the same drawing. Optional script file reference This provides the option to save the report file to a script file. You can set up this script file to automatically know the file name of the report you just created. For AutoCAD 2000 and later, the report's file name can be retrieved using the AutoLISP expression (v1-bb-ref 'FNAM).
Other Opens a sub-dialog box for selecting a user script file. Edit report Use this utility to modify a report before you insert it on to your drawing as a ruled text table. Access: Click the Edit Mode button on any of the report dialog boxes (such as the XLS, CSV, or MDB File or Bill of Material dialog boxes). NOTE Different options are available depending on which type of report you are editing.
Re-order lines Re-orders the lines with the Sort, Move Up, Move Down, Move to Top, and Move to Bottom buttons. ■ Move Up: Moves the currently selected line(s) up one place in the report. ■ Move Down: Moves the currently selected line(s) down one place in the report. ■ Move to Top: Moves the currently selected line(s) to the top of the report. ■ Move to Bottom: Moves the currently selected line(s) to the bottom of the report. ■ Smart Swap: Swaps "*1" with "*2" values in all selected lines.
First Section Only Displays the selected header item at the top of the first section only. The header information is no longer displayed at the top of each section. Breaks Controls how the report breaks across multiple pages. Only one check box can be selected at a time. Specify whether to add page breaks or special breaks to the report. Add page breaks Breaks the report at the 58th line. Special breaks Specifies the value that controls the section break.
specified information into the report generator for printing, saving to a file, or placing in a table on the drawing. Tag Name Displays all component tag names in the report. Remove duplicated pin numbers Eliminates any duplicate pin numbers for the selected plug from the report. Left Side / Right Side Displays the wiring information from the left or right side of the pin symbols. This displays what is connected to the pin and the wiring information.
Insert as Terminal Strip (for Panel Terminal Strip Report only) Opens the Panel Terminal Strip Graphical Report - Parameters dialog box for defining a graphical representation of the terminal strip to place on the active drawing file. Plug/Male side - Jack/Female side - Show All (for Connector Details Report only) These 3 radio buttons work with the Type attribute value of either P or J for Plug (male) or Jack (female).
Label Quantity per Connection Specifies the quantity of wire labels or cable labels. Wire labels are generated for every wire connection while cable labels are generated once for every cable. Number of Columns to Display Arranges the wire labels in the specified number of columns. Change Report Format Changes what data fields are reported and the order in which they appear. (for Wire Label report only) There are two categories that you can change the report format for: wire label or cable label.
NOTE Depending on the file type, you may have the ability to include the project's LINEx values. These are the values in the 24 description lines entered for the project. Print Prints the report. Select the printer, print range, and number of copies. Conduit marker data fields to display Changes what data fields are reported and the order in which they appear. Access: On the Conduit Marker toolbar, click the arrow on the Conduit Reports tool to access the Conduit Marker Report tool.
printing and when saved to a file (the "top" portion is ignored). If you put the report on the drawing, the report justification is top right. Available Fields TAG Component tag name SIZE Conduit size (diameter) MFG Manufacturer or vendor name (i.e.
INST1 "From" device's installation code (must end with "1") LOC1 "From" device's location code (must end with "1") CMP1 "From" device's component tag ID (must end with "1") PIN1 "From" device's wire connection terminal number (must end with "1") INST2 "To" device's installation code (must end with "2") LOC2 "To" device's location code (must end with "2") CMP2 "To" device's component tag ID (must end with "2") PIN2 "To" device's wire connection terminal number (must end with "2") CBL Cable t
Fields to Report Lists the fields to display in the report. Remove/Remove All Removes the selected field or all fields from the Fields to Report list. Move Up Moves the selected field up one spot in the Fields to Report list. Move Down Moves the selected field down one spot in the Fields to Report list. Change field name/justification Specifies the vertical and horizontal justification (Top Left, Middle Center, Bottom Right) of any column and the column label (default is Top Left).
DWGDESC Drawing one-line description text FULLFILENAME AutoCAD drawing file name (.dwg) with complete path Cable insert/edit data fields to display Changes what data fields are reported and the order in which they appear. Access: Click the arrow on the Cable Markers tool to access the Multiple Cable Markers tool. Run the report. Select the location codes for the report and click Change Format on the Cable Insert/Edit dialog box. From the Wires menu, select Cables ➤ Multiple Cable Markers.
nored). If you put the report on the drawing, the report justification is top right.
CBLLOC Cable location attribute value CBLMFG Cable manufacturer attribute value CBLCAT Cable catalog part number CBLASMB Cable ASSYCODE assignment DESC1CBL - DESC3CBL Cable description attribute values 1 - 3 CBLP1C2 Cable parent or child (parent = 1, child = 2) CMP:PIN1 "From" device's component tag and component terminal pin number CMP:PIN2 "To" device's component tag and component terminal pin number SEC1 "From" device's drawing section assignment (must end with "1") SUB1 "From" device'
SEQ1 "From" device's wire connection sequence value (must end with "1") SEQ2 "To" device's wire connection sequence value (must end with "2") PNLWDLEV1 "From" device's panel equivalent level (WDLEV) value (must end with "1") PNLWDLEV2 "To" device's panel equivalent level (WDLEV) value (must end with "2") CMPHDL1 "From" device's entity handle value (must end with "1") CMPHDL2 "To" device's entity handle value (must end with "2") DWGIX1 "From" device's drawing DWGIX value as listed in FILETIME ta
XDIR1 "From" device's wire connection point direction - i.e. 4 = connects from left (must end with "1") XDIR2 "To" device's wire connection point direction - i.e.
Changes what data fields are reported and the order in which they appear. Access: Click the Panel Reports tool. Select Bill of Material from the report list. Run the report and click Change Report Format on the Report Generator dialog box. Click Projects ➤ Reports ➤ Panel Reports. Select Bill of Material from the report list. Run the report and click Change Report Format on the Report Generator dialog box.
Available Fields The fields that are available depend on the report options you selected when running the report. ITEM Item number assignment N/A Not applicable or not used QTY Quantity SUB Subassembly quantity CATALOG Catalog part number assignment MFG Manufacturer or vendor name (i.e.
DWGIX "From" device's drawing DWGIX value as listed in FILETIME table of project scratch database Panel component exception data fields to report Changes what data fields are reported and the order in which they appear. Access: Click the Panel Reports tool. Select Component Exception from the report list. Run the report and click Change Report Format on the Report Generator dialog box. Click Projects ➤ Reports ➤ Panel Reports. Select Component Exception from the report list.
Available Fields TAGNAME Tag ID value (attributes "TAG", "TAG1", "TAGSTRIP", "P_TAG1") INST Installation attribute value LOC Location attribute value COMMENT Comment or explanation of issue PNL Value of the problem area on the footprint component; shows the value on the panel layout (i.e. If the Comment is "Mismatch LOC", the LOC attribute is different between the Panel Layout and Schematic components). SCHEM Value of the problem area on the component; shows the value on the schematic drawing (i.
Changes what data fields are reported and the order in which they appear. Access: Click the Panel Reports tool. Select Component from the report list. Run the report and click Change Report Format on the Report Generator dialog box. Click Projects ➤ Reports ➤ Panel Reports. Select Component from the report list. Run the report and click Change Report Format on the Report Generator dialog box. Available Fields Lists the available fields for formatting the report (including user-defined attributes).
TAGNAME Tag ID value (attributes "TAG", "TAG1", "TAGSTRIP", "P_TAG1") CNT Count UNITS Units of measurement (i.e. AMPS, VOLTS, mA) SUBQTY Sub-quantity MFG Manufacturer or vendor name (i.e.
USER1-3 User field in catalog lookup database P1C2 parent = 1, child = 2 WDBLKNAM Related to the name of the component's catalog lookup table BLOCK Block name HDL Entity handle number CATEGORY Type of component (J = plug-jack connector, P = PLC I/O, C = cable marker) ASSYCODE Optional assembly code value used in catalog lookup query to get part number groups SH Sheet - the %S value SHDWGNAM Drawing name - the %D value SEC Drawing section assignment SUBSEC Drawing sub-section assignment
Changes what data fields are reported and the order in which they appear. Access: Click the Panel Reports tool. Select Missing Level/Sequence Assignments from the report list. Run the report and click Change Report Format on the Report Generator dialog box. Click Projects ➤ Reports ➤ Panel Reports. Select Missing Level/Sequence Assignments from the report list. Run the report and click Change Report Format on the Report Generator dialog box.
INST Installation attribute value LOC Location attribute value MOUNT Mount attribute value; panel layout optional attribute for user-defined "panel mounting" assignment GROUP GROUPWITH attribute value; panel layout optional attribute for userdefined "group with" assignment HDL Entity handle number CATEGORY Type of component (J = plug-jack connector, P = PLC I/O, C = cable marker) DESC1-3 Description attribute values 1-3 SH Sheet - the %S value SHDWGNAM Drawing name - the %D value FILENAME
Access: Click Projects ➤ Reports ➤ Panel Reports. Select Wire Annotation Exception from the report list. Run the report and click Change Report Format on the Report Generator dialog box. Available Fields Lists the available fields for formatting the report (including user-defined attributes). Select a field from the list to transfer it into the Fields to Report list. Fields to Report Lists the fields to display in the report.
WTYPE Alternate type of symbol(i.e.
CBL Cable tag TEXT Wire annotation text Panel nameplate data fields to report Changes what data fields are reported and the order in which they appear. Access: Click the Panel Reports tool. Select Nameplate from the report list. Run the report and click Change Report Format on the Report Generator dialog box. Click Projects ➤ Reports ➤ Panel Reports. Select Nameplate from the report list. Run the report and click Change Report Format on the Report Generator dialog box.
nored). If you put the report on the drawing, the report justification is top right. Available Fields TAGNAME Tag ID value (attributes "TAG", "TAG1", "TAGSTRIP", "P_TAG1") DESC1-3 Description attribute values 1-3 MFG Manufacturer or vendor name (i.e.
HDL Entity handle number DWGIX "From" device's drawing DWGIX value as listed in FILETIME table of project scratch database Panel terminal exception data fields to report Changes what data fields are reported and the order in which they appear. Access: Click the Panel Reports tool. Select Terminal Exception from the report list. Run the report and click Change Report Format on the Report Generator dialog box. Click Projects ➤ Reports ➤ Panel Reports. Select Terminal Exception from the report list.
nored). If you put the report on the drawing, the report justification is top right. Available Fields TAGNAME Tag ID value (attributes "TAG", "TAG1", "TAGSTRIP", "P_TAG1") INST Installation attribute value LOC Location attribute value COMMENT Comment or explanation of issue PNL Value of the problem area on the footprint component; shows the value on the panel layout (i.e. If the Comment is "Mismatch LOC", the LOC attribute is different between the Panel Layout and Schematic components).
Changes what data fields are reported and the order in which they appear. Access: Click the Panel Reports tool. Select Wire Connection from the report list. Run the report and click Change Report Format on the Report Generator dialog box. Click Projects ➤ Reports ➤ Panel Reports. Select Wire Connection from the report list. Run the report and click Change Report Format on the Report Generator dialog box.
PIN Wire connection terminal pin number WIRENO Wire number WTYPE Alternate type of symbol(i.e.
HDL Entity handle number CATEGORY Type of component (J = plug-jack connector, P = PLC I/O, C = cable marker, FP = Panel Footprint , FPT = terminal footprint) PDESC Wire connection point description attribute value SFX Values of R or L; used for terminal block symbols where we identify the wire annotation attributes with an R or L for Right or Left of the symbol SH Sheet - the %S value SHDWGNAM Drawing name - the %D value X X-coordinate Y Y-coordinate Z Z-coordinate CBL Cable tag TEXT Wi
Access: codes for the report and click Change Report Format on the Report Generator dialog box. Available Fields Lists the available fields for formatting the report (including user-defined attributes). Select a field from the list to transfer it into the Fields to Report list. Fields to Report Lists the fields to display in the report. Remove/Remove All Removes the selected field or all fields from the Fields to Report list. Move Up Moves the selected field up one spot in the Fields to Report list.
PIN1 "From" device's wire connection terminal number (must end with "1") LOC2 "To" device's location code (must end with "2") REFDES2 "To" device component tag-ID, reference designator #2 (must end with "2") PIN2 "To" device's wire connection terminal number (must end with "2") WLAY1 Wire layer "From" device (must end with "1") NAME Wire layer name REF1 Line or grid reference location for "From" device (must end with "1") REF2 Line or grid reference location for "To" device (must end with "2"
CMP:PIN1 "From" device's component tag and component terminal pin number CMP:PIN2 "To" device's component tag and component terminal pin number SEC1 "From" device's drawing section assignment (must end with "1") SUB1 "From" device's drawing sub-section assignment (must end with "1") SEC2 "To" device's drawing section assignment (must end with "2") SUB2 "To" device's drawing sub-section assignment (must end with "2") INST1 "From" device's installation code (must end with "1") INST2 "To" device
CMPHDL2 "To" device's entity handle value (must end with "2") DWGIX1 "From" device's drawing DWGIX value as listed in FILETIME table of project scratch database (must end with "1") DWGIX2 "To" device's drawing DWGIX value as listed in FILETIME table of project scratch database (must end with "2") DWGNAM1 "From" device's drawing %D value (must end with "1") DWGNAM2 "To" device's drawing %D value (must end with "2") CBLHDL Cable entity's handle value CBLINST Cable installation assignment CBLDWGI
PNLZ1 "From" wire connection's physical Z-coordinate value (must end with "1") PNLXDIR1 Panel wire "From" connection point's direction - i.e.
Remove/Remove All Removes the selected field or all fields from the Fields to Report list. Move Up Moves the selected field up one spot in the Fields to Report list. Move Down Moves the selected field down one spot in the Fields to Report list. Change field name/justification Specifies the vertical and horizontal justification (Top Left, Middle Center, Bottom Right) of any column and the column label (default is Top Left).
CATALOG Catalog part number assignment MFG Manufacturer or vendor name (i.e.
Changes what data fields are reported and the order in which they appear. Access: Click the Schematic Reports tool. Select Cable Summary from the report list. Run the report and click Change Report Format on the Report Generator dialog box. Click Projects ➤ Reports ➤ Schematic Reports. Select Cable Summary from the report list. Run the report and click Change Report Format on the Report Generator dialog box.
DESC1-3 Description attribute values 1-3 MFG Manufacturer or vendor name (i.e.
DWGIX "From" device's drawing DWGIX value as listed in FILETIME table of project scratch database Cable from/to data fields to report Changes what data fields are reported and the order in which they appear. Access: Click the Schematic Reports tool. Select Cable From/To from the report list. Run the report. Select the location codes for the report and click Change Report Format on the Report Generator dialog box. Click Projects ➤ Reports ➤ Schematic Reports. Select Cable From/To from the report list.
Available Fields WIRENO Wire number LOC1 "From" device's location code (must end with "1") CMP1 "From" device's component tag ID (must end with "1") PIN1 "From" device's wire connection terminal number (must end with "1") LOC2 "To" device's location code (must end with "2") CMP2 "To" device's component tag ID (must end with "2") PIN2 "To" device's wire connection terminal number (must end with "2") WLAY1 Wire layer "From" device (must end with "1") WLAY2 Wire layer "To" device (must end wit
CBLCAT Cable catalog part number CBLASMB Cable ASSYCODE assignment CBLDESCCAT Cable BOM single line description field (pulled from the catalog lookup file for the cable's catalog part number query) CBLQ1CAT Cable BOM query1 value (pulled from the catalog lookup file for the cable's catalog part number query) CBLQ2CAT Cable BOM query2 value (pulled from the catalog lookup file for the cable's catalog part number query) CBLMISC1CAT CBLMISC2CAT Cable BOM miscellaneous fields (pulled from the catalog
INST2 "To" device's installation code IECCMP1 "From" device's IEC tag name (must end with "1") IECCMP2 "To" device's IEC tag name (must end with "2") PD1 "From" device's wire connection TERMDESC value (must end with "1") PD2 "To" device's wire connection TERMDESC value (must end with "2") SEQ1 "From" device's wire connection sequence value (must end with "1") SEQ2 "To" device's wire connection sequence value (must end with "2") PNLWDLEV1 "From" device's panel equivalent level (WDLEV) value (m
CBLINST Cable entity's handle value CBLDWGIX Cable's drawing DWGIX value as listed in FILETIME table of project scratch database WIREHDL1 "From" device's connected wire line entity handle value (must end with "1") WIREHDL2 "To" device's connected wire line entity handle value (must end with "2") XDIR1 "From" device's wire connection point direction - i.e. 4 = connects from left (must end with "1") XDIR2 "To" device's wire connection point direction - i.e.
PNLXDIR2 Panel wire "To" connection point's direction - i.e. 4 = connects from left, 1 = right, 2 = above, 8 = below (must end with "2") CLEN Panel layout calculated wire length USER1_1 to USER20_1 "From" device's optional user field USER1_2 to USER20_2 "To" device's optional user field Cable label data fields to report Changes what data fields are reported and the order in which they appear. Access: Click the Schematic Reports tool. Select Wire Label from the report list.
to Report list, define the separator, select another field, define a separator, and so on. You can also select the separator from a list. The "\n" symbol stands for the new line. When you use this as separator, the field displays in the new (next) line.
Remove/Remove All Removes the selected field or all fields from the Fields to Report list. Move Up Moves the selected field up one spot in the Fields to Report list. Move Down Moves the selected field down one spot in the Fields to Report list. Change field name/justification Specifies the vertical and horizontal justification (Top Left, Middle Center, Bottom Right) of any column and the column label (default is Top Left).
WLAY Wire layer name PLCMFG PLC I/O module's Manufacturer attribute value PLCCAT PLC I/O module's Catalog part number PLCASSYCODE PLC I/O module's ASSYCODE attribute value PLCTERMCODE PLC I/O terminal attribute suffix value (the "xx" part of TERMxx) PLCDWGIX PLC Drawing DWGIX value as listed in FILETIME table of project PLCHDL PLC I/O module's AutoCAD handle value PLCLINE1 PLC I/O module's LINE1 attribute value (miscellaneous text such as "Rack" or "Slot") PLCLINE2 PLC I/O module's LINE2 at
CMPMFG Connected component Manufacturer attribute value CMPCAT Connected component catalog part number CMPASSYCODE Connected component ASSYCODE attribute value CMPDWGIX Connected component's Drawing DWGIX value as listed in FILETIME table of project scratch database CMPHDL Connected component's AutoCAD handle value CMPBLKNAM Connected component's AutoCAD block name TERMTAG Connected terminal's TAGSTRIP attribute value TERMINST Connected terminal's Installation attribute value TERMLOC Connec
CBLWC Cable wire or cable core color CBLHDL Cable entity's handle value Component wire list data fields to report Changes what data fields are reported and the order in which they appear. Access: Click the Schematic Reports tool. Select Component Wire List from the report list. Run the report and click Change Report Format on the Report Generator dialog box. Click Projects ➤ Reports ➤ Schematic Reports. Select Component Wire List from the report list.
nored). If you put the report on the drawing, the report justification is top right.
SEC Drawing section assignment SUBSEC Drawing sub-section assignment TERMDESC Component wire connection TERMDESCxx value INST Installation attribute value DESC1-3 Description attribute values 1-3 MFG Manufacturer or vendor name (i.e.
Access: Click Projects ➤ Reports ➤ Schematic Reports. Select Connector Details from the report list. Run the report and click Change Report Format on the Report Generator dialog box. Available Fields Lists the available fields for formatting the report (including user-defined attributes). Select a field from the list to transfer it into the Fields to Report list. Fields to Report Lists the fields to display in the report.
WIRENO Wire number DESC1-3 Description attribute values 1-3 MFG Manufacturer or vendor name (i.e.
Changes what data fields are reported and the order in which they appear. Access: Click the Schematic Reports tool. Select Connector Plug from the report list. Run the report and click Change Report Format on the Report Generator dialog box. Click Projects ➤ Reports ➤ Schematic Reports. Select Connector Plug from the report list. Run the report and click Change Report Format on the Report Generator dialog box.
PIN Wire connection terminal pin number TAGNAME Tag ID value (attributes "TAG", "TAG1", "TAGSTRIP", "P_TAG1") LOC Location attribute value WLAY Wire layer name P1C2 parent = 1, child = 2 REF Line reference or X-Y grid reference or X-Zone reference SH Sheet - the %S value SHDWGNAM Drawing name - the %D value BLKNAME Block name HDL Entity handle number XDIR Wire connection X?TERMxx attribute's direction code and suffix CBL Cable CBLWC Cable wire or cable core color SEC Drawing secti
CATALOG Catalog part number assignment ASSYCODE Optional assembly code value used in catalog lookup query to get part number groups RATING1-12 Rating 1 - 12 attribute values XTERMHDL Wire connection X?TERMxx attribute's entity handle name DWGIX "From" device's drawing DWGIX value as listed in FILETIME table of project scratch database Connector summary data fields to report Changes what data fields are reported and the order in which they appear. Access: Click the Schematic Reports tool.
Change field name/justification Specifies the vertical and horizontal justification (Top Left, Middle Center, Bottom Right) of any column and the column label (default is Top Left). The vertical portion of the justification (Top, Middle, Bottom) is only used for the Put on Drawing report feature. For example, if you select "Top Right" the report is right-justified during the display, printing and when saved to a file (the "top" portion is ignored).
Component data fields to report Changes what data fields are reported and the order in which they appear. Access: Click the Schematic Reports tool. Select Component from the report list. Run the report and click Change Report Format on the Report Generator dialog box. Click Projects ➤ Reports ➤ Schematic Reports. Select Component from the report list. Run the report and click Change Report Format on the Report Generator dialog box.
Available Fields ITEM Item number assignment TAGNAME Tag ID value (attributes "TAG", "TAG1", "TAGSTRIP", "P_TAG1") CNT Count on panel component UNITS Units of measurement (i.e.
WDBLKNAM Name of the component's catalog lookup table BLOCK Block name HDL Entity handle number CATEGORY Type of component (J = plug-jack connector, P = PLC I/O, C = cable marker) ASSYCODE Optional assembly code value used in catalog lookup query to get part number groups SH Sheet - the %S value SHDWGNAM Drawing name - the %D value SEC Drawing SEC assignment SUBSEC Drawing SUBSEC assignment FAMILY Component family WDTAGALT Tag-ID of device on alternate drawing type WDTYPE Alternate ty
Access: Click Projects ➤ Reports ➤ Schematic Reports. Select Missing Bill of Material from the report list. Run the report and click Change Report Format on the Report Generator dialog box. Available Fields Lists the available fields for formatting the report (including user-defined attributes). Select a field from the list to transfer it into the Fields to Report list. Fields to Report Lists the fields to display in the report.
DESC1-3 Description attribute values 1-3 REF Line reference or X-Y grid reference or X-Zone reference TABNAM Catalog database table name HDL Entity handle number CATEGORY Type of component (J = plug-jack connector, P = PLC I/O, C = cable marker) SH Sheet - the %S value SHDWGNAM Drawing name - the %D value FILENAME AutoCAD drawing .dwg file name (with full path) Wire from/to data fields to report Changes what data fields are reported and the order in which they appear.
Move Up Moves the selected field up one spot in the Fields to Report list. Move Down Moves the selected field down one spot in the Fields to Report list. Change field name/justification Specifies the vertical and horizontal justification (Top Left, Middle Center, Bottom Right) of any column and the column label (default is Top Left). The vertical portion of the justification (Top, Middle, Bottom) is only used for the Put on Drawing report feature.
REF2 Line or grid reference location for "To" device (must end with "2") SH1 Sheet assignment for "From" device (must end with "1") SH2 Sheet assignment for "To" device (must end with "2") CBL Cable tag CBLWC Cable wire or cable core color CBLLOC Cable location attribute value CBLMFG Cable manufacturer attribute value CBLCAT Cable catalog part number CBLASMB Cable ASSYCODE assignment DESC1CBL-DESC3CBL Cable description attribute values 1 - 3 CBLP1C2 Cable parent or child (parent = 1, ch
IECCMP1 "From" device's IEC tag name (must end with "1") IECCMP2 "To" device's IEC tag name (must end with "2") PD1 "From" device's wire connection TERMDESC value (must end with "1") PD2 "To" device's wire connection TERMDESC value (must end with "2") SEQ1 "From" device's wire connection sequence value (must end with "1") SEQ2 "To" device's wire connection sequence value (must end with "2") PNLWDLEV1 "From" device's panel equivalent panel (WDLEV) value (must end with "1") PNLWDLEV2 "To" devic
CBLDWGIX Cable's drawing DWGIX value as listed in FILETIME table of project scratch database WIREHDL1 "From" device's connected wire line entity handle value (must end with "1") WIREHDL2 "To" device's connected wire line entity handle value (must end with "2") XDIR1 "From" device's wire connection point direction - i.e. 4 = connects from left (must end with "1") XDIR2 "To" device's wire connection point direction - i.e.
CLEN Panel layout calculated wire length USER1_1 to USER20_1 "From" device's optional user field USER1_2 to USER20_2 "To" device's optional user field PLC I/O address and descriptions data fields to report Changes what data fields are reported and the order in which they appear. Access: Click the Schematic Reports tool. Select PLC I/O Address and Descriptions from the report list. Run the report and click Change Report Format on the Report Generator dialog box.
Put on Drawing report feature. For example, if you select "Top Right" the report is right-justified during the display, printing and when saved to a file (the "top" portion is ignored). If you put the report on the drawing, the report justification is top right.
LINE2 PLC I/O LINE2 attribute description text HDL Entity handle number XTERMHDL Wire connection X?TERMxx attribute's entity handle name TERMCODE Wire connection X?TERMxx attribute suffix (the "xx") SH Sheet - the %S value SHDWGNAM Drawing name - the %D value IEC_P Drawing's IEC project default - the %P value IEC_I Drawing's IEC Installation default - the %I value IEC_L Drawing's IEC Location default - the %L value SEC Drawing section assignment SUBSEC Drawing sub-section assignment DW
Access: Click Projects ➤ Reports ➤ Schematic Reports. Select Terminal Numbers from the report list. Run the report and click Change Report Format on the Report Generator dialog box. Available Fields Lists the available fields for formatting the report (including user-defined attributes). Select a field from the list to transfer it into the Fields to Report list. Fields to Report Lists the fields to display in the report.
WIRENO Wire number INST Installation attribute value LOC Location attribute value REF Line reference or X-Y grid reference or X-Zone reference SH Sheet - the %S value SHDWGNAM Drawing name - the %D value BLKNAME Block name MFG Manufacturer or vendor name (i.e.
Changes what data fields are reported and the order in which they appear. Access: Click the Schematic Reports tool. Select PLC Modules Used So Far from the report list. Run the report and click Change Report Format on the Report Generator dialog box. Click Projects ➤ Reports ➤ Schematic Reports. Select PLC Modules Used So Far from the report list. Run the report and click Change Report Format on the Report Generator dialog box.
ADDR_END PLC ending address TAG PLC tag value MFG Manufacturer or vendor name (i.e.
Changes what data fields are reported and the order in which they appear. Access: Click the Schematic Reports tool. Select Terminal Plan from the report list. Run the report and click Change Report Format on the Report Generator dialog box. Click Projects ➤ Reports ➤ Schematic Reports. Select Terminal Plan from the report list. Run the report and click Change Report Format on the Report Generator dialog box.
LOC1 "From" device's location code (must end with "1") CMP1 "From" device's component tag ID (must end with "1") PIN1 "From" device's wire connection terminal number (must end with "1") PD1 "From" device's wire connection TERMDESC value (must end with "1") LAYCMP1 Layer of wire connecting to device component 1 (must end with "1") CBL1 Cable ID tied to device component 1 (must end with "1") CBLWC1 Cable wire color tied to device component 1 (must end with "1") WNUM1 Wire number tied to device
CBL2 Cable ID tied to device component 2 (must end with "2") CBLWC2 Cable wire color tied to device component 2 (must end with "2") LAYCMP2 Layer of wire connecting to device component 2 (must end with "2") PD2 "To" device's wire connection TERMDESC value (must end with "2") PIN2 "To" device's wire connection terminal number (must end with "2") CMP2 "To" device's component tag ID (must end with "2") INST2 "To" device's installation code LOC2 "To" device's location code (must end with "2") SH
Changes what data fields are reported and the order in which they appear. Access: Click the Schematic Reports tool. Select Wire Label from the report list. Run the report and click Wire Label on the Report Generator dialog box. Click Projects ➤ Reports ➤ Schematic Reports. Select Wire Label from the report list. Run the report and click Wire Label on the Report Generator dialog box. Available Fields Lists the available fields for formatting the report (including user-defined attributes).
CMP Component that connects to a wire (at any end) and is written to the wire label PIN Wire connection terminal pin number of the component that the wire connects with Wire conduit routing data fields to display Changes what data fields are reported and the order in which they appear. Access: On the Conduit Marker toolbar, click the arrow on the Conduit Reports tool to access the Wire/Conduit Routing Report tool. Run the report and click Change Report Format on the Report Generator dialog box.
"Top Right" the report is right-justified during the display, printing and when saved to a file (the "top" portion is ignored). If you put the report on the drawing, the report justification is top right.
Changes what data fields are reported and the order in which they appear. Access: Click the Project Manager tool. In the Project Manager, right-click the project or drawing name and select Properties. Click the Cross-References tab. In the component Cross-Reference Display section, select Table Format and click Setup. In the Table Cross-Reference Format Setup dialog box, Table Style section, click Define Columns. From the Projects menu, select Project ➤ Project Manager.
printing and when saved to a file (the "top" portion is ignored). If you put the report on the drawing, the report justification is top right.
Changes what data fields are reported and the order in which they appear. Access: From the Components menu, select Cross-Reference ➤ Cross-Reference Table. Select the component to evaluate. Click Change Report Format on the Report Generator dialog box. Available Fields Lists the available fields for formatting the report (including user-defined attributes). Select a field from the list to transfer it into the Fields to Report list. Fields to Report Lists the fields to display in the report.
TYPE Contact type - can be user defined and come from the Contact attribute on the child symbol - this gets overwritten from the contact mapping in the dialog box T2 Terminal pin number - second wire connection (TERM02) W2 Wire number - second wire connection (TERM02) REF Line reference or X-Y grid reference or X-Zone reference SH Sheet - the %S value SHDWGNAM Drawing name - the %D value FILENAME AutoCAD drawing file name (.dwg) FULLFILENAME AutoCAD drawing file name (.
■ Export BOM data to a spreadsheet or database program ■ Insert BOM as a table right on an AutoCAD drawing ■ List parent or stand-alone components without catalog information Component report This report performs a project-wide extract of all components found on your wiring diagram set. This data includes component tags, location codes, location reference, description text, ratings, catalog information, and block names.
PLC I/O Address and Description report This report lists each PLC module and its beginning and ending I/O address numbers. It scans your drawing set and returns all individual I/O connection points it finds. This includes up to five lines of description text and the connected wire number for each I/O point. PLC I/O Component Connection report This report scans the selected drawing(s) and returns information about any components connected to PLC I/O points.
Connector Details report This report extracts the component wire connection data and displays it in a dialog box. Each entry shows a connection to a component, the wire number, component tag name, terminal pin number, component location code (if present), and the layer that the connected wire is on. Cable Summary report This project-wide cable conductor report gives a report listing all of the cable marker tags (parent tags) found.
Generate a schematic report 1 Click the Schematic Reports tool. 2 Select which schematic report to generate from the report list. 3 Select to process the project, current drawing, or selected components. 4 Specify any report options (if applicable). 5 Select installation or location codes to extract (if applicable). 6 Indicate whether to update the project database or the wire connection table with out-of-date drawings. 7 Click OK.
Schematic bill of material The Bill of Material reports report only components with assigned BOM information. Access: Click the Schematic Reports tool. Select Bill of Material from the report list. From the Projects menu, select Reports ➤ Schematic Reports. Select Bill of Material from the report list. Specify whether to process the project or the active drawing. Include options Include Cables Specifies to include cable information in the report.
Normal Tallied Format (Group by Installation/Location) Identical component or component/assemblies with the same installation/location codes are tallied and reported as single line items. Display in Tallied Purchase List Format Each part becomes its own line item (i.e. no longer any sub-assembly items) and each is tallied across all component types. For example, all 800E-3X10 N.O. contact blocks for all components are reported as a single line item.
Freshen Project Database Specifies for AutoCAD Electrical to update the project database to include any out-of-date drawing files. Format Changes the format of the extracted data. The sub-dialog box lists the format files to select from. Schematic cable summary This project-wide cable conductor report gives a report listing all of the cable marker tags (parent tags) found. Access: Click the Schematic Reports tool. Select Cable Summary from the report list.
can also create a report from multiple location codes. AutoCAD Electrical automatically creates a comma-delimited list for the named location search. Freshen Project Database Specifies for AutoCAD Electrical to update the project database to include any out-of-date drawing files. Format Changes the format of the extracted data. The sub-dialog box lists the format files to select from.
in the column with the "CMPTAG" label. If there are multiple instances, the one closest to the PLC I/O point is the one that shows up in the report column. Access: Click the Schematic Reports tool. Select PLC I/O Component Connection from the report list. From the Projects menu, select Reports ➤ Schematic Reports. Select PLC I/O Component Connection from the report list. Specify whether to process the project or the active drawing.
Freshen Wire Connection Table Specifies for AutoCAD Electrical to update the wire connection table to include any out-of-date drawing files. Format Changes the format of the extracted data. The sub-dialog box lists the format files to select from. Schematic component wire list This report extracts the component wire connection data and displays it in a dialog.
Location Codes to Extract Extracts only the information for components with specific location values. Indicate to process all components that carry part number values, components without a location code, or only components marked with a location code that matches that entered in the edit box. For example, BOM report for components marked "OP STA 2". Wild-cards are supported.
Installation Codes to Extract Extracts only the information for components with specific installation values. Indicate to process all components that carry part number values, components without an installation code, or only components marked with a location code that matches that entered in the edit box. Wild cards are supported. After you click Named Installation, type the installation code in the box, or click List: Drawing or List: Project to select from a list of used installation codes.
toggle is checked and click OK. This reformats the report so each pin is listed only once. Access: Click the Schematic Reports tool. Select Connector Plug from the report list. From the Projects menu, select Reports ➤ Schematic Reports. Select Connector Plug from the report list. Specify whether to process the project, the active drawing, or selected wires. Installation Codes to Extract Extracts only the information for components with specific installation values.
Freshen Wire Connection Table Specifies for AutoCAD Electrical to update the wire connection table to include any out-of-date drawing files. Format Changes the format of the extracted data. The dialog box lists the format files to select from. Schematic connector summary This report lists a single line for each connector tag along with pins used, maximum pins allowed (if the parent carries the PINLIST information), and a list of any repeated pin numbers used.
that matches that entered in the edit box. For example, BOM report for components marked "OP STA 2." Wild cards are supported. After you click Named Location, type the location code in the box, or click List: Drawing or List: Project to select from a list of used location codes. You can also create a report from multiple location codes. AutoCAD Electrical automatically creates a comma-delimited list for the named location search.
After you click Named Installation, type the installation code in the box, or click List: Drawing or List: Project to select from a list of used installation codes. You can also create a report from multiple installation codes. AutoCAD Electrical automatically creates a comma-delimited list for the named installation search. Location Codes to Extract Extracts only the information for components with specific location values.
Options Specifies to include components, cable markers, connectors, or terminals in the report. Installation Codes to Extract Extracts only the information for components with specific installation values. Indicate to process all components that carry part number values, components without an installation code, or only components marked with a location code that matches that entered in the edit box. Wild cards are supported.
in the project set. Then it displays a location list dialog box where you can make your report's "from" and "to" location selections. All the location codes AutoCAD Electrical found on the drawing set are listed on each side of this dialog. Location "(??)" is also included in the list if AutoCAD Electrical found any component or stand-alone terminal that didn't have an assigned location code. Access: Click the Schematic Reports tool. Select Wire From/To from the report list.
From the Projects menu, select Reports ➤ Schematic Reports. Select PLC I/O Address and Descriptions from the report list. Specify whether to process the project or the active drawing. Installation Codes to Extract Extracts only the information for components with specific installation values. Indicate to process all components that carry part number values, components without an installation code, or only components marked with a location code that matches that entered in the edit box.
This project-wide, stand-alone report lists all instances of terminals. Each entry includes information tied directly to the terminal such as terminal number, terminal strip number, and location code. Access: Click the Schematic Reports tool. Select Terminal Numbers from the report list. From the Projects menu, select Reports ➤ Schematic Reports. Select Terminal Numbers from the report list. Specify whether to process the project or the active drawing.
Format Changes the format of the extracted data. The dialog box lists the format files to select from. Schematic terminal plan This project-wide, stand-alone report does a wire network extraction. This means it takes longer to generate, but the report includes wire number and wire layer name information. Access: Click the Schematic Reports tool. Select Terminal Plan from the report list. From the Projects menu, select Reports ➤ Schematic Reports. Select Terminal Plan from the report list.
List Lists drawings that appear to be out-of-date with the project's wire connection table. Freshen Wire Connection Table Specifies for AutoCAD Electrical to update the wire connection table to include any out-of-date drawing files. Format Changes the format of the extracted data. The dialog box lists the format files to select from. Schematic PLC modules used so far For the PLC Modules Used So Far report, AutoCAD Electrical quickly scans the wiring diagram set.
Location Codes to Extract Extracts only the information for components with specific location values. Indicate to process all components that carry part number values, components without a location code, or only components marked with a location code that matches that entered in the edit box. For example, BOM report for components marked "OP STA 2." Wild cards are supported.
without an installation code, or only components marked with a location code that matches that entered in the edit box. Wildcards are supported. Once you pick Named Installation, type the installation code in the box or click List: Drawing or List: Project to select from a list of used installation codes. You can also create a report from multiple installation codes. AutoCAD Electrical automatically creates a comma-delimited list for the named installation search.
“(??)” is also included in the list if AutoCAD Electrical found any component or stand-alone terminals that didn’t have an assigned location code. Access: Click the Schematic Reports tool. Select Wire From/To from the report list. Specify whether to process the project, active drawing, or selected wires. From the Projects menu, select Reports ➤ Schematic Reports. Select Wire From/To from the report list. Specify whether to process the project, active drawing, or selected wires.
addition to MCAB5 (from) and JBOX1 (to) the following combinations are created: MACHINE -> FLOOR MACHINE -> JBOX1 MCAB5 -> FLOOR MCAB5 -> JBOX1 Each of the combinations is processed and combined into a single report. Adjust the list as desired (for example, you can select to remove highlighted combinations or keep only those combinations you highlight in the list) and click OK. Include reverse sequences Includes reversed wire connections in the report.
scope of the report by filtering on certain location values (for example, report for CAB1 items only), process only a subset of drawings, or include/exclude certain categories of items. Each extracted panel component is listed as its own line item. If it has a part number that results in subassembly part numbers, or has been individually annotated with multi-BOM part numbers, each additional part number is a line item right below the main line item.
looks at each selected panel terminal looking for a matching schematic terminal in the same way. Wire Annotation Exception report This report lists which physical component symbol doesn't have a From and a To for wire annotation information. For wire annotation, the panel component symbols contain wiring information as either attributed or Mtext data. This is used as a troubleshooting mechanism to aid in the assignment of wiring annotation.
Generate a panel report 1 Click the Panel Reports tool. 2 Select which panel report to generate from the report list. 3 Select to process the project, active drawing, or selected components. 4 Select installation or location codes to extract (if applicable). 5 Specify to extract any installation or location codes (if applicable). 6 Indicate whether to update the project database with out-ofdate drawings. 7 Click OK.
Panel bill of materials This report parallels the Schematic BOM report, but deals with panel component and terminal footprint symbols and nameplates. Optionally, it can include schematic items that are not referenced on the panel layouts (for example, field devices). You can customize the scope of the report by filtering on certain location values (for example, report for CAB1 items only), process only a subset of drawings, or include/exclude certain categories of items.
Display option Normal Tallied Format Identical component or component/assemblies are tallied and reported as single line items (Ex: Red pushbutton operator 800EP-F4 with 800E-A3L latch and two 800E-3X10 N.O. contact blocks). Normal Tallied Format (Group by Installation/Location) Identical component or component/assemblies with the same installation/location codes are tallied and reported as single line items. Display in Tallied Purchase List Format Each part becomes its own line item (i.e.
After you click Named Location, type the location code in the box, or click List: Drawing or List: Project to select from a list of used location codes. You can also create a report from multiple location codes. AutoCAD Electrical automatically creates a comma-delimited list for the named location search. Freshen Project Database Specifies for AutoCAD Electrical to update the project database to include any out-of-date drawing files. Format Changes the format of the extracted data.
Installation Codes to Extract Extracts only the information for components with specific installation values. Indicate to process all components that carry part number values, components without an installation code, or only components marked with a location code that matches that entered in the edit box. Wild cards are supported. Once you pick Named Installation, type the installation code in the box or click List: Drawing or List: Project to select from a list of used installation codes.
or has been individually annotated with multi-BOM part numbers, each additional part number is a line item right below the main line item. Access: Click the Panel Reports tool. Select Component from the report list. Click Projects ➤ Reports ➤ Panel Reports. Select Component from the report list. Specify whether to process the project or the active drawing. Options Specifies to include nameplates or terminals in the report.
Freshen Project Database Specifies for AutoCAD Electrical to update the project database to include any out-of-date drawing files. Format Changes the format of the extracted data. The dialog box lists the format files to select from. Missing level/sequence assignments This report lists which component symbols do not have leveling and sequencing information already assigned to them.
Location Codes to Extract Extracts only the information for components with specific location values. Indicate to process all components that carry part number values, components without a location code, or only components marked with a location code that matches that entered in the edit box. For example, BOM report for components marked "OP STA 2". Wild-cards are supported.
Once you pick Named Installation, type the installation code in the box or click List: Drawing or List: Project to select from a list of used installation codes. You can also create a report from multiple installation codes. AutoCAD Electrical automatically creates a comma-delimited list for the named installation search. Location Codes to Extract Extracts only the information for components with specific location values.
Once you pick Named Installation, type the installation code in the box or click List: Drawing or List: Project to select from a list of used installation codes. You can also create a report from multiple installation codes. AutoCAD Electrical automatically creates a comma-delimited list for the named installation search. Location Codes to Extract Extracts only the information for components with specific location values.
Specify whether to process the project, active drawing, or a selected component. Conditions for Report Specifies which conditions the report checks for: whether the panel item is on the schematic, whether the schematic item is on a panel, if there are multiple instances of the terminal, and if there is a mismatch between schematic and panel terminals. Installation Codes to Extract Extracts only the information for components with specific installation values.
Wire connection reports, extracted from the schematic wiring diagrams, can be formatted and inserted next to panel footprint symbols as simple wiring tables. AutoCAD Electrical extracts and formats a small report of wire connection information for the selected components, referencing the wire extract file. If your footprint symbols carry the AutoCAD Electrical X?TERMxx attributes, AutoCAD Electrical reports their XYZ wire connection location.
Redisplay Last Run Displays the previously extracted report. Format Changes the format of the extracted data. The dialog box lists the format files to select from. Overview of format files A Format File (.set file) can be used to pre-format a report for both manually-run reports and automatic reports. When running automatic reports more options within the .set file are used since user input is not required for each report. (Automatic reports are covered in next section).
You can select each file type available for the selected report and enter one file name per type. If multiple file types are selected, when the report is run using the Automatic Reports, each file is created from that report data.
Define format files 1 Click the arrow on the Schematic Reports tool to access the Report Format File Setup tool. 2 Click the Report Format File Setup tool. NOTE You can also open this dialog box by clicking Format File Setup on the Automatic Report Selection (page 993)dialog box. 3 Select which report to generate a format file for or open an existing format file. 4 Specify any report options (if applicable). 5 Select installation or location codes to extract (if applicable).
■ Sort Fields: Controls the sorting order of fields in the report. 8 Save the format file for later retrieval and usage when generating reports. 9 Click Done. Report format file setup - panel bill of material Access: Click the drop-down arrow on the Schematic Reports tool to access the Report Format File Setup tool. Select Bill of Material from the Panel report list. From the Projects menu, select Reports ➤ Report Format File Setup. Select Bill of Material from the Panel report list.
Installation Codes to Extract Extracts only the information for components with specific installation values. Indicate to process all components, components without an installation code, or only components marked with an installation code that matches that entered in the edit box. Wild-cards are supported. Once you pick the Named Installation button, you can simply type the installation code in the box or click the List: Drawing or List: Project button to select from a list of used installation codes.
■ Sort Fields: Controls the sorting order of the fields in the report. NOTE The options are saved in the format file after you click OK on the sub-dialog boxes. If you are working in an unnamed format file, you have to save the data after you select Done in order to keep the changes you have made. Breaks ■ Special breaks: Specifies the value that controls the section break. The drop-down list displays the report-specific content to apply to the special break.
Conditions for Report Specifies which conditions the report checks for: the panel item is not on the schematic, the schematic item is not on a panel, multiple instances of the component, and if there is a mismatch between schematic components and panel components. Installation Codes to Extract Extracts only the information for components with specific installation values.
report, you choose which lines make up this field. Just toggle on and off the specific fields to define the Description. ■ Put on Drawing: Opens the Table Generation Setup dialog box for specifying how to display your report as a table on your drawing. ■ Sort Fields: Controls the sorting order of the fields in the report. NOTE The options are saved in the format file after you click OK on the sub-dialog boxes.
Access: Click the drop-down arrow on the Schematic Reports tool to access the Report Format File Setup tool. Select Component from the Panel report list. From the Projects menu, select Reports ➤ Report Format File Setup. Select Component from the Panel report list. Options Specifies to include nameplates, cables, connectors, terminals, or all of them in the report. You can also indicate to skip components with blank device TAG values or blank manufacturer or catalog values.
The First Section Only button indicates to only show the selected option (such as title line or time and date) on the first section of the report, if multiple sections are used. If not selected, the selected options will be shown on all report sections. ■ Change Report Fields: Changes what data fields are reported and the order in which they appear. You can also change the justification of any column and even the column label.
■ Save As Format File: Saves a format file that you opened and modified with a different name. Report format file setup - missing level/sequence assignments Access: Click the arrow on the Schematic Reports tool to access the Report Format File Setup tool. Select Missing Level/Sequence Assignments from the Panel report list. Click Projects ➤ Reports ➤ Report Format File Setup. Select Missing Level/Sequence Assignments from the Panel report list.
The First Section Only button indicates to only show the selected option (such as title line or time and date) on the first section of the report, if multiple sections are used. If not selected, the selected options are shown on all report sections. ■ Change Report Fields: Changes what data fields are reported and the order in which they appear. You can also change the justification of any column and even the column label. The Description field is handled a little differently than the other fields.
Access: Click the arrow on the Schematic Reports tool to access the Report Format File Setup tool. Select Wire Annotation Exception from the Panel report list. Click Projects ➤ Reports ➤ Report Format File Setup. Select Wire Annotation Exception from the Panel report list. Installation Codes to Extract Extracts only the information for components with specific installation values.
and even the column label. The Description field is handled a little differently than the other fields. This field can be a multi-line field which is actually made up of multiple fields. If you include the Description field in your report, you choose which lines make up this field. Switch on and off the specific fields to define the Description. ■ Put on Drawing: Opens the Table Generation Setup dialog box for specifying how to display your report as a table on your drawing.
or only components marked with an installation code that matches that entered in the edit box. Wild-cards are supported. Once you pick the Named Installation button, you can simply type the installation code in the box or click the List: Drawing or List: Project button to select from a list of used installation codes. Location Codes to Extract Extracts only the information for components with specific location values.
Breaks ■ Special breaks: Specifies the value that controls the section break. The drop-down list displays the report-specific content to apply to the special break. ■ Add Special break values to header: Adds the special break value to the page header. For example, if you select a special break of Installation/Location, the values provided for these devices in the panel are displayed in the report section header.
Installation Codes to Extract Extracts only the information for components with specific installation values. Indicate to process all components, components without an installation code, or only components marked with an installation code that matches that entered in the edit box. Wild-cards are supported. Once you pick the Named Installation button, you can simply type the installation code in the box or click the List: Drawing or List: Project button to select from a list of used installation codes.
NOTE The options are saved in the format file after you click OK on the sub-dialog boxes. If you are working in an unnamed format file, you have to save the data after you select Done in order to keep the changes you have made. Breaks ■ Special breaks: Specifies the value that controls the section break. The drop-down list displays the report-specific content to apply to the special break. ■ Add Special break values to header: Adds the special break value to the page header.
Installation Codes to Extract Extracts only the information for components with specific installation values. Indicate to process all components, components without an installation code, or only components marked with an installation code that matches that entered in the edit box. Wild-cards are supported. Once you pick the Named Installation button, you can simply type the installation code in the box or click the List: Drawing or List: Project button to select from a list of used installation codes.
NOTE The options are saved in the format file after you click OK on the sub-dialog boxes. If you are working in an unnamed format file, you have to save the data after you select Done in order to keep the changes you have made. Breaks ■ Special breaks: Specifies the value that controls the section break. The drop-down list displays the report-specific content to apply to the special break. ■ Add Special break values to header: Adds the special break value to the page header.
Report options ■ Save Report to File: Saves the report to a file. Select the type of output file from the Save Report to File dialog box. You can define multiple file outputs using this dialog box. Choose from: ASCII report (.rep), Comma Delimited (.csv), Excel spreadsheet (.xls), Access database (.mdb), and XML (.xml) format. The First Section Only button indicates to only show the selected option (such as title line or time and date) on the first section of the report, if multiple sections are used.
Access: Click the arrow on the Schematic Reports tool to access the Report Format File Setup tool. Select Bill of Material from the Schematic report list. From the Projects menu, select Reports ➤ Report Format File Setup. Select Bill of Material from the Schematic report list. Include options Specifies to include cables, connectors, or both in the report.
Location Codes to Extract Extracts only the information for components with specific location values. Indicate to process all components, components without a location code, or only components marked with a location code that matches that entered in the edit box. Wild-cards are supported. Once you click Named Location, you can type the location code in the box or click List: Drawing or List: Project to select from a list of used location codes.
Format File Format files define specific criteria applied to the report prior to generating the report to screen, printer, file, or automatic generation. The format files are saved to the 'Documents and Settings\{user name}' sub-directory. ■ Open Format File: Selects format files to edit. The Report Format Settings File Selection dialog box opens and displays a list of format files (.set) in the user sub-directory. Select a file to edit from the list and click OK.
■ Put on Drawing: Opens the Table Generation Setup dialog box for specifying how to display your report as a table on your drawing. ■ Sort Fields: Controls the sorting order of the fields in the report. NOTE The options are saved in the format file after you click OK on the sub-dialog boxes. If you are working in an unnamed format file, you have to save the data after you select Done in order to keep the changes you have made.
Access: Click the drop-down arrow on the Schematic Reports tool to access the Report Format File Setup tool. Select Cable Summary from the Schematic report list. From the Projects menu, select Reports ➤ Report Format File Setup. Select Cable Summary from the Schematic report list. Installation Codes to Extract Extracts only the information for components with specific installation values.
and even the column label. If you include the Description field in your report, you choose which lines make up this field. Just toggle on and off the specific fields to define the Description. ■ Put on Drawing: Opens the Table Generation Setup dialog box for specifying how to display your report as a table on your drawing. ■ Sort Fields: Controls the sorting order of the fields in the report. NOTE The options are saved in the format file after you click OK on the sub-dialog boxes.
Report format file setup - schematic PLC I/O component connection Access: Click the drop-down arrow on the Schematic Reports tool to access the Report Format File Setup tool. Select PLC I/O Component Connection from the Schematic report list. From the Projects menu, select Reports ➤ Report Format File Setup. Select PLC I/O Component Connection from the Schematic report list. Installation Codes to Extract Extracts only the information for components with specific installation values.
multiple sections are used. If not selected, the selected options will be shown on all report sections. ■ Change Report Fields: Changes what data fields are reported and the order in which they appear. You can also change the justification of any column and even the column label. If you include the Description field in your report, you choose which lines make up this field. Just toggle on and off the specific fields to define the Description.
■ Save As Format File: Saves a format file that you opened and modified with a different name. Report format file setup - schematic component wire list Access: Click the drop-down arrow on the Schematic Reports tool to access the Report Format File Setup tool. Select Component Wire List from the Schematic report list. From the Projects menu, select Reports ➤ Report Format File Setup. Select Component Wire List from the Schematic report list.
Report options ■ Save Report to File: Saves the report to a file. Select the type of output file from the Save Report to File dialog box. You can define multiple file outputs using this dialog box. Choose from: ASCII report (.rep), Comma Delimited (.csv), Excel spreadsheet (.xls), Access database (.mdb), and XML (.xml) format. The First Section Only button indicates to only show the selected option (such as title line or time and date) on the first section of the report, if multiple sections are used.
Format File Format files define specific criteria applied to the report prior to generating the report to screen, printer, file, or automatic generation. The format files are saved to the 'Documents and Settings\{user name}' sub-directory. ■ Open Format File: Selects format files to edit. The Report Format Settings File Selection dialog box opens and displays a list of format files (.set) in the user sub-directory. Select a file to edit from the list and click OK.
only components marked with a location code that matches that entered in the edit box. Wild-cards are supported. Once you pick the Named Location button, you can simply type the location code in the box or click the List: Drawing or List: Project button to select from a list of used location codes. Report options ■ Save Report to File: Saves the report to a file. Select the type of output file from the Save Report to File dialog box. You can define multiple file outputs using this dialog box.
Format File Format files define specific criteria applied to the report prior to generating the report to screen, printer, file, or automatic generation. The format files are saved to the 'Documents and Settings\{user name}' sub-directory. ■ Open Format File: Selects format files to edit. The Report Format Settings File Selection dialog box opens and displays a list of format files (.set) in the user sub-directory. Select a file to edit from the list and click OK.
Once you pick the Named Location button, you can simply type the location code in the box or click the List: Drawing or List: Project button to select from a list of used location codes. Report options ■ Save Report to File: Saves the report to a file. Select the type of output file from the Save Report to File dialog box. You can define multiple file outputs using this dialog box. Choose from: ASCII report (.rep), Comma Delimited (.csv), Excel spreadsheet (.xls), Access database (.mdb), and XML (.
Format File Format files define specific criteria applied to the report prior to generating the report to screen, printer, file, or automatic generation. The format files are saved to the 'Documents and Settings\{user name}' sub-directory. ■ Open Format File: Selects format files to edit. The Report Format Settings File Selection dialog box opens and displays a list of format files (.set) in the user sub-directory. Select a file to edit from the list and click OK.
Once you pick the Named Location button, you can simply type the location code in the box or click the List: Drawing or List: Project button to select from a list of used location codes. Report options ■ Save Report to File: Saves the report to a file. Select the type of output file from the Save Report to File dialog box. You can define multiple file outputs using this dialog box. Choose from: ASCII report (.rep), Comma Delimited (.csv), Excel spreadsheet (.xls), Access database (.mdb), and XML (.
Format File Format files define specific criteria applied to the report prior to generating the report to screen, printer, file, or automatic generation. The format files are saved to the 'Documents and Settings\{user name}' sub-directory. ■ Open Format File: Selects format files to edit. The Report Format Settings File Selection dialog box opens and displays a list of format files (.set) in the user sub-directory. Select a file to edit from the list and click OK.
Location Codes to Extract Extracts only the information for components with specific location values. Indicate to process all components, components without a location code, or only components marked with a location code that matches that entered in the edit box. Wild-cards are supported. Once you pick the Named Location button, you can simply type the location code in the box or click the List: Drawing or List: Project button to select from a list of used location codes.
■ Add Special break values to header: Adds the special break value to the page header. For example, if you select a special break of Installation/Location, the values provided for these devices in the schematic are displayed in the report section header. Format File Format files define specific criteria applied to the report prior to generating the report to screen, printer, file, or automatic generation. The format files are saved to the 'Documents and Settings\{user name}' sub-directory.
Once you pick the Named Installation button, you can simply type the installation code in the box or click the List: Drawing or List: Project button to select from a list of used installation codes. Location Codes to Extract Extracts only the information for components with specific location values. Indicate to process all components, components without a location code, or only components marked with a location code that matches that entered in the edit box. Wild-cards are supported.
Breaks ■ Special breaks: Specifies the value that controls the section break. The drop-down list displays the report-specific content to apply to the special break. ■ Add Special break values to header: Adds the special break value to the page header. For example, if you select a special break of Installation/Location, the values provided for these devices in the schematic are displayed in the report section header.
The First Section Only button indicates to only show the selected option (such as title line or time and date) on the first section of the report, if multiple sections are used. If not selected, the selected options will be shown on all report sections. ■ Change Report Fields: Changes what data fields are reported and the order in which they appear. You can also change the justification of any column and even the column label.
Access: From the Projects menu, select Reports ➤ Report Format File Setup. Select PLC I/O Address and Descriptions from the Schematic report list. Installation Codes to Extract Extracts only the information for components with specific installation values. Indicate to process all components, components without an installation code, or only components marked with an installation code that matches that entered in the edit box. Wild-cards are supported.
■ Put on Drawing: Opens the Table Generation Setup dialog box for specifying how to display your report as a table on your drawing. ■ Sort Fields: Controls the sorting order of the fields in the report. NOTE The options are saved in the format file after you click OK on the sub-dialog boxes. If you are working in an unnamed format file, you have to save the data after you select Done in order to keep the changes you have made.
Access: Click the drop-down arrow on the Schematic Reports tool to access the Report Format File Setup tool. Select Terminal Numbers from the Schematic report list. From the Projects menu, select Reports ➤ Report Format File Setup. Select Terminal Numbers from the Schematic report list. Installation Codes to Extract Extracts only the information for components with specific installation values.
and even the column label. If you include the Description field in your report, you choose which lines make up this field. Just toggle on and off the specific fields to define the Description. ■ Put on Drawing: Opens the Table Generation Setup dialog box for specifying how to display your report as a table on your drawing. ■ Sort Fields: Controls the sorting order of the fields in the report. NOTE The options are saved in the format file after you click OK on the sub-dialog boxes.
Access: Click the drop-down arrow on the Schematic Reports tool to access the Report Format File Setup tool. Select Terminal Plan from the Schematic report list. From the Projects menu, select Reports ➤ Report Format File Setup. Select Terminal Plan from the Schematic report list. Installation Codes to Extract Extracts only the information for components with specific installation values.
and even the column label. If you include the Description field in your report, you choose which lines make up this field. Just toggle on and off the specific fields to define the Description. ■ Put on Drawing: Opens the Table Generation Setup dialog box for specifying how to display your report as a table on your drawing. ■ Sort Fields: Controls the sorting order of the fields in the report. NOTE The options are saved in the format file after you click OK on the sub-dialog boxes.
Report format file setup - schematic PLC modules used so far Access: Click the drop-down arrow on the Schematic Reports tool to access the Report Format File Setup tool. Select PLC Modules Used So Far from the Schematic report list. From the Projects menu, select Reports ➤ Report Format File Setup. Select PLC Modules Used So Far from the Schematic report list. Installation Codes to Extract Extracts only the information for components with specific installation values.
multiple sections are used. If not selected, the selected options will be shown on all report sections. ■ Change Report Fields: Changes what data fields are reported and the order in which they appear. You can also change the justification of any column and even the column label. If you include the Description field in your report, you choose which lines make up this field. Just toggle on and off the specific fields to define the Description.
Report format file setup - schematic wire label The options are saved in the format file after you click OK on the dialog boxes. If you are working in an unnamed format file, you must save the data after you click Done to keep the changes you made. Access: Click the arrow on the Schematic Reports tool to access the Report Format File Setup tool. Select Wire Label from the Schematic report list. From the Projects menu, select Reports ➤ Report Format File Setup.
Save Report to File Saves the report to a file. Select the type of output file from the Save Report to File dialog box. You can define multiple file outputs. Choose from: ASCII report (.rep), Comma Delimited (.csv), Excel spreadsheet (.xls), Access database (.mdb), and XML (.xml) format. First Section Only shows only the selected option (such as title line or time and date) on the first section of the report if multiple sections are used.
Location Codes to Extract Extracts only the information for components with specific location values. Indicate to process all components, components without a location code, or only components marked with a location code that matches that entered in the edit box. Wild-cards are supported. Once you click Named Location, you can type the location code in the box or click List: Drawing or List: Project to select from a list of used location codes.
drawings. If you are running multiple reports with multiple table output, each report gets its own. You can specify the first drawing name for any necessary new drawings and the template name. Subsequent drawing names generate automatically by incrementing the previous drawing's name. If you frequently run the same group of reports you can save the set of format files as a Report Grouping.
Generate a report using format files 1 Click the arrow on the Schematic Reports tool to access the Automatic Report Selection tool. 2 Click the Automatic Report Selection tool. 3 Select which report to generate from the schematic or panel report list. 4 Specify the format file to use for the selected report. If there aren't any format files to select from, you must click the Format File Setup button to create and save a format file.
This tool allows you to run multiple reports at one time. This can be used to generate any number of output files or to automatically place report tables on drawings. Access: Click the arrow on the Schematic Reports tool to access the Automatic Report Selection tool. From the Projects menu, select Reports ➤ Automatic Report Selection. NOTE All drawings are automatically added to the bottom of the Project Listing.
Selected Reports Displays the current active listing of all reports for the report generation. The list displays the report name and format file name, as well as indicators that show if the report output is a file or table. For the File and Table Output options, an 'X' indicates that the automatic generation will run that portion, while an 'O' indicates that it will not run that portion.
Modify spreadsheet data Use this to edit component tags, descriptions, catalog assignments, wire numbers, or PLC I/O descriptions from a spreadsheet and then have your edits update your drawings.
or blank values on existing components, terminals, PLC I/O modules, and wire numbers but it cannot insert new items into the drawings. 1 Click the arrow on the Schematic Reports tool to access the Export to Spreadsheet tool. 2 Click the Export to Spreadsheet tool. 3 Select the data category to export. If you select General, information for the categories marked with an asterisk (*) is extracted. Each category is saved to a separate sheet (spreadsheet format) or table (database format).
During the import function, AutoCAD Electrical checks for these new attributes and updates them with data you entered into the spreadsheet. 10 Click the arrow on the Schematic Reports tool to access the Update from Spreadsheet tool. 11 Click the Update from Spreadsheet tool. 12 Select the spreadsheet and click Open. 13 In the Update Drawings per Spreadsheet Data dialog box, specify to import the spreadsheet data for the current drawing or the entire project.
This utility copies the selected data category to a comma-delimited, Excel XLS, or Access MDB file format for editing. Access: Click the drop-down arrow on the Schematic Reports tool to access the Export to Spreadsheet tool. From the Projects menu, select Export to Spreadsheet ➤ Export to Spreadsheet. Limitation: Your spreadsheet edits can update existing or blank values on existing components, terminals, PLC I/O modules, and wire numbers but it cannot insert new items into the drawings.
This utility copies all the data categories to a comma-delimited, Excel XLS, or Access MDB file format for editing. Access: Click the arrow on the Schematic Reports tool to access the Export to Spreadsheet tool. Select General from the list. From the Projects menu, select Export to Spreadsheet ➤ Export to Spreadsheet. Select General from the list. Data export for Specifies to export the data for the active drawing or the entire project. Output format Specifies the format for outputting the spreadsheet.
Output format Specifies the format for outputting the spreadsheet. Location Codes to extract Extracts only the information for components with specific location values. After you pick Named Location, type the location code in the box or click List: Drawing or List: Project to select from a list of used location codes. You can also create a report from multiple location codes. AutoCAD Electrical automatically creates a comma-delimited list for the named location search.
This utility copies PLC I/O address/descriptions to a comma-delimited, Excel XLS, or Access MDB file format for editing. Access: Click the arrow on the Schematic Reports tool to access the Export to Spreadsheet tool. Select PLC I/O address/descriptions from the list. From the Projects menu, select Export to Spreadsheet ➤ Export to Spreadsheet. Select PLC I/O address/descriptions from the list. Data export for Specifies to export the data for the active drawing or the entire project.
Output format Specifies the format for outputting the spreadsheet. Location Codes to extract Extracts only the information for components with specific location values. After you pick Named Location, type the location code in the box or click List: Drawing or List: Project to select from a list of used location codes. You can also create a report from multiple location codes. AutoCAD Electrical automatically creates a comma-delimited list for the named location search.
This utility copies terminals to a comma-delimited, Excel XLS, or Access MDB file format for editing. Access: Click the arrow on the Schematic Reports tool to access the Export to Spreadsheet tool. Select Terminals from the list. From the Projects menu, select Export to Spreadsheet ➤ Export to Spreadsheet. Select Terminals from the list. Data export for Specifies to export the data for the active drawing or the entire project. Output format Specifies the format for outputting the spreadsheet.
Flip any updated tag/wire number values to fixed Fixes all updated tag or wire number values. A fixed component tag does not update when the Re-tag Update command is run. The tag name keeps its fixed value. Create user-defined attributes You can define your own attributes onto AutoCAD Electrical block files and modify user-defined attributes using the AutoCAD Attribute Edit command or the Show/Edit Miscellaneous option on the AutoCAD Electrical Insert/Edit Component dialog box.
Component dialog box or using the Enhanced Attribute Editor tool accessed by double-clicking on an AutoCAD block in the drawing. Attributes can then be added to the user defined attribute list for report generation. 1 Click the arrow on the Schematic Reports tool to access the User Defined Attribute List tool. 2 Click the User Defined Attribute List tool. 3 In the User Defined Attribute List dialog box, click inside the Attribute Tag column for Row 1. Click Pick. 4 Select the attribute from the drawing.
NOTE Attributes can be added to existing block files using the Add Attribute tool or the AutoCAD ATTDEF command. Edit attributes using the Show/Edit Miscellaneous option in the Insert/Edit Component dialog box or using the Enhanced Attribute Editor tool accessed by double-clicking an AutoCAD Electrical block in the drawing. Access: Click the Schematic Reports tool to access the User Defined Attribute List tool. From the Projects menu, select Reports ➤ User Defined Attribute List.
cell to copy, cut, or paste a value. The column title can be modified inside the Change Report Format dialog box. NOTE If left blank, the attribute tag is used as the column header. Pick Selects an attribute from the drawing to use as the Attribute Tag. Open Browses for an existing User Defined Attribute List file for editing. Save As Creates a new User Defined Attribute List file with extension .wda. Right-click options Pick Allows selection of an attribute from the drawing.
mapping from the electrical data to the mechanical assembly. Make sure the following are correctly set up before running the report. Pin numbers on component symbols The pin numbers on the component symbols in AutoCAD Electrical must correspond to the Pin Name property on the equivalent pin in Autodesk Inventor Professional Cable & Harness. Use the Pin Properties dialog box in Autodesk Inventor Professional Cable & Harness to change the pin name property.
schematic must be fixed, mapped to a wire in the Cable & Harness Wire Library, and have distinct wires into the same pin. NOTE The wire number must be unique for individual From and To connections and a wire network ladder style cannot be used. You can define attributes and properties on a wire that can map to properties when exported to Autodesk Inventor Professional. These attributes can be wire definition (wire type) or wire occurrence specific. Use the Edit Wire Number tool to edit the wire number.
The cable occurrence definition is made up of one parent symbol and multiple children symbols depending on the number of wire included. Upon selection of a catalog number from the AutoCAD Electrical catalog database, component definition properties can be applied to the component occurrence and the information exported into the XML file. NOTE When you apply additional parts to the component occurrence, their respective component definition properties can also be applied in the overall component occurrence.
AutoCAD Electrical attributes mapped to Autodesk Inventor Professional properties There are 4 Autodesk Inventor Professional assembly entity types that get AutoCAD Electrical attributes: components, wires, cable, and splices.
RATING1-12 Occurrence Rating information associated to the component definition FAMILY Definition Family code definition - FAMILY attribute on AutoCAD Electrical block file WDBLKNAM Definition Block name definition used for catalog lookup WIRENO Occurrence Unique wire number ID - AutoCAD Electrical wire number LAYER NAME Occurrence Wire layer name (AutoCAD Layer) Wire Definition name in Autodesk Inventor Professional Layer Name - Wire Properties Xrecords Definition Wire layer properties (Xr
a numeric value along with the conductor color DESC1- DESC3 Occurrence Descriptions used to describe the component CAT Occurrence Main AutoCAD Electrical catalog number - Part Number property name in Autodesk Inventor Professional MFG Occurrence Manufacturer - Vendor of Part Number property name in Autodesk Inventor Professional ASSYCODE Occurrence Assembly code for part - if part is a subset of an assembly CAT01-10 Occurrence Multiple BOM part numbers MFG01-10 Occurrence Multiple BOM Manuf
TAG1 Occurrence Component TAG - RefDes property name DESC1- DESC3 Occurrence Descriptions used to describe the component CAT Occurrence Main AutoCAD Electrical catalog number - Part Number property name in Autodesk Inventor Professional MFG Occurrence Manufacturer - Vendor of Part Number property name in Autodesk Inventor Professional ASSYCODE Occurrence Assembly code for part - if part is a subset of an assembly CAT01-10 Occurrence Multiple BOM part numbers MFG01-10 Occurrence Multiple
Output reports to Autodesk Inventor Professional Cable and Harness Use this tool to export component, connector, wiring/cable, and splice data from your 2D connector drawing into an XML file that can then be imported into Autodesk Inventor Professional to aid in the generation of a cable and harness assembly. NOTE You must first configure wire numbering to be "On per Wire Basis" for export and set up the appropriate variables before running the report.
2 In the Create/Edit Wire Type dialog box, click Add Existing Layer to add the wire line layers in use in the schematic to the list to be recognized as layers by AutoCAD Electrical. 3 In the Layers for Line Wires dialog box, enter the layer name or pick a wire from the existing layer list. A wildcard used in the name selects a group of layers. For example, RED_* selects all layers that begin with "RED_." 4 Click OK. 5 In the Create/Edit Wire Type dialog box, click OK.
Automatic wire numbering: 1 Click the Insert Wire Numbers tool. 2 In the Wire Tagging dialog box, select Insert as Fixed if it is not already selected. 3 Click Project-wide, Drawing-wide, or Pick Individual Wires depending on which method you want to use to update your wire numbers. Manually inserting wire numbers: 1 Click the Edit Wire Number tool. 2 Click a wire that does not currently have a wire number assigned to it.
NOTE You must first configure wire numbering to be "On per Wire Basis" for export and set up the appropriate variables before running the report. Access: Click the arrow on the Schematic Reports tool to access the Autodesk Inventor Professional Export tool. From the Projects menu, select Reports ➤ Autodesk Inventor Professional Export. Select to export the active drawing or the entire project.
1020
15 Panel Layout In this chapter ■ Overview of panel layouts ■ Panel drawing configuration and defaults ■ Relationship between schematic drawings and panel layouts ■ Overview of footprint attributes/Xdata ■ Footprint/Terminal Insertion ■ Layout Wire Connection Annotation ■ Lookup Files ■ Item Numbers/Balloons ■ Nameplates ■ Panel Leveling/Sequencing Tools 1021
Overview of panel layouts Panel Layout tools create intelligent mechanical / panel layout drawings. Here are the key features: ■ Layouts can be driven from information carried on the AutoCAD Electrical schematic wiring diagram drawings or they can be constructed independently of schematics. ■ AutoCAD Electrical places no requirements on special naming or attribute requirements on mechanical footprint symbols.
Using the pull-down menu Select the various panel layout commands from AutoCAD Electrical's Panel Layout menu. Using the toolbar If the Panel Layout toolbar is not visible, you can turn it on by right-clicking on a toolbar and selecting ACE:Panel Layout.
Panel Reports Miscellaneous Panel Tools Panel Configuration Using the mouse Put your cursor over any panel component and click your right mouse button for a quick shortcut to AutoCAD Electrical commands. A component-specific menu displays at your cursor position. Double-click on the component itself to edit that component. The AutoCAD Electrical double-click feature is disabled if AutoCAD's "selection" mode is set to "Noun/Verb selection" (i.e. system variable PICKFIRST is set to 1).
NOTE You can make this block visible by typing ATTMODE at the AutoCAD command line prompt, changing the value from 1 to 2, and then typing REGEN. Access: Click the Panel Configuration tool. From the Panel Layout menu, select Panel Configuration. There are a few settings related to panel layout drawings that can be modified through the Panel Configuration dialog box. These settings are retrieved and saved back to attributes on the non-visible block named WD_PNLM.
Footprint insert Specifies the default insert scale for panel footprint symbols. Also, defines how to determine the scale of the attribute template added on the fly when the footprint is inserted. Select a scale factor, 1.0 to insert as is, or select to scale to a specific text height. Panel wire connection report XYZ offset reference Specifies the x, y, or z-offset value for the mtext added next to a panel component when adding the wire connection information.
The top and bottom ones are assigned an Allen-Bradley part number for a 30mm pilot light (catalog part number 800H-PR16R) and the middle one is given a part number for a smaller, 22.5mm pilot light (catalog part number 800MR-P16RS). The manufacturer and catalog part number assignments are carried on invisible attributes MFG and CAT on each instance of the repeated red pilot light symbol. All three symbols look the same on the schematic since they are the same AutoCAD block symbol.
There are two key elements that make this work: ■ Vendor footprint library (.dwg) files - two symbols from this library are shown here. These are for Allen-Bradley red pilot lights 30mm and 22.5mm styles respectively. ■ Footprint mapping file (footprint_lookup.mdb) - a table is assigned to each manufacturer. Overview of footprint attributes/Xdata AutoCAD Electrical doesn't have attribute or naming requirements for the mechanical footprint block symbols.
FPT identifies block as a terminal footprint NP identifies block as a nameplate P_TAG1 pnl component tag (used on component footprints and nameplates) DESC1-3 description line 1 - 3 (60 char max) P_ITEM item/detail number MFG manufacturer name (24 char max) CAT catalog number (60 char max) ASSYCODE optional assembly code (internal use by AutoCAD Electrical) INST installation code (24 char max) LOC location code (16 char max) MOUNT mount location code (24 char max) GROUPWITH group loca
Minimum attribute/Xdata requirements Below are the minimum requirements for AutoCAD Electrical to recognize a block as a panel footprint or nameplate.
box redisplays. Repeat the process to quickly convert other pieces of Xdata into visible attributes. Xdata Displays all AutoCAD Electrical-related pieces of extended entity data (Xdata). Height Specifies the height for the attribute value. Justification Specifies the justification for the attribute value. Visibility Indicates whether the attribute will be visible on the screen. Ratings Opens a sub-dialog for setting the values for rating attributes.
Let your project set of schematic wiring diagrams help drive the panel layout. Component catalog number information comes directly from manufacturer and catalog data carried on each electrical component. AutoCAD Electrical finds a match for the manufacturer and catalog number combination to determine the correct footprint block to insert. If a copy of the schematic data is not in memory, then AutoCAD Electrical prompts you to select which schematic data you want to extract.
wd_picklist.mdb and can be edited with Access or from Add/Edit/Delete along the bottom of the pick list's dialog box. Insert footprints from equipment lists Panel Layout ➤ Insert Footprint (Lists) ➤ Insert Footprint (Equipment List) This tool lists data extracted from your equipment list, finds the appropriate panel symbol by querying the footprint_lookup.mdb, and inserts the panel footprints at your pick point.
4 Click the arrow on the Insert Component Footprint tool to access the Insert Footprint (Schematic List) tool. 5 Click the Insert Footprint (Schematic List) tool. 6 In the Schematic Components List ➤ Panel Layout Insert dialog box, select Project and click OK. 7 In the Select Drawings to Process dialog box, select the drawing that has the schematic symbol you inserted. Click Process, and then click OK.
12 In the Schematic Components dialog box, click Close. Syntax for encoding an icon menu page display for footprint selection (wdmenu "n:/myfolder/my_lookup_menu.dat" 5) where "n:/myfolder/my_lookup_menu.dat" = your AutoCAD Electrical icon menu file 5 = the "*Mx" page number in that menu (x = 5) This is entered into the third edit box, the one labeled "Footprint block name," where the AutoCAD block name normally goes.
Insert panel footprints using vendor menus 1 Click the Insert Footprint (Manufacturer Menu) tool. NOTE This dialog box is also available by clicking Vendor Menu Select on the Vendor Panel Footprint dialog box after a vendor is first selected. In the Vendor Menu Selection dialog box, select the vendor menu to use and click OK. You can select one from the list or click Browse to search for a vendor (.pnl) menu file.
Select an icon picture or the component type from the Menu tree structure. The main menu in the tree structure is displayed as the menu heading just above the menu tree structure. Tabs Menu ■ Menu: Changes the visibility of the Menu tree view. ■ Up one level: Displays the menu that is one level before the current menu in the Menu tree view. This is unavailable if the main menu is selected in the Menu tree view. ■ Views: Changes the view display for the Symbol Preview window and Recently Used window.
No edit dialog Turns off the Insert/Edit Component dialog box when inserting symbols onto the drawing. To add component detail later, click the Edit Component tool, and select the component to edit. No tag Inserts the component, un-tagged (i.e. without assigning a unique Component Tag). The untagged value that displays is the component's TAG1/TAG2 default value. To add component detail later, click the Edit Component tool, and select the component to edit.
■ Properties: Opens a Properties dialog box to view the existing menu or submenu properties like the menu name, image or submenu title. Use the Icon Menu Wizard to change any menu properties. Options for the Symbol Preview window Right-click an icon or in empty space in the Symbol Preview window to display the following options: ■ View: Changes the view display for the Symbol Preview window and Recently Used window. The current view option is indicated with a check mark.
NOTE Assigning short installation or location codes to components like "PNL" and "FIELD" allow you to later take full advantage of the AutoCAD Electrical ability to create installation or location-specific BOM and component lists. Installation Changes the installation code(s). Click Browse to search the active drawing, entire project and an external list (default.inst) for installation codes. Pick from the list to automatically update the component with the installation code.
NOTE You cannot associate terminals using the Add/Modify or Break Out Panel options when you insert a terminal using the Insert Terminal (Schematic List) tool. However, once the terminal is inserted onto the drawing, you can modify the associations using these tools.. Add/Modify Displays the Add/Modify Associations dialog box where you can select terminal strips and their respective blocks to make an association to the terminal symbol being inserted or edited.
Number Lists the terminal numbers defined in the association. Only one terminal number is allowed per level and each level displays its respective terminal number or text. Panel terminal symbols do not display terminal numbers. PinL Lists the pin numbers defined left side of the terminal block. This data is entered into the L0nPINL attribute if present; otherwise, it is placed in the xdata. PinR Lists the pin numbers defined on the right side of the terminal block.
Catalog Lookup Opens the terminal’s catalog database from which you can select the Manufacturer and Catalog values. Search the database for a specific catalog item to assign to the selected terminal. Database queries are set up in the 3 lists across the top of the dialog with the database hits listed in the dialog box's main window. Drawing Lists the part numbers used for similar terminals in the current drawing. Project Lists the part numbers used for similar terminals in the project.
Descriptions Specifies the optional description attribute text to assign to the terminal block (up to 3 lines of text can be specified). Click Browse to search for all terminal descriptions in the project or active drawing. Select the description you want to copy to the edited terminal block by selecting it in the list and clicking OK. Ratings Specifies values for each ratings attribute. You can enter up to 12 ratings attributes on a terminal. Select Show All Ratings to display a list of default values.
program looks at each selected panel component looking for a matching schematic component in the same way. Access: Click the arrow on the Insert Component Footprint tool to access the Insert Footprint (Schematic List) tool. From the Panel Layout menu, select Insert Footprint (Schematic List). If you start with panel layouts before you create schematics, schematic pick list data is not available to automate footprint selection and annotation.
needs to be used so you have to select to make catalog assignments, select or create a footprint, or create a lookup entry on the fly. Access: Click the arrow on the Insert Component Footprint tool to access the Insert Footprint (Icon Menu) tool. Select the footprint to insert. Click the arrow on the Insert Component Footprint tool to access the Insert Footprint (Manual) tool. From the Panel Layout menu, select Insert Footprint (Icon Menu). Select the footprint to insert.
Pick Pick a non-AutoCAD Electrical block on the drawing to be instantly changed into a smart AutoCAD Electrical block. ABECAD Pick your own ABECAD install to link to. Choice C A footprint lookup database table matches MFG/CAT part number combinations with their appropriate footprint blocks. In cases where a MFG/CAT number is given but isn't in a lookup file, AutoCAD Electrical enables this option. There are two categories of panel footprint lookup files: manufacturer and miscellaneous.
up a footprint lookup database file or manually draw a simple footprint representation. Access: Click the arrow on the Insert Footprint tool to access the Insert Footprint (Icon Menu) tool. Select the footprint to insert and specify the insertion point on the drawing. Click the Edit Footprint tool. Select the footprint or nameplate to edit. Click Panel Layout ➤ Insert Footprint (Icon Menu). Select the footprint to insert and specify the insertion point on the drawing. Click Panel Layout ➤ Edit Footprint.
component's catalog assignment is set as the default (assuming a previous one was made during the current editing session). Manufacturer Lists the manufacturer number for the footprint. Enter a value or select one from the Catalog lookup. Catalog Lists the catalog number for the footprint. Enter a value or select one from the Catalog lookup. Assembly Lists the assembly code for the footprint. The Assembly code is used to link multiple part numbers together.
Rating Specifies values for each ratings attribute. You can enter up to 12 ratings attributes on a terminal. Select Show All Ratings to display a list of default values. NOTE If this button is unavailable, the component you are editing does not carry any rating attributes. Component Tag Any existing tags appear in the edit box. To define the component tag, edit the existing tag or type a specific tag in the edit box. Select Fixed if you don't want this tag to be updated on a retag.
Assign short installation codes to components like "PNL" and "FIELD" so you can take full advantage of the AutoCAD Electrical ability to create location-specific BOM and component lists later. Switch Positions Labels the positions of a selector switch. Show/Edit Miscellaneous View or edit any attributes that are not predefined AutoCAD Electrical attributes.
Catalog Data Specifies the catalog part number information such as the manufacturer and catalog number. Count Specifies the quantity number for the extra part number (blank=1). This value gets inserted into a BOM report's "SUBQTY" column. Unit Specifies the unit of measure, which can be displayed in the component list report. Parts Catalog Lookup Lists the catalog database table that is to be referenced for the description information for the given Manufacturer/Catalog/Assembly combination.
This displays the order in which the extra part numbers will appear in the various AutoCAD Electrical reports. You can add up to 99 additional part number assignments to a component.. Access: On the Insert/Edit Component or Panel Layout - Component Insert/Edit dialog box, Catalog Data section, click Multiple Catalog. Click List Sequential Code on the Multiple Bill of Material Information dialog box.
Catalog Check Performs a Bill of Material check and displays the result. This is enabled if the selected panel component contains catalog data. Footprint scale Specifies the block insert scale. (1.0 = full) Rotate Specifies the block rotation angle. (blank = "ask") External Program Executes an external user routine to retrieve the footprint block name and catalog data. Requires the WD_XCAT reference in the wd.env and a user AutoLISP file to manage the data send/receive with the external routine.
Convert Existing Inserts selected entry's data on an existing "dumb" block insert. This instantly converts the block to a smart AutoCAD Electrical footprint. Pick File Allows you to pick a file for the insert. Select an existing AutoCAD Electrical extracted panel component list file or extract a fresh copy of panel component data from the current project's database.
paths (or you can enter the full path). If the new record is similar to an existing record, highlight the existing record before you click Add. Edit Opens a dialog box for editing an existing record. Highlight the record and click Edit. Modify the record in the displayed dialog box. Delete Removes an existing record. Schematic terminals list panel layout insert This report provides error checking between the schematic terminals and panel layout terminals.
Location Codes to extract Extracts only the information for components with specific location values. Once you pick Named Location, type the location code in the box or click List: Drawing or List: Project to select from a list of used location codes. You can also create a report from multiple location codes. AutoCAD Electrical automatically creates a comma-delimited list for the named location search.
Vendor menu selection This can save a lot of time if you frequently use the same vendor and panel components. You can even apply this method to create client-specific menus making it easier to use the vendor or components that each client prefers. Access: On the Panel Layout toolbar, click the arrow on the Insert Component Footprint tool to access the Insert Footprint (Manufacturer Menu) tool. Click Panel Layout ➤ Insert Footprint (Manufacturer Menu).
Clicking an icon inserts the footprint into the active drawing as defined by the command in the .pnl file. Tabs ■ Menu: Changes the visibility of the Menu tree view. ■ Up one level: Displays the menu that is one level before the current menu in the Menu tree view. This is unavailable if the main menu is selected in the Menu tree view. ■ Views: Changes the view display for the Symbol Preview window and Recently Used window. The current view option is indicated with a check mark.
later, click the Edit Component tool, and select the component to edit. Always display previously used menu Indicates to display the previously used menu each time you open the Insert Component dialog box. For example, if you insert a push button from the Push Buttons menu, the next time you open the Insert Component dialog box the Push Button menu displays by default. Scale Specifies the component block insertion scale. This defaults to the value set in the Panel Drawing Configuration dialog box.
■ Properties: (available for icons only) Opens a Properties dialog box to modify the existing symbol icon properties like the icon name/image/block names and so on. Use the Icon Menu Wizard to change any icon properties. Insert a copy of a panel footprint Use the Copy Footprint tool instead of AutoCAD Copy when a panel component footprint has a balloon or a nameplate associated with it.
NOTE This procedure uses the Copy Location Code tool, but you can use the same steps for any of the Panel Location Copy tools. 1 On the Panel Layout toolbar, click the arrow on the Miscellaneous tool to access the Panel Location Copy tool. 2 Click the Panel Location Copy tool. 3 Click the Copy Location Code tool. 4 In the Copy Installation\Location\Mount\Group to components dialog box, select the code names you want to copy.
This tool lets you do mass copies of location, installation, group, or mount codes to all of the components you select. You either type in the desired code, pick from an on-line list, or pick a similar master component. Access: On the Panel Layout toolbar, click the Miscellaneous Panel Tools tool to access the Panel Location Copy tool. Select the Copy Installation Code, Copy Location Code, Copy Mount Code, or Copy Group Code tool.
Pick Selects a value for the code from a master component's list of values. Use panel templates You can use templates to create a panel layout drawing or to automatically insert attributes to footprints during insertion time. Panel layout template drawings You can set up an AutoCAD template drawing for panel layout drawings with the WD_PNLM block pre-inserted and set up with your own default settings.
the footprint either as visible attribute data (if the target attribute exists) or as nonvisible Xdata if the target attribute does not exist on the footprint block. As AutoCAD Electrical inserts a footprint and prepares to merge this attribute definition template into the block, it attempts to find the center of the inserted block by collecting and averaging the parts and pieces that make up the block. It adds the attribute definition template at this calculated location.
establishes invisible Xdata pointers when these are tied to a footprint, they are properly updated when copied using this utility. 1 Click the arrow on the Miscellaneous Panel Tools tool to access the Insert Panel Assembly tool. 2 Click the Insert Panel Assembly tool. 3 Specify whether to add the intelligence needed for each block to be treated as an AutoCAD Electrical footprint. 4 Click OK. 5 In the Wblocked Assembly to Insert dialog box, select the assembly and click Open.
If you start with panel layouts before you create schematics, schematic pick list data is not available to automate footprint selection and annotation. An alternative is available. If you list your panel components in a spreadsheet and in a format that AutoCAD Electrical expects, this spreadsheet data can become your schematic pick list data for panel layout.
27 ITEM 28 Optional item number assignment (blank) Panel terminals spreadsheet data format The spreadsheet data for panel terminals must be in this order and have 30 columns of data and be saved in a "CSV comma delimited" text format.
28 TERMNO 29 30 Terminal number (blank) WIRENO Optional wire number tied to terminal Previous project's schematic spreadsheet data If your new project is similar to a previous project, you can use the previous project's schematics to create a component or terminal spreadsheet listing. This can then help drive the new project's panel layout. Open the previous project in AutoCAD Electrical. From the Panel Layout menu, select Insert Footprint (Schematic List) or Insert Terminal (Schematic List).
Electrical expects, this spreadsheet data can become your schematic pick list data for panel layout. Extract component list for Specifies to export the data for the active drawing or the entire project. Save list to external file Uses a previous project's schematics to create a component or terminal spreadsheet listing. This can help drive the new project's panel layout. AutoCAD Electrical creates a comma-delimited file of the schematic data.
Sort List Sorts the list of schematic footprints. You can specify four sorts to perform on the list. Reload Reinitializes the display. This causes the dialog box to return to the Schematic components (or terminals) list panel layout insert dialog box. Mark Existing Puts an "x" in the left-hand column position for any listed schematic component (or terminal) tag that already has its footprint inserted on the panel layout and there is an exact on Catalog and Manufacturer values between the two.
External Program Executes external user routine to retrieve footprint block name and/or catalog data. Requires WD_XCAT reference in wd.env and a user AutoLISP file to manage the data send/receive with the external routine. Manual Specifies to manually pick the insertion point. Insert Finds and inserts footprint for highlighted component (or terminal). This is based upon a match between the schematic symbol's catalog part number and an entry in a footprint lookup file.
If a device selected from the schematic extract list has any associated secondary contacts, these contacts are inserted along with the primary component. Use the options within the Device Spacing area to define how you want the first component of each device inserted. Use the options within the Components for Selected Device area to define how you want to insert all the components that are associated with a selected Device Tag.
Move Up Moves the selected component or terminal up one spot in the list. Move Down Moves the selected component or terminal down one spot in the list. Reverse Rearranges the list of terminals in descending order. Re-sort Sorts the list of terminals in ascending order. Merge schematic wire numbers onto footprints AutoCAD Electrical supports a transfer of schematic wire numbers to panel footprint representations.
schematics. Then you may add the wire connection information to the footprint blocks. 1 Click the Panel Configuration tool. 2 Click Panel wire connection report XYZ offset ref Setup. 3 Define the formats for the "From" TERM annotation text and symbol. 4 Specify any additional options to include on the "To" component TagID. 5 View/test the report. 6 Click OK-Project-wide to format the wire connection annotation project-wide.
Format There are two format edit boxes on the dialog. The "Full" format will be used if AutoCAD Electrical does not find the target attributes and inserts MTEXT. The "Partial" format is used if AutoCAD Electrical finds the target attributes (described later). Each format uses parameters that are then replaced with the specific wire information. AutoCAD Electrical provides some pre-defined formats for you to select from the list box at the right.
Add wire information to footprints After you add wire numbers to your schematics and extract this information, you are ready to annotate your panel footprint symbols with this information. The information can be added to the drawing in two different ways. You can build your panel footprint symbols with some target attributes that are used for the wire connection information.
Freshen Updates the wire connection table with the out-ofdate files List Lists the drawings that appear to be out-of-date with the project's wire connection table. Report only (no drawing update) Specifies to update only the report - not the drawing. Location Codes to extract Extracts only the information for components with specific location value(s). Once you pick Named Location, type the location code in the box or click List: Drawing or List: Project to select from a list of used location codes.
%V Cable tag substituted for wire number if cable tag is non-blank. The wire number is displayed when a cable ID doesn't exist. %G Wire color/gauge (or wire layer name) %H Cable wire color substituted for wire number if cable color is non-blank. The wire layer is displayed when a wire conductor in conjunction with a cable ID doesn't exist. %T Terminal strip terminal pin assignment %K Terminal strip TERMDESC text - useful for multi-stack terminals %1 Destination component tag ID.
NOTE You can define the default wire connection text format using the Panel Configuration dialog box. Select Panel Layout ➤ Panel Configuration, and click Panel Wire Connection Report XYZ Offset Reference Setup. Access: Click the Wire Annotation of Panel Footprint tool. Make your selections and click OK. From the Panel Layout menu, select Wire Annotation of Panel Footprint. Make your selections and click OK.
Add terminal description to tag Adds any terminal description value as a suffix. Include installation prefix to IEC tag format Adds any installation value as a prefix. View/Test Allows a preview or test of the report. Suppress any duplicated annotation on each terminal Indicates to hide duplicated annotations so that they do not show on the report. If wire numbering converts to MText The default MText insertion point is the same as the footprint block's insertion point.
representations are supplied as a library of .dwg files and are inserted onto the layouts in the form of AutoCAD block inserts. AutoCAD Electrical makes use of the footprint lookup database (footprint_lookup.mdb) to identify the footprints corresponding to the MANUFACTURER, CATALOG, and ASSEMBLYCODE attribute values of the schematic symbols. The footprint lookup file maps catalog information from a schematic component to a specific panel footprint library symbol. The database content is found at: C:\Documen
5th choice -- AutoCAD search paths Lookup file naming convention AutoCAD Electrical takes the target footprint's MFG code and looks for a table, in your Access schematic_lookup.mdb file format file with that name. For example, if the footprint's MFG value is SQD, then AutoCAD Electrical searches for a schematic lookup table called SQD; manufacturer code of AB yields the table name AB. The alternate table should carry the MFG name with a "_WD" suffix.
Edit footprint lookup files You can make edits and additions to footprint lookup files using the Footprint Database File Editor tool or you can edit them directly using Microsoft Access. 1 Click the arrow on the Miscellaneous Panel Tools tool to access the Footprint Database File Editor tool. 2 Click the Footprint Database File Editor tool. 3 Select the Edit Existing Table button. 4 Select the table to edit and click OK.
Access database file (footprint_lookup.mdb). There is a table for each manufacturer code. Access: Click the arrow on the Miscellaneous Panel Tools tool to access the Footprint Database File Editor tool. From the Panel Layout menu, select Database File Editor ➤ Footprint Database File Editor. Each entry in the table maps a given part number to its footprint block name. The table name must match the manufacturer code.
Add new Opens a sub-dialog box for creating a new record. Fill in the fields as desired. If the footprint block is not in an AutoCAD search path or an AutoCAD Electrical search path, include the part of the path that needs to be appended to one of these search paths (or you can enter the full path). If the new record is similar to an existing record, highlight the existing record before you click on the Add button.
Footprint block name The Block value can be a symbol name or AutoLISP expression. If the footprint block is not in an AutoCAD search path or an AutoCAD Electrical search path, include the part of the path that needs to be appended to one of these search paths (or enter the full path to the footprint block). Browse Locates the block name. Pick Captures the block name if it already exists on the current drawing. Geometry Substitutes a simple on-the-fly generated outline for the matching footprint.
select the Balloon icon from the toolbar and pick somewhere on the footprint block. The footprint's item number is retrieved and then you are prompted to select start/end for a leader. A single item number attribute, B_ITEM, is inserted on the balloon symbol. You can set up a template to have additional visible attributes added to the balloon automatically at insertion time. Create this drawing with the attribute definitions you want to include with the balloon symbol: \wd\panel\wd_ptag_addattr_itemballoon.
Resequence item numbers All Panel components and nameplates are extracted and their item numbers resequenced starting at the value you provide. 1 Click the arrow on the Miscellaneous Panel Tools tool to access the Re-sequence Item Numbers tool. 2 Click the Re-sequence Item Numbers tool. 3 Specify the beginning number to use. 4 Specify to process the data for the current drawing or the entire project. If you select Project, you will be able to select which drawings from within the project.
None (text only) - enter the gap value (the amount of space between the end of the leader line and the text). Text Specifies the text size for the marker. Arrow Specifies the arrowhead and size. Choose the type of arrowhead for the leader from the list and enter the arrowhead size in the box. These values correspond to AutoCAD leader/dimension system variables. Resequence panel item numbers This tool assigns or resequences item number assignments on a drawing or project.
Insert nameplates A nameplate is inserted on to the drawing as a block. It can either be referenced to an existing component footprint block or inserted as a stand-alone nameplate. When tied to a component footprint, the component footprint is the parent and the nameplate is a child of that parent. AutoCAD Electrical establishes the link automatically by using invisible Xdata pointers on each block.
Insert a nameplate Several generic, rectangular nameplates with stretchable boundaries are provided. Three generic nameplates are shown on the top row of the sub-dialog box. Each of these consists of a nested block, which AutoCAD Electrical explodes and groups upon insertion. The rectangular outline of the resulting nameplate can be stretched using AutoCAD Grips or the Stretch Window command. 1 Click the Insert Footprint tool. 2 Select Nameplates from the list.
Remove sequencing assignments Routing assignments found on components, boundary boxes, or terminals can be removed when no longer needed. 1 On the Panel Level/Sequencing toolbar, click the arrow on the Level/Sequencing Assignments tool to access the Remove Level/Sequencing Assignment tool. 2 Click the Remove Level/Routing Sequencing tool. 3 Select the terminal strip, component, or boundary box to remove the assignments from. The leveling assignments are automatically removed.
Show terminal strip sequencing assignments 1 On the Panel Level/Sequencing toolbar, click the Show Terminal Strip Sequencing Assignments tool. 2 Select a supplementary terminal strip. The leveling assignments for the selected terminal strip display in the command line. You will see something similar to: LEV4LEV1=001-001-001-001. 3 Press ESC to exit the command. Show footprint sequencing assignments 1 On the Panel Level/Sequencing toolbar, click the Show Footprint Sequencing Assignments tool.
Swap terminal strip wire text Use this to swap wire annotation text from one side of the terminal strip to the other. The Internal and External default definition applies when the terminal strip is initially placed. 1 On the Panel Level/Sequencing toolbar, click the Panel Terminal Strip Swap Wire Text tool. 2 Select the wire annotation text to swap. The wire annotation is flipped to the other side of the selected terminal strip. 3 Press ESC to exit the command.
The components that have level codes matching the picked footprint are displayed in the list box in the order they will be inserted. This includes panel footprint components that might appear on drawings other than the active drawing (marked with "*" in the list). To modify the order, select an entry in the list, then select Move Up or Move Down in the list. Multiple selection is supported. Move Up Moves the selected component(s) up one spot in the list.
any coding found on the panel footprint and panel terminal strip representations. When present, it adjusts the from/to sequencing accordingly. Access: On the Panel Level/Sequencing toolbar, click the Copy Level Assignments tool. Click Panel Layout ➤ Panel Level/Sequencing ➤ Copy Level Assignments. Level 4/Level 3/Level 2/Level 1 You can type in the level assignments or select from the drawing using Pick.
the terminal strip's terminal up to the supplementary terminal strip. When a match is not found, the from/to calculation through the terminal strip operates in a normal fashion. Pick Selects the footprint representation on the drawing to copy the leveling code from. Insert panel wiring diagram terminal strip representation Use this to define a rectangle as a supplementary terminal strip to be used in the wiring routing information over large control system equipment.
Pick Pick a non-AutoCAD Electrical block on the drawing to be instantly changed into a smart AutoCAD Electrical block. Insert/edit panel level assignment: terminal strip Use this tool to view, assign, or edit 3-digit level codes on panel terminal strip representations. This coding, when present, influences the way that AutoCAD Electrical calculates the wire connection from/to sequence.
part of the first shipping split section, enter 004 for level category 2 (for example, cubical), 002 for level category 3 (for example, unit), and 001 for level category 4 (for example, highest category shipping section). With these defaults in place only the lowest level category 1 needs to be assigned on an individual panel terminal strip basis.
Jumper Directly to Supplementary Terminal Strip: Enable/Disable This option is applicable to the terminal strip only if it is referenced on the schematics as well as the panel layout drawing (that is, it is not a supplementary terminal strip that only is represented on the panel layout drawings). Disable AutoCAD Electrical treats the terminal connections through this terminal strip normally. It uses the terminal's level category code assignments to influence how the from/to wire sequencing is calculated.
right (footprint Level 1 codes "004"). If the terminal strip is marks as follows: "IE 001," "IE 002," and "EI 004," then wiring leaving the left-hand back plates attach to the terminal strip on the left-hand side ("I" in the first character position) and wiring leaving the right-hand plate attaches to the right side of the terminal strip ("I" in the second character position).
Higher only Wiring from 3-digit code assignments higher than this terminal's assigned operating level code can pass through this terminal strip. Lower only Wiring from 3-digit code assignments lower than this terminal's assigned operating level code can pass through this terminal strip. Example: the middle "002" shipping section has a Level 4 terminal strip at the left-hand end and another at the right-hand end.
tional 3-digit level codes. These are applied as defaults when codes are not defined on footprint devices. Level 4/Level 3/Level 2/Level 1 Specifies which level codes to use in the sequencing. Level 4 = ship split, Level 3 = unit, Level 2 = cubical, and Level 1 = pan/plate. The leveling assignment codes should be 3-digit values since they are used in for sorting component data in the project database. If codes are not defined in the edit boxes, the drawingwide default values are used.
Wire Sequence command overrides this Panel level/sequencing assignment mechanism. Access: On the Panel Level/Sequencing toolbar, click the Insert/Edit Panel Level Assignment tool. Select an existing footprint component. Click Panel Layout ➤ Panel Level/Sequencing ➤ Insert/Edit Panel Level Assignment. Select an existing footprint component. Default Displays a dialog box to set the drawing-wide default assignments for each of the four level categories.
Level code/location Controls whether the Level 1 edit box displays the 3-digit level code assignment or the device's LOC attribute value. This location display mode is for display purpose only. The underlying 3-digit Level 1 code is always used for the sorting installation.
Pick list for panel terminal strip report/graphical report Use this to select a supplementary terminal strip representation to display wiring information inside of a report generator dialog, and subsequently insert a terminal strip layout drawing. Access: On the Panel Level/Sequencing toolbar, click the Panel Terminal Strip Report tool. Click Panel Layout ➤ Panel Level/Sequencing ➤ Panel Terminal Strip Report. All supplementary terminal strips found in the active drawing display in the dialog box.
Terminal box width Defines the width of the boxes that make up the terminal strip. Terminal box height Defines the height of the boxes that make up the terminal strip. Group the terminals/text Inserts the graphical report as a set of grouped objects. You can select any member of the group or select the group as a whole. You can toggle group selection on and off by pressing CTRL+H or SHIFT+CTRL+A. Orientation Specifies the orientation for the terminal strip: vertical, left to right, or right to left.
16 Conduit Tools In this chapter ■ Overview of conduit tools ■ Overview of conduit marker support files ■ Generate a conduit marker report ■ Generate a conduit routing report 1109
Overview of conduit tools AutoCAD Electrical provides a set of utilities to help you label, size, and report on conduits. A conduit can be represented by a line or a poly line and by itself does not carry any intelligence. However, you may insert a conduit marker symbol and associate it to a conduit. The conduit marker symbol then carries wire information intelligence pulled from the AutoCAD Electrical drawings.
Insert conduit markers Use the Conduit Marker (Pick) tool 1 Click the Conduit Marker (Pick) tool on the Conduit Marker toolbar. 2 Type S and press Enter to setup the conduit marker. 3 Specify the text for the marker tag and the scale for the marker block. Click OK. 4 Select the line that represents the conduit for the marker on the drawing. 5 Click points to define the leader and press Enter. 6 Select the conduit tag and press Enter.
duit/WirewayLabel dialog box. The conduit marker symbol will carry wire information intelligence pulled from the AutoCAD Electrical drawings. 6 Click OK. Edit all conduit marker information Once your conduit marker is inserted, you may need to supply some additional information for the marker. You can add the information at the time you insert the marker or select the Edit Conduit Marker on the conduit toolbar after it is inserted. 1 Click the Edit Conduit Marker tool on the Conduit Marker toolbar.
Access: From the Panel Layout menu, select Conduit Marker Tools ➤ Conduit Marker (Pick) or Edit Conduit Marker. Either select the line that represents the conduit, click to define the leader, and then select layout devices or branching conduit markers and press Enter; or click on an existing conduit marker. Conduit Tag AutoCAD Electrical selects a default conduit tag which can be overridden at any time.
Previous Scans the previous project to find an instance of the selected conduit and returns the conduit values. You can then make your catalog assignment by picking from the dialog list. Drawing Lists the part numbers used for similar conduits in the current drawing. Project Lists the part numbers used for similar conduits in the project. You can search in the active project, another project, or in an external file.
Wires to include in conduit/wireway Define which wires are to be included in this conduit. Select from the available list in the upper box and add to the included list in the lower box.At any time you can pick from a from/to list by clicking Add Wires from List, or you can add wires from additional devices by clicking Pick Devices.
This defines the spare wires to include in your conduit. Access: Click the Conduit Marker (Pick) tool on the Conduit Marker toolbar. From the Panel Layout menu, select Conduit Marker Tools ➤ Conduit Marker (Pick). Click the Spares button on the Insert/Edit Conduit/Wireway Label dialog box. Select wires from Lists the spare wires that can be added to the conduit. The list is built from the .WDW support file. Type it If the wire type is not listed, type your spare wire description in the edit box.
There should be a separate line in the file for each AutoCAD Electrical wire layer.The line has three fields, each field separated by a semi-colon.The first field is the actual wire layer name used on the drawing.The second field is the wire layer description. This description is used in the AutoCAD Electrical Wire Color/Gauge Label tool. The third field is the wire size.
Generate a conduit marker report You must have at least one conduit marker with wire connections on your drawing in order to run this report. 1 Click the Conduit Report tool on the Conduit Marker toolbar. 2 Specify whether to run the report across selected drawings from the project, the current drawing, or just selected conduit markers. You can specify to display the last report run from this dialog box instead of running a new report by clicking the Redisplay Last Run button. 3 Click OK.
conduit marker symbol then carries wire information intelligence pulled from the AutoCAD Electrical drawings. Access: On the Conduit Marker toolbar, click the arrow on the Conduit Reports tool to access the Conduit Marker Report tool. From the Panel Layout menu, click Conduit Marker Tools ➤ Conduit Marker Report. Decide if you want to run the report across selected drawings from the project, the active drawing, or just selected conduit markers.
Generate a conduit routing report You must have at least one conduit marker with wire connections on your drawing in order to run this report. 1 Click the arrow on the Conduit Reports tool on the Conduit Marker toolbar to access the Wire/Conduit Routing Report tool. 2 Click the Wire/Conduit Routing Report tool. 3 Specify whether to run the report across selected drawings from the project, the current drawing, or just selected conduit markers.
symbol and associate it to a conduit. The conduit marker symbol then carries wire information intelligence pulled from the AutoCAD Electrical drawings. Access: On the Conduit Marker toolbar, click the arrow on the Conduit Reports tool to access the Wire/Conduit Routing Report tool. From the Panel Layout menu, select Conduit Marker Tools ➤ Wire/Conduit Routing Report. Decide if you want to run the report across selected drawings from the project, the active drawing, or just selected conduit markers.
1122
17 Conversion Tools In this chapter ■ Convert promis.
Convert promis.e drawing files to AutoCAD Electrical The promis.e Conversion tool converts drawing files from promis.e to AutoCAD Electrical, while maintaining graphical elements. The drawing file data is converted into a format that can be edited and maintained in AutoCAD Electrical. You can convert a single drawing file or an entire project. A log file is created in the same location as the drawing file or project to display all modifications. The log file name is either [drawing file name]_cnv.
Convert promis.e drawings to AutoCAD Electrical drawings Use this to convert promis.e drawings to AutoCAD Electrical "smart" drawings. 1 On the Conversion toolbar, click the promis.e Conversion tool. 2 Select to convert the active drawing, multiple drawings in the active project, or an entire promis.e project. 3 Click OK. 4 If you selected Convert Multiple Drawings, Active Project select the drawings to process and click OK. 5 If you selected Convert promis.e Project select the promis.
equivalent AutoCAD Electrical attribute to make them AutoCAD Electrical "smart." Access: Click the Convert promis.e Drawings tool on the Conversion toolbar. Click Projects ➤ Conversion Tools ➤ promis.e Conversion. Convert Active Drawing Only Converts only the open and active drawing file from promis.e format to AutoCAD Electrical. Drawing files are not renamed or added to the project. This option is unavailable if the active drawing is unnamed.
promis.e Projects Project Names Lists the promis.e projects defined in the project mapping file. Installation Codes Lists the installation codes defined in the project installation mapping file and the number of selected drawings. The drawing count shows the number of drawings in the selected promis.e Project. AutoCAD Electrical Project Naming (Project, Installation, Drawing) Uses replaceable parameters to name projects (%P), installations (%I), drawing file names (%S), and folders.
Convert non-AutoCAD Electrical blocks This utility takes non-AutoCAD Electrical blocks or graphics representing a symbol and replaces it with an AutoCAD Electrical block and transfers the attribute or text values to this new AutoCAD Electrical block. 1 Click the Convert to Schematic Component tool on the Conversion toolbar. 2 Pick your non-AutoCAD Electrical block containing attributes and/or text entities. 3 Pick an AutoCAD Electrical block from the Insert Component dialog box to use in its place.
Component annotation These utilities may take non-AutoCAD Electrical blocks or graphics representing a symbol, replace it with an AutoCAD Electrical block and transfer the attribute or text values to this new AutoCAD Electrical block. Access: On the Conversion toolbar, click the Convert to Schematic Component tool. From the Projects menu, select Conversion Tools ➤ Convert Drawing ➤ Convert to Schematic Component. On the Conversion toolbar, click the Map Attributes from Old to New tool.
Pick Picks text or attribute objects from the drawing to assign to the AutoCAD Electrical attribute. Hide Makes the AutoCAD Electrical attribute visible or invisible. Drawing/Project Lists the installation, location, mount, and group annotations already used on the current drawing or project. Miscellaneous, Ratings, Positions, Pins Opens sub-dialog boxes for changing the attribute list to reflect ratings, pins, and so on.
Convert text to an attribute This tool converts a text object into an attribute definition. The original text string becomes the default value of the attribute. For example, if you convert the text “120 VOLTS AC” to an attribute definition with a tag name of “RATING1”, the original text becomes the attribute’s default value.. 1 On the Conversion toolbar, click the Convert Text to Attribute Definition tool. 2 Select the text entity to convert. 3 Define the attribute tag name.
Convert non-AutoCAD Electrical arrows Use the Convert Block to Source Arrow tool to replace a non-AutoCAD Electrical source arrow with a smart AutoCAD Electrical source arrow and map the information to the new AutoCAD Electrical source. Use the Convert Block to Destination Arrow tool to replace a non-AutoCAD Electrical destination arrow with a smart AutoCAD Electrical destination arrow.
Convert a block to a source arrow 1 Click the Convert Block To Source Arrow tool on the Conversion toolbar. 2 Select your non-AutoCAD Electrical source block and/or any text related to it that you might want to map to the new AutoCAD Electrical source. 3 Select the wire end for the source arrow. 4 Define the Source Signal Code and click OK. 5 Define attribute values. Convert a block to a destination arrow 1 Click the Convert Block To Destination Arrow tool on the Conversion toolbar.
AutoCAD Electrical blocks. When the converter is run, AutoCAD Electrical looks for the block in the ECDS list and if it finds it, swaps it out for the block in the AutoCAD Electrical list. If the origin for the AutoCAD Electrical block is different than the ECDS block, enter an XY Offset. If you need to use multiple AutoCAD Electrical blocks to "build up" the ECDS symbol, use an available AutoCAD Electrical command $C=wd_via_cv_3unit, followed by the individual block names.
6 Click OK. Convert VIA ECDS or Jr. Project to AutoCAD Electrical If you used ECDS you may have drawings you want to use with AutoCAD Electrical. AutoCAD Electrical provides a conversion tool that converts the intelligence of your ECDS drawings to the intelligence that AutoCAD Electrical expects. Access: From the Projects menu, select Extras ➤ ECDS Legacy Conversion ➤ ECDS to Electrical Drawing Convert. Project Options Existing VIA ECDS or Jr. Project (.VPJ) Specifies the ECDS project name.
of converted symbols. These symbols look just like the older ECDS symbols but carry the expected AutoCAD Electrical attributes. The path to those symbols are added to your search path. Also, when you select your project to convert, AutoCAD Electrical reads the old ECDS PROJECT.CFG, and look for the Symbol library name. You can also type in any directory path you wish. NOTE The libraries of converted symbols are supplied in a zip file called ConvSym.zip.
Use tagging and linking tools Apply these manual tools to enable nonblocked geometry to be made AutoCAD Electrical-aware. The existing geometry stays in place and is unblocked, but key text entities are converted to attributes with user picks and are linked into a generic, nongraphical block insert. Wire connection attributes can also be merged into this generic block insert.
■ Terminal attribute colors change to visually distinguish what has been already converted as defined in the WD_M block. Add Geometry Results: ■ TAG1, TAG2, PLC TAG, and TAGSTRIP attributes are defined and selected first. ■ The block definition is automatically modified. ■ The geometry's color changes by layer to visually distinguish what has been already converted as defined in the WD_M block. Tag and link components You can do multiple tagging and linkages without exiting the commands.
Initial set-up 1 On the Conversion toolbar, click the Special Explode tool. 2 Explode any existing blocks. This explodes attributes and blocks to geometry and text entities while maintaining the value previously defined in the attribute. 3 On the Conversion toolbar, click the Change/Convert Wire Type tool. 4 Select the wire layer from the grid to add wire lines to. The selected wire layer highlights in blue to indicate which layer is selected; the current wire layer highlights in gray.
Link components 1 On the Conversion toolbar, click the arrow on the Link Schematic tool to access any of the schematic linking commands. 2 Select the existing tagged TAG1 block definition. 3 Right-click to apply the selection. 4 Select the text to link to the tagged attribute. The selected text properties are applied to the new attribute. Colors change to visually distinguish what has been converted and temporary lines display the link. 5 Right-click to create the link.
a few times before exiting. 8 On the Conversion toolbar, click the arrow on the Link Schematic tool to access the Add Geometry tool. 9 Select the block to add the geometry to. 10 Pick or window select the geometry to associate to the template block file. 11 Right-click to apply the selection. 12 Specify the insertion point. Special explode Use this tool to explode attributes and blocks to geometry and text entities while maintaining the value previously defined in the attributes.
During the tagging process, the text entity is removed and replaced with a template block file that contains multiple attributes used in AutoCAD Electrical. Access: On the Conversion toolbar, click the arrow on the Tag Schematic tool to access any of the schematic tagging commands. Click Projects ➤ Conversion Tools ➤ Tag Schematic. Select one of the schematic tagging commands from the list. Click any of the tagging tools.
VDV21_CONVERT.DWG depending on the drawing properties) contains attributes used for a child normally open contact component. Tag Child - N.C. Makes the selected text entities an attributed block file with the TAG2 attribute visible. The template block file (HDV22_CONVERT.DWG or VDV22_CONVERT.DWG depending on the drawing properties) contains attributes used for a child normally closed contact component.
changes the wire number. This creates a terminal number block that has a different wire number for each wire connected to it. Link schematic Use these tools to associate nonblocked text to previously placed template blocks. Through the modification of a template block, you have control over which attributes are inserted and visible. All necessary attribute definitions are placed using the properties of the existing text entities, such as justification, height, and location.
Link PLC Address Description Links simple text to a PLC address attribute as PLC I/O address description attributes. During the conversion process, the text entity is removed and replaced with the next available PLC address description attribute, up to 5. Link Terminal Number Links simple text to a TAGSTRIP attribute as a terminal number attribute on an AutoCAD Electrical terminal block symbol. During the conversion process, the text entity is removed and replaced with the TERM01 or WIRENO attribute.
text entity is removed and replaced with the Catalog Number attribute. Link Rating Links simple text as Rating 1-12 attributes on an AutoCAD Electrical block file. The entity value is used as the rating value for one or more template block definitions. If only one template block is selected for the link, the text entity is removed and replaced with the rating attribute, up to 12.
Tag Nameplate Makes selected text entities an attributed block file with the DESC1-3 attributes visible. The template block file (ACE_NP_CONVERT.DWG) contains attributes used in nameplate symbols. If the description text strings were previously defined as attributes on an AutoCAD Electrical panel component block definition, the attribute values on the panel component are hidden and the nameplate attributes DESC1-3 are added and made visible.
attribute. The selected text properties are applied to the new attribute. Right-click to create the link. Link Description Links simple text as Description 1-3 attributes on an AutoCAD Electrical Panel block file. You can link them as description attributes to one or more existing template block definitions. During the conversion process, the text entity is removed and replaced with the next available description attribute, up to 3.
Link Manufacturer Links simple text as manufacturer attributes on an AutoCAD Electrical Panel block file. The entity value is used as the Manufacturer value for one or more template block definitions. If only one template block is selected for the link, the text entity is removed and replaced with the Manufacturer attribute. Link Catalog Number Links simple text as Catalog Number attributes on an AutoCAD Electrical Panel block file.
newly added geometry. You can subsequently create a new block file if the block is exploded. Access: On the Conversion toolbar, click the arrow on the Link Schematic or Link Panel tool to access the Add Geometry tool. Click Projects ➤ Conversion Tools ➤ Link Schematic (or Link Panel) ➤ Add Geometry. Select the block to add the geometry to. Pick or window select the geometry to associate to the template block file, and right-click to apply the selection. Specify an insertion point.
Use this tool to select the tagged template block file and display everything (such as description, location, manufacturer, and catalog number codes) that has been linked to it. Access: On the Conversion toolbar, click the arrow on the Link Schematic or Link Panel tool to access the Show Links tool. Click Projects ➤ Conversion Tools ➤ Link Schematic (or Link Panel) ➤ Show Links. Select a single link by picking or multiple links by windowing. Temporary line graphics show what was previously linked.
The mapping spreadsheet has two parts: Attribute mapping defaults and Block name mapping. Each section is a sheet within the spreadsheet and must follow a defined column format. The sheets must be in order, where sheet 1 defines the attribute mapping and sheet 2 defines the block mapping. Attribute mapping defaults General mapping of old attribute names to new attribute names so that the old values on the blocks can be copied to the swapped AutoCAD Electricalsmart block.
to query the table to find the correct mapping entry for a given block name to swap. Column D/ Scale Multiplier If blank, the new block swaps in at the same scale as the existing block it replaces. If this field is not blank, the swapped block is scaled up or down per the field's multiplier value. Column E / X-Y Offset If blank, the new block swaps in at the same XY coordinate as the existing block it replaces.
Map block values using a user-defined spreadsheet NOTE A user-defined spreadsheet is required for this tool. Refer to the "Learn about block/attribute mapping" file for help on creating the spreadsheet if you do not already have one created. 1 On the Conversion toolbar, click the Block Replacement tool. 2 Select to run the block replacement for the entire project, the active drawing, or a selected component on the active drawing. 3 Click OK.
Select to run the block replacement on the entire project, the active drawing, or a single symbol on the active drawing.
1156
18 Miscellaneous Tools In this chapter ■ Overview of power check tools ■ Overview of pneumatic tools ■ Insert hydraulic components ■ Insert P&ID components ■ Troubleshooting Tools 1157
Overview of power check tools You can add information to your schematic components to indicate power source and load values using the supplied Power Check tools. Once these values have been added, you can run the Power Load Check Report to scan the wire interconnections and report if there is too much load on a given power source. There are 3 tools to use for checking power source/load: Add/Edit Power Source/Load values Marks a component with a power source and load value.
Tip:Adding Xdata to library symbols prior to insertion You can add the Xdata on the library symbol prior to inserting it. If a drawing already contains that block, you must use the Update Block option prior to running the report. Open the library symbol and use the Xdata Editor to add Xdata directly onto the appropriate TERM## attribute.
Value Specifies the source or load value to save on the connection point. Units (Optional) Specifies the units for the source or load value. Select from the drop-down list to specify the units. Potential assignment Optional for voltage level mismatch checks. Select from the drop-down list to specify the potential value. Set pass power This utility marks a component with a PASSPWR flag.
Select to run the report on the project, selected components in the active drawing, or all components in the active drawing. You can also select to redisplay the last Power Check report. Overview of pneumatic tools Use the Insert Pneumatic Component tool on the Extra Libraries toolbar to insert your Pneumatic symbols (to access the toolbar, select Projects ➤ Toolbars ➤ Extra Libraries or right-click on any toolbar and select ACE: Extra Libraries).
Access: NOTE This dialog box is also accessed when inserting Pneumatic, Hydraulic, or P&ID components; in-line wire labels; stand-alone cross-reference symbols; cable markers; and saved circuits. Select an icon picture or the component type from the Menu tree structure. The main menu in the tree structure is displayed as the menu heading just above the menu tree structure. Tabs ■ Menu: Changes the visibility of the Menu tree view.
Recently Used Displays the last components inserted during the current editing session; the most recently used icon displays in the top. This list follows the view options setting in the symbol preview window (icon only, icon with text or list view) and the total number of icons displayed depends on the value specified in the Display edit box. Display Specifies the number of icons to display in the Recently Used list box. Enter integer numbers only; the default value is 10.
Browse Browses to and selects the component to insert. Right-click menus Options for the Menu tree structure view Right-click on the main menu or submenu in the Menu tree structure view to display the following options: ■ Expand/Collapse: Toggles the visibility of the menus. ■ Properties: Opens a Properties dialog box to view the existing menu or submenu properties like the menu name, image or submenu title. Use the Icon Menu Wizard to change any menu properties.
Insert P&ID Component Overview of pneumatic tools | 1165
Insert hydraulic components Use the Insert Hydraulic Component tool to insert a component into the drawing. 1 On the Extra Libraries toolbar, click the Insert Hydraulic Component tool. 2 On the Insert Component dialog box, select the starting orientation for the component: horizontal or vertical. 3 (Optional) If you want to turn off the Insert/Edit Component dialog box when inserting symbols onto the drawing, select No edit dialog.
Snap 0.125 2.5 Tools ➤ Drafting Settings Scale Factor 1 20 Drawing Properties ➤ Drawing Format Ladder Orientation Horizontal Horizontal Drawing Properties ➤ Drawing Format Insert component This icon menu can be modified, expanded, or replaced with your own custom menu. You can change the default icon menu using the Library and Icon Menu Paths section of the Project Properties ➤ Project Settings dialog box. Select Projects ➤ Project ➤ Project Manager.
Select an icon picture or the component type from the Menu tree structure. The main menu in the tree structure is displayed as the menu heading just above the menu tree structure. Tabs ■ Menu: Changes the visibility of the Menu tree view. ■ Up one level: Displays the menu that is one level before the current menu in the Menu tree view. This is unavailable if the main menu is selected in the Menu tree view. ■ Views: Changes the view display for the Symbol Preview window and Recently Used window.
Vertical/Horizontal Inserts the icon using a vertical or horizontal orientation. This is opposite the drawing's default ladder rung orientation. No edit dialog Turns off the Insert/Edit Component dialog box when inserting symbols onto the drawing. To add component detail later, click the Edit Component tool, and select the component to edit. No tag Inserts the component, un-tagged (i.e. without assigning a unique Component Tag).
Right-click on the main menu or submenu in the Menu tree structure view to display the following options: ■ Expand/Collapse: Toggles the visibility of the menus. ■ Properties: Opens a Properties dialog box to view the existing menu or submenu properties like the menu name, image or submenu title. Use the Icon Menu Wizard to change any menu properties.
Insert P&ID components Use the Insert P&ID Component tool to insert a component into the drawing. 1 On the Extra Libraries toolbar, click the Insert P&ID Component tool. 2 In the Insert Component dialog box, select the starting orientation for the component: horizontal or vertical. 3 (Optional) If you want to turn off the Insert/Edit Component dialog box when inserting symbols onto the drawing, select No edit dialog.
Snap 0.125 2.5 Tools ➤ Drafting Settings Scale Factor 1 20 Drawing Properties ➤ Drawing Format Ladder Orientation Vertical Vertical Drawing Properties ➤ Drawing Format Insert component This icon menu can be modified, expanded, or replaced with your own custom menu. You can change the default icon menu using the Library and Icon Menu Paths section of the Project Properties ➤ Project Settings dialog box. Select Projects ➤ Project ➤ Project Manager.
Select an icon picture or the component type from the Menu tree structure. The main menu in the tree structure is displayed as the menu heading just above the menu tree structure. Tabs ■ Menu: Changes the visibility of the Menu tree view. ■ Up one level: Displays the menu that is one level before the current menu in the Menu tree view. This is unavailable if the main menu is selected in the Menu tree view. ■ Views: Changes the view display for the Symbol Preview window and Recently Used window.
Vertical/Horizontal Inserts the icon using a vertical or horizontal orientation. This is opposite the drawing's default ladder rung orientation. No edit dialog Turns off the Insert/Edit Component dialog box when inserting symbols onto the drawing. To add component detail later, click the Edit Component tool, and select the component to edit. No tag Inserts the component, un-tagged (i.e. without assigning a unique Component Tag).
Right-click on the main menu or submenu in the Menu tree structure view to display the following options: ■ Expand/Collapse: Toggles the visibility of the menus. ■ Properties: Opens a Properties dialog box to view the existing menu or submenu properties like the menu name, image or submenu title. Use the Icon Menu Wizard to change any menu properties.
Overview of real-time error checking Although AutoCAD Electrical checks for duplicated schematic component reference designations and wire numbers during the insert or edit process, you have the option of displaying the warning in real time. Real-time error checking is enabled by default in the Project Properties ➤ Project Settings (page 99) tab. If you enter an existing component tag/wire number during the insert/edit process, a warning dialog box displays.
Use the troubleshooting tools There are many tools to use for troubleshooting your AutoCAD Electrical drawing. Use the audit tool Use this tool to identify and clean up some types of problems that might affect an AutoCAD Electrical drawing. The Electrical Audit tool displays a report of detected problems for the active project. You can save this file for reference or surf the file to view and correct the errors. 1 Select Projects ➤ Reports ➤ Electrical Audit.
2 On the Clean Drawing Utility dialog box, select the drawings to clean: drawings in the active project, a single drawing, or all drawings in a selected folder. 3 (Optional) Click Purge All to run the AutoCAD Purge command and purges all unused items (such as block definitions, dimension styles, layers, linetypes, and text styles). 4 Click OK. 5 If you selected to clean all drawings in the active project, select the drawings to process and click OK.
Check/repair wire gaps Use this utility to create wire number jumps (on the current drawing) without resorting to individual signal source/destination arrow symbols. 1 Click the arrow on the Insert Wire tool to access the Check/Repair Gap Pointers tool. 2 Click the Check/Repair Gap Pointers tool. 3 Select each wire segment as directed. Gap data is added as needed. The result of the check/repair is shown in the command prompt area.
This utility can help you troubleshoot problems with unconnected or shorted wires and invalid wire crossing gap pointers. 1 Click the arrow on the Insert Wire tool to access the Check/Trace a Wire tool. 2 Click the Check/Trace a Wire tool. 3 Select a wire on the network. You can select "A" to show All Segments. If you prefer to step through wire by wire, press the spacebar. 4 Determine whether to pan or zoom the selected wire. The connected wire segments endpoints are shown in the command prompt area.
found. Click Details to view the detected problems, and then go to the error location within the project and correct the error. Access: Click the arrow on the Schematic Reports tool to access the Electrical Audit tool. From the Projects menu, select Reports ➤ Electrical Audit. Wire - No Connection Displays the unconnected wires for the active project. The report lists the unconnected wire number, location point, error message, and the drawing where the error occurs.
Terminal Duplication Displays duplicated schematic terminal numbers. The report lists the terminal tag id and duplicated terminal number, reference of the terminal number, error message, and the drawing where the error occurs. NOTE Terminal numbers listed in WDN files (located in the same folder as the project definition file (*.wdp)) are not checked for duplications. You can use wildcards to exclude a range of terminals for duplication checking making use of this text file.
The Drawing Audit tool displays a report of wire-related clean-up functions that were performed. Access: Click the arrow on the Schematic Reports tool to access the Drawing Audit tool. From the Projects menu, select Reports ➤ Drawing Audit. Audit drawing or project Specifies to run the audit on the active drawing or selected drawings in the active project. Previous Redisplays the last audit report that was run.
Modify invisible data For some functions AutoCAD Electrical adds invisible information to a block insert or even to a specific attribute. This invisible data is called Xdata. To add or modify this invisible data, AutoCAD Electrical provides an Xdata editor. Edit existing invisible data 1 Select Projects ➤ Extras ➤ Xdata Editor. 2 Select an attribute in the drawing. 3 If Xdata exists for the attribute, select the Xdata to edit from the list in the dialog box.
For some functions AutoCAD Electrical adds invisible information to a block insert or even to a specific attribute. This invisible data is called Xdata. To add or modify this invisible data, AutoCAD Electrical provides an Xdata editor. Access: From the Projects menu, select Extras ➤ Xdata Editor. Select an attribute in the drawing. The dialog displays showing any existing Xdata information. If the selected block or attribute does not carry any Xdata, the list box will indicate this.
1186
19 Advanced Productivity In this chapter ■ Set up peer-to-peer component relationships ■ Create automated pin assignments ■ Set up AutoCAD Electrical for multiple users ■ Show source and destination markers on cable wires ■ Use the PLC Database File Editor ■ Add your own symbols, circuits and commands to the icon menu ■ Build your own symbols ■ Configure projects for various drawing standards ■ Use Autodesk Vault with AutoCAD Electrical 1187
Set up peer-to-peer component relationships The following example has a valve representation on an instrument drawing, FE100, and its equivalent on the electrical schematic, SOL2500. They are the same physical device, but carry different tags based on the drawing discipline in which they appear.
5 On the Project Manager, double-click the instrument drawing to open it. 6 Zoom in so that your valve representation is visible. 7 On the Project Manager, right-click the project name, and select Properties. 8 On the Project Properties, Cross-References dialog box, Cross-Reference Options section, select Peer-to-Peer. 9 Click OK. 10 Right-click the schematic symbol to edit in the drawing (in this case, SOL2500). 11 Select Edit Component from the context menu.
The schematic symbol's WDTAGALT value is automatically updated and the valve's TAG1 value (or TAG1 PART1/TAG1 PART2 combined value) displays next to the symbol in the drawing. The valve's WDTAGALT value is automatically updated and the schematic symbol's TAG1 value displays next to the valve in the drawing. Create automated pin assignments AutoCAD Electrical consults a Pin List database when a part number is added or an existing part number is changed on a parent schematic symbol.
a single pin list to multiple symbols. The basic workflow for pin numbers being assigned to a symbol is as follows: ■ Insert a component. ■ On the Insert/Edit Component dialog box, assign a catalog number. ■ Pin List database is queried. ■ Coil pins are applied to the parent symbol's terminal attributes. ■ The Pin List is applied to the parent symbol as xdata or attributes.
Setting up a PINLIST The PINLIST column in the Pin List database specifies the contact types and their respective pin numbers. A two terminal contact has three elements in this format: contact type, terminal pin, terminal pin. Each PINLIST value can have up to 256 characters. Use a value from 0-5 to specify the contact type, where: ■ 0 = convertible contact ■ 1 = N.O. ■ 2 = N.C.
2 Insert the second coil symbol but do not make a catalog assignment. 3 In the Insert/Edit Component dialog box, click NO/NC Setup. 4 Click Pick. 5 Select the first coil symbol. The saved peer pinlist data is moved from the first symbol over to this peer symbol. Child contacts can now be auto-annotated with the selected coil's available pin list information and max NO/NC count tracked on a per-coil basis.
NOTE It is not required that you share these files, but sharing makes it easier for multiple users to work with projects in AutoCAD Electrical. Databases default_cat.mdb, footprint_lookup.mdb, schematic_lookup.mdb, wd_lang1.mdb, wd_picklist.mdb, wddinrl.xls C:\Documents and Settings\{username}\My Documents\Acade {version}\AeData\Catalogs WD.
S_LDPC.SLB, WD_LOCAL.SLB, WDSIG.SLB, WDSIG_1.SLB, gepb.slb C:\Program Files [(x86)]\Autodesk\Acade {version}\Support WD.ENV file edit: Original path: *WD_SLB,x:some path/, to override path pointing to ".slb" slide lib support files Edited path: WD_SLB,N:/Electrical/Shared_Files/Slides/, to override path pointing to ".slb" slide lib support files NOTE For the path in the .env file to be recognized, the asterisk (*) in front of the line must be removed.
NOTE These files must be in a location that is specified as an AutoCAD Support path. They can be placed in a location that is already defined as being a support path, or you can add a new support path pointing to this location. Location code selection list default.loc Optional file, does not exist by default. To create this file in Notepad, create a file with the project name and a .loc extension (or use default.loc) and save to an AutoCAD Support path so the program can find it.
You can set up AutoCAD Electrical's icon menuing system so that you can switch back and forth from the default menu file (such as ACE_JIC_menu.dat) to your own menu (for example "special_menu.dat"). 1 Add a line similar to this to AutoCAD Electrical's ACE_JIC_menu.dat file: Special menu|special_menu.sld|$C=(c:wd_loadmenu "special_menu.dat")(c:wd_insym_go2menu 0) 2 In your new "special_menu.dat" file, add this line so you can switch back to AutoCAD Electrical's default menu: Default Electrical menu|back2wd.
Setting up layers 1 In a blank AutoCAD Electrical drawing, click the Drawing Properties tool. 2 On the Alert dialog box, click OK to add the WD_M block. 3 In the Drawing Properties dialog box, click the Style tab. You can select the default Fan-In/Out marker style here along with defining the layers for the wires. Notice that the default layer name for fan in/out single line layers is "_MULTI_WIRE." 4 In the Drawing Properties dialog box, click OK. 5 Click the AutoCAD Layer tool.
8 Repeat to insert 3 Limit Switches N.O. Insert the limit switches anywhere on the right-hand side of the drawing (slightly below the push buttons you just inserted).
Adding wires 1 Click the Insert Wire tool. 2 Add a wire to the top push button. Drag the wire to the right. 3 Repeat for the other two push buttons. 4 Add a wire to each of the limit switches. Drag the wires to the left. 5 Press F9 to turn SNAP off. 6 Select all of the wires and verify that they were created on the WIRES layer.
Adding source and destination markers 1 Click the arrow on the Source Destination Signals tool to access the Fan In/Out Source tool. 2 Click the Fan In/Out Source tool. 3 In the Fan In/Out Source dialog box, select Solid as the Source marker style. 4 Click the left button to set the wire connection orientation. 5 Select in the middle of the wire that is connected to the top push button. 6 In the Signal - Source Code dialog box, enter "cbla" as the code and "RED" as the description.
the description, RED, displays on both. AutoCAD Electrical breaks the wire and changes the appropriate wire piece to the defined layer. When inserting a source marker the wire coming out of the marker changes; when inserting a destination marker, the wire going into the marker changes. You are prompted to define the next source. 12 Repeat for the middle and bottom wires for each group.
Creating connecting wires 1 At the command line, type L and press Enter. 2 Click on the end of the uppermost wire and drag down across each of the wires connected to the push buttons. Continue dragging past the push buttons and click. 3 Drag your cursor to the right to create a horizontal line, and click. 4 Drag down across the ends of the wires connected to the limit switches, ending on the bottom wire and click. Press Enter to create the lines.
5 Type MA at the command prompt to run the AutoCAD MATCHPROP command. 6 Click the wire connected to the top limit switch. 7 Click each of the lines you just created. The lines change from black to red since they are taking on the properties of the wire you selected. 8 Press Enter to exit the command.
Adding cable markers At this point you have established the link between the pushbuttons and the limit switches. You can now include a cable marker identifier that is associated with these wire connections in various wire and cable reports. 1 Click the Cable Marker tool. 2 Select to insert a cable marker. 3 Insert the cable marker on the horizontal line. 4 In the Insert/Edit Cable Marker (Parent wire) dialog box, click Catalog Data Lookup.
at insertion time. This is all possible because AutoCAD Electrical generates PLC I/O modules via a parametric generation technique driven by a PLC database (ACE_PLC.MDB).
Creating new PLC modules By default, when creating a new PLC module the PLC Database File Editor lists as many blank field Terminal Types as there are terminals defined in the New Module dialog box. 1 Click the arrow on the Insert PLC (parametric build) tool to access the PLC Database File Editor tool. 2 Click the PLC Database File Editor tool. 3 In the PLC Database File Editor dialog box, highlight PLCs in the PLC selection list and click New Module.
Assigning Terminal Types 1 In the PLC Database File Editor dialog box, right-click Terminal Type 1 and select Edit Terminal from the context menu. The Select Terminal Information dialog box displays. There are 3 categories for top symbols: Top Input, Top Output, and Top Terminal. Top Input and Top Output are addressable terminals, while the Top Terminal category consists of non-addressable terminals. 2 In the Select Terminal Information dialog box, select Top Input.
5 In the Select Terminal Information dialog box, select the Input category and look at the available terminals. 6 Select the Input I/O Point Wire Left terminal and click OK. All 7 terminals are assigned at the same time. 7 In the PLC Database File Editor dialog box, right-click on the last terminal and select Edit Terminal. 8 In the Select Terminal Information dialog box, select the Terminal category. 9 Click the Terminal Point Wire Right terminal and click OK.
selected, all entries marked with "Show: When Excluding Unused" are skipped. This gives flexibility to how a module is represented. 1 In the PLC Database File Editor dialog box, make sure all of the terminals are set to Show: Always. 2 Make sure all of the terminals are set to Optional Re-prompt: No. You can trigger AutoCAD Electrical to prompt for a new beginning address number when the parametric build flips from inputs to outputs or vice versa.
3 Specify the module box dimensions for the selected style. These values set the right, left, top, and bottom offsets for the rectangle that surrounds the module. The optional Split Top and Split Bottom specify the offsets for a split module where Split Top specifies the offset for the top of a split module and Split Bottom specifies the offset for the bottom of the split module. If left blank, the rectangle Top and Bottom values are used. 4 Specify any properties for the lines that make up the box.
NOTE Symbols and BMP files need to be created outside of the PLC database file editor. Symbols are found in the standard library search path, while PLC Bitmap images are maintained in the same OS folder as the PLC Database itself (Typically C:\Documents and Settings\{username}\My Documents\Acade {version}\AeData\). 1 In the PLC Database File Editor dialog box, click Settings.
you would have to modify the block file to add additional attributes such as Line3. Top terminals are the only symbols which can accept prompts during the parametric PLC insertion process. 2 Edit each attribute value for the TAG attributes to read "IN-%%N." Besides the Module Prompt variables, AutoCAD Electrical also supports the use of an address variable. When the module is inserted, the PLC I/O addresses are calculated based on some AutoCAD Electrical settings and the module settings.
Add your own symbols, circuits and commands to the icon menu AutoCAD Electrical supplies two default icon menus: one for schematic symbols and the other for panel symbols. Each menu is driven by a text file. AutoCAD Electrical defaults to icon menu ACE__MENU.DAT (where = JIC, IEC, GB, HYD, JIS, PID, or PNEU) for schematic symbols and ACE_PANEL_MENU.DAT for panel symbols. These menu files are found in the C:\Documents and Settings\{username}\Application Data\Autodesk\AutoCAD Electrical\{
You modify or expand the icon menus by editing the underlying icon menu text file. You can use a generic text editor and edit it manually or you can use the AutoCAD Electrical Icon Menu Wizard. Use the Icon Menu Wizard dialog to select the function to be performed when the icon is selected from the icon menu. ■ Add component: Inserts a symbol ■ Add circuit: Inserts a prebuilt circuit. This causes AutoCAD Electrical to insert and explode the .dwg name supplied. ■ Add new submenu:Starts a new submenu.
Add components to the icon menu The Icon Menu Wizard can be used to add or modify icons for both the schematic and panel symbol libraries. 1 Create your new AutoCAD Electrical compatible library symbol. For schematic symbols, follow the guidelines regarding the symbol ".dwg" file naming convention (page 163)and required attributes. (page 177) 2 Click the arrow on the Miscellaneous tool to access the Icon Menu Wizard tool. 3 Click the Icon Menu Wizard tool.
6 On the Add Icon - Component dialog box, specify the image file name and graphic to appear in the icon button. The image name can be manually typed into the edit box . You can browse to an existing .sld or .png file to assign to the icon, use an image file that matches the active drawing name, use an image file that matches a picked block on the drawing, or use an image with the same name as the block name entered for the block name.
9 Select the appropriate Insert Component command and test your new symbol insert. Add an icon menu page You can add new menu pages to the AutoCAD Electrical icon menu, and then populate them with your own custom symbols. Each new page can have icon selections that cascade down to other new menu pages. Once you click OK, your trigger icon and new submenu page are added. 1 On the Icon Menu Wizard dialog box, select Add ➤ New submenu to add a new icon to the menu.
4 Click OK. 5 Select the appropriate Insert Component command and test your new symbol insert. Add an icon to trigger a command An icon can be configured to trigger an AutoCAD command, trigger an AutoCAD Electrical command, or run a program. For example, "Rectangle" can be typed into the edit box so that every time you click the box, it runs the AutoCAD Rectangle command. 1 On the Icon Menu Wizard dialog box, click Add ➤ Command. NOTE You can also right-click in empty space and select Add icon ➤ Command.
■ "assycode" is the catalog number assembly code (often blank) ■ "footprint" is the library symbol name WD_INFP "PB11" "AB" "800T-A2A" "" "AB/ABPB3" 4 Click OK. Add circuits to the icon menu Add Circuit is the same as Insert Command except that the block file is made up of more than one AutoCAD Electrical block definitions and related wire lines. 1 On the Icon Menu Wizard dialog box, click Add ➤ Add circuit. NOTE You can also right-click in empty space and select Add icon ➤ Add circuit.
Change the icon's image There are times when you might want to change the image associated with an icon menu choice. The AutoCAD Electrical Icon Menu Wizard provides a quick, easy way to reassign or reshoot a slide image. Slides can be saved as individual files in the AutoCAD Electrical search path or they can be maintained inside of a library of slide files called the slide library.
Edit the DAT file with a text editor There may be times when you want to bypass the Icon Menu Wizard and edit the menu DAT file directly. It is important to maintain the menu file structure, otherwise your menu may not activate properly. An AutoCAD Electrical menu ".dat" file is a text file that can be viewed and edited with any text editor (ex: WordPad or Notepad). See Overview of the icon menu file.
Your menu should immediately appear and remains the default for subsequent component inserts. If you want to go back to the AutoCAD Electrical default menu, click the "AutoCAD Electrical menu" button you added to your custom menu. AutoCAD Electrical flips back to the default icon menu and it now remains the default for subsequent inserts. Build your own symbols You can use the Symbol Builder to easily create an AutoCAD Electrical symbol or to convert existing non-AutoCAD Electrical symbols.
NOTE If at any time you exit out of the Symbol Builder, restart it, and select any graphics and attributes you've added so far. You can then start from where you left off. 1 In an AutoCAD Electrical drawing, click the Miscellaneous tool to access the Symbol Builder tool. 2 Click the Symbol Builder tool. 3 At the command prompt press Enter. You can create your own symbol rather than modify an existing symbol. 4 In the Symbol Builder: Choose symbol category dialog box, Schematic Symbol section, click Parent.
can insert and define as part of the symbol. Once an attribute is inserted on the symbol it is disabled in the Missing attributes list. AutoCAD Electrical allows only one insertion of each attribute. NOTE You cannot create a symbol with the Symbol Builder until the minimum attribute requirements are met. In most cases this means the TAG1 or TAG2 attribute. 2 Select TAG1, Height = 0.125 and Justify = Center. 3 Click Insert Attribute. 4 Insert the attribute above the rectangle.
■ INST: Height = 0.0625, Justify = Center, Insertion point = above LOC ■ FAMILY: Insertion point = anywhere Once you place the FAMILY attribute, the FAMILY code dialog box displays. The Family value generally matches the TAG1 %F value. This value is only used when naming the block. 10 Click OK. Notice that the FAMILY and TAG1%F codes display in the Component type: Schematic Parent or Stand-alone dialog box above the Insert Attribute button. These values should both be PS. 11 Click Back to Main Menu.
3 Click the button with the wire coming in from the left. 4 Insert the terminal in the center of the left-hand side of the rectangle as shown. TIP Always use an AutoCAD Snap to insert the wire connection point. Once you select the wire connection point, you can insert a terminal attribute and assign a default pin number to the attribute. The TERM01 attribute ➤ X?TERM01 wire connection point dialog box displays.
This sets "L1" as the default terminal pin number. The Terminal style/configuration dialog box redisplays. NOTE If you want to add multiple instances you can use the Multiple Insert option. This prevents you from having to insert the pins one at a time.
8 Click the button with the wire coming in from the bottom. 9 Insert the terminal in the bottom center of the rectangle. 10 In the TERM02 attribute ➤ X?TERM02 wire connection point dialog box, click OK. 11 In the Pin number default value dialog box, enter "GND" and then click OK. 12 Click the button with the wire coming in from the right. 13 Insert the terminal in the center of the right-hand side of the rectangle. 14 In the TERM03 attribute ➤ X?TERM03 wire connection point dialog box, click OK.
now use this option to insert the TERMxx attribute for each wire connection point. You can use this option only if you already defined an AutoCAD Electrical wire connection attribute to which you want to link terminal text. ■ NO/NC:Add an attribute for the contact state (NO, NC, NO-HC). ■ Dashed:Inserts Dash Link Line attributes that allow the program to draw dashed link lines between a parent symbol and its related child contact.
The Symbol Builder - Schematic Parent or Stand-alone symbol dialog box redisplays. Notice that the number of rating values that were placed is listed next to the Rating button. 7 Click WBlock. WBlock creates the symbol file to be inserted while Block creates the symbol for this drawing file only. AutoCAD Electrical provides a default name for the new symbol. Avoid changing the first 4 letters of the file name and limit the total length to 32 characters.
Create a schematic terminal symbol 1 In an AutoCAD Electrical drawing, click the Miscellaneous tool to access the Symbol Builder tool. 2 Click the Symbol Builder tool. 3 At the command prompt press Enter. This allows you to create your own symbol rather than modify an existing symbol. 4 In the Symbol Builder: Choose symbol category dialog box, Schematic Symbol section, click Terminal - Schematic terminal (follows wire number).
4 Insert the attribute above the rectangle. Notice that the Component type: Schematic Terminal dialog box redisplays. The TAGSTRIP option is now grayed out since that attribute has been placed for the symbol. 5 Select WIRENO, Height = 0.125 and Justify = Center. 6 Click Insert Attribute. 7 Insert the attribute above TAGSTRIP.
2 Click the button with the wire coming in from the left. 3 Insert the terminal in the center of the left-hand side of the rectangle. TIP Use the Midpoint OSnap to insert the wire connection point in the middle of the line. 4 Click the button with the wire coming in from the right. 5 Insert the terminal in the center of the right-hand side of the rectangle. Your drawing should look like the following. 6 In the Terminal style/configuration dialog box, click Back to Main Menu.
4 Enter a file name or accept the default and click Save. 5 In the Block insertion base point dialog box, click OK. 6 Specify the insertion point. Pick the center of the square so that it is easy to later place on a wire. 7 When asked to insert an instance of this block now, click OK. 8 Place the symbol on your drawing. If you place the symbol on an existing wire, the wire breaks, the component tag inserts, and the wires connect to the symbol.
Convert existing geometry 1 Explode any existing blocks. 2 Click the arrow on the Miscellaneous tool to access the Symbol Builder tool. 3 Click the Symbol Builder tool. 4 Select any geometry and text that are to become part of the converted symbol and press Enter. 5 In the Symbol Builder: Choose symbol category dialog box, Schematic Symbol section, click Parent. 6 In the Symbol Builder - Schematic Parent or Stand-alone symbol dialog box, click Standard.
11 Select DESC1, Height = 0.125 and Justify = Center. 12 Click Pick Text. 13 Select the text you want to change to the DESC1 attribute ("DESCRIPTION" in this example). Finishing the parent symbol 1 Click Back to Main Menu. The Symbol Builder - Schematic Parent or Stand-alone symbol dialog box redisplays. 2 Click WBlock. AutoCAD Electrical provides a default name for the new symbol. Avoid changing the first 4 letters of the file name and limit the total length to 32 characters.
8 In the Insert/Edit Component dialog box, click OK. Create a panel footprint A panel footprint symbol can be in either of two general forms: a to-scale physical representation of the device or a generic wiring diagram representation whose main purpose is to show wire connection annotation information.
In this example, we will take geometry (either geometry you just drew, geometry you have been using, or a vendor representation) and convert it to an AutoCAD Electrical panel footprint using the Symbol Builder. 1 Explode any existing blocks. 2 In an AutoCAD Electrical drawing, click the Miscellaneous tool to access the Symbol Builder tool. 3 Click the Symbol Builder tool. 4 Select any geometry and text that are to become part of the symbol and press Enter.
2 Select P_TAG1, Height = 0.125, Justify = Center and Visible. 3 Click Insert Attribute. 4 Insert the attribute above the symbol graphics. Notice that the Component type: Panel Footprint dialog box redisplays. The P_TAG1 option is now grayed out since that attribute has been placed for the symbol. Continue placing the rest of the attributes. 5 Select DESC1, Height = 0.125, Justify = Center and Visible. 6 Click Insert Attribute. 7 Insert the attribute below P_TAG1. 8 Select DESC2, Height = 0.
12 Click Back to Main Menu. Finishing the panel symbol Additional options for creating a symbol. These options will not be used for this example, but you can use them when creating your own symbol if desired. ■ Rating: Inserts optional rating attributes. AutoCAD Electrical allows up to 12 Rating attributes. These attributes can be used for anything from amps to motor horsepower. If you insert one or more of these optional attributes, define an attribute prompt for each such as "Motor FLA" or "Voltage".
4 Specify the insertion point. Pick a point in the center of the symbol graphics. 5 When asked to insert an instance of this block now, click OK. 6 Place the symbol on your drawing. New symbols you create can also be inserted with the AutoCAD Electrical Insert Panel Component commands. You can add your new symbol to the icon menu or you can select it from the Type it or Browse dialog file selection options in the icon menu.
schematics, AutoCAD Electrical annotates the footprint with the data in extended entity data format. You can set up to have visible attributes added to any footprint automatically at footprint insertion time. There are 3 attribute template drawings: wd_ptag_addattr_comp.dwg component footprints wd_ptag_addattr_trm.dwg terminal with terminal number wd_ptag_addattr_wtrm.
Configure for IEC standard Below is a list of configuration options (both project properties and drawing-specific properties) that are most commonly used when dealing with the IEC drawing standard and a description of each. Project Properties Project Properties are configured by right-clicking on the project name in the Project Manager and selecting Properties.
Components Tab ing scheme for the active drawing (either sequential or reference-based). For sequential numbering, you can enter a starting number to use as a starting component number. For reference-based numbering, you can use one of the following numbering formats: Component TAG Options ■ X-Y Grid ■ X Zones ■ Reference Number Defines most of the specific tagging options to conform to the IEC tagging mode.
Components Tab K101" but "+LOC1-K101" remains unchanged. NOTE This suppression takes place automatically in reports; and takes place graphically only when a component is inserted, edited, or retagged. ■ Format Installation/Location into tag: Specifies to exclude the Installation and Location code values as part of the tag when displaying. For example, if this is not on, a tag might show up as K16 in the Surf dialog box. But if selected, the tag might show up +AAA-K16 (where AAA is the location).
Cross-Reference Tab edit box, enter “%S-%N” (or click the %S-%N button). You can also define the format of the crossreferencing text that references other drawings in the Between Drawings edit box. Suppress Installation/Location codes when matching the drawing defaults Select this if you want to suppress IEC prefixes.
Drawing Format Tab NOTE If you want AutoCAD Electrical to place the labels for the X-Y Grid or X Zones referencing style, use the appropriate command from the Insert Ladder toolbar. ■ X-Y Grid: All referencing is tied to an X-Y grid system of numbers and letters along the lefthand side and top of the drawing.Set your drawing's vertical and horizontal index numbers and letters, spacing, and origin in the X-Y grid setup dialog box.
NOTE Options that are duplicated on the Drawing Properties and Project Properties dialog boxes are not be described in this section. Drawing Settings Tab IEC-Style Designators Defines Installation and Location codes that are used for drawing defaults when placing components on the drawing and no override Installation or Location values are given on the specific component.
to use option 3 and 2. Place the file somewhere in the AutoCAD support path, like “C:\Program Files\Autodesk\Acade 200x\Acade,” and then when you want to override these values, place the file in the project folder. Use Autodesk Vault with AutoCAD Electrical Autodesk Vault allows you to keep a history of your design changes. You can review how your designs have progressed and rollback to a previous version if necessary.
The most basic requirement of the vault is that you never work directly on a file in the vault. You must check out the project to the working folder on your local drive to edit it. When you finish working on the project, you must check the project back into the vault. When a project file and its related drawing files are checked out of a vault, only the files that are not currently checked out are downloaded.
■ Check out (all) ■ Get latest (all) Workflow overview 1 Start AutoCAD Electrical. 2 Log into Vault. 3 In a single user environment, if you did not set a working folder yet, start Autodesk Vault Explorer and set a working folder on your local computerand then switch back to AutoCAD Electrical. In a multiple-user design environment, set the working folder on a sharednetwork resource for the entire project team.
2 In the Select file dialog box, navigate to the project definition file, and then select it. To maintain the relationship between the drawing files that are defined in the project file, you must check out all files specified in a project file when opening a project from Vault. 3 Click Open. Get latest version Get Latest Version retrieves a read-only copy of the most recent design data that is checked in.
A read-only copy of the file is placed in the local working folder. You can view the file but you cannot modify it. To modify the file, you must check it out. Create a project version Project versions are controlled by project file (.wdp) versions. The project file acts as the parent for all drawings in the project and each version of the .wdp is associated to the latest versions of the drawing at that instance. You can edit individual drawings of a project and create versions of the drawings as needed.
When files are checked in, comments are automatically added to help identify and distinguish between the versions of the files that are automatically created. You can modify the comments as desired during check in unless you suppressed the Check In dialog box. Shared sandbox guidelines A shared workspace is a working folder located on a shared server for all users to access.
2 If a file is currently checked out to another user, you cannot perform the following operations: ■ Get Latest Version ■ Get Previous Version ■ Check Out 3 You cannot check out a file that is currently opened for read-write by another user. 4 You can still check out a file that is opened for read-only by another user. 5 You can open a file in read-only when it is currently checked out to someone else using the same working folder.
20 AutoCAD Electrical Command In this chapter ■ AutoCAD Electrical Commands 1257
AutoCAD Electrical Commands These topics are usually called from within the command itself. If you do not find all the information you need, look further in the Help.
Check/Repair Gap Pointers (page 1178) Check/Trace Wire (page 1178) Child Location/Description Update (page 416) Clean Drawing Utility (page 1177) Component Cross-Reference (page 383) Conduit Marker (From/To List) (page 1112) Conduit Marker (Pick) (page 1112) Conduit Marker Report (page 1118) Continue Surfer (page 690) Convert Block to Destination Arrow (page 1132) Convert Block to Source Arrow (page 1132) Convert Ladder (page 483) Convert Text to Attribute Definition (page 1131) Convert to Schematic Compone
Copy Wire Number (page 511) Copy Wire Number (In-Line) (page 511) Create/Edit Wire Type (page 152) Create New Drawing (page 64) Create New Project (page 48) Cross-Reference Check (page 340) Delete Component (page 332) Delete Connector Pins (page 647) Delete Wire Gap (page 473) Delete Wire Numbers (page 521) Destination Signal Arrow (page 536) Drawing Audit (page 1182) Drawing Properties: Components (page 116) Drawing Properties: Cross-References (page 121) Drawing Properties: Drawing Format (page 123) Drawi
Edit Wire Sequence (page 533) Edit User Table Data (page 352) Electrical Audit (page 1180) Export to Spreadsheet (page 998) Fan In/Out Destination (page 549) Fan In/Out - Single Line Layer (page 550) Fan In/Out Source (page 549) Find/Edit/Replace Component Text (page 407) Find/Replace Terminal Text (page 408) Find/Replace Wire Numbers (page 501) Fix Wire Numbers (page 506) Fix/UnFix Component Tag (page 413) Flip Wire Gap (page 473) Flip Wire Number (page 511) Footprint Database File Editor (page 1084) Hide
Insert Component (Catalog List) (page 312) Insert Component (Equipment List) (page 318) Insert Component (Panel List) (page 325) Insert Connector (page 650) Insert Connector from List (page 678) Insert Angled Tee Markers (page 531) Insert Dot Tee Markers (page 531) Insert/Edit Boundary Box Assignment (page 1103) Insert/Edit Panel Level Assignment (for components) (page 1104) Insert/Edit Panel Level Assignment (for terminal strips) (page 1099) Insert Footprint (Catalog List) (page 1055) Insert Footprint (Equ
Insert Stand Alone Cross-Reference (page 359) Insert Terminal (Manual) (page 1045) Insert Terminal (Panel List) (page 325) Insert Terminal (Schematic List) (page 1056) Insert Terminal Strip Representation (page 1098) Insert WBlocked Circuit (page 395) Insert Wire (page 437) Insert Wire Gap (page 473) Insert Wire Numbers (page 488) Language Conversion (page 703) Link Catalog Number (Panel) (page 1147) Link Catalog Number (Schematic) (page 1144) Link Components with Dashed Lines (page 361) Link Description (P
Link Terminal Number (Schematic) (page 1144) Link User (Panel) (page 1147) Link User (Schematic) (page 1144) List Signal Code (page 342) Location Box (page 422) Location Symbols (page 420) Make Xdata Visible (page 1030) Map Attributes from Old to New (page 1129) Mark/Verify Drawings (page 702) Mark Component to Pass Power (page 1160) Merge Utility (page 783) Missing Level/Sequence Assignments (page 932) Modify Symbol Library (page 430) Move Circuit (page 385) Move Component (page 332) Move Connector Pins (p
Panel Terminal Strip Report (page 1107) Panel Terminal Strip Swap Wire Text (page 1095) Panel Wire Connection Report (page 936) Pin List Database Editor (page 796) PLC Database File Editor (page 232) PLC I/O Wire Numbers (page 525) Power Load Check Report (page 1160) Project Manager (page 38) Project Properties: Components (page 102) Project Properties: Cross-References (page 109) Project Properties: Drawing Format (page 112) Project Properties: Drawing Settings (page 99) Project Properties: Styles (page 11
Report Format File Setup - Panel Bill of Material (page 941) Report Format File Setup - Panel Component (page 945) Report Format File Setup - Panel Component Exception (page 943) Report Format File Setup - Panel Nameplate (page 951) Report Format File Setup - Panel Terminal Exception (page 953) Report Format File Setup - Panel Wire Connection (page 955) Report Format File Setup - Schematic AIP Wire List (page 957) Report Format File Setup - Schematic Bill of Material (page 958) Report Format File Setup - Sc
Reverse Connector (page 642) Reverse/Flip Component (page 339) Revise Ladder (page 483) Rotate Attribute (page 410) Rotate Connector (page 640) RSLogix 500 Export to Spreadsheet (page 268) Save Circuit to Icon Menu (page 393) Schematic Bill of Material Report (page 902) Schematic Cable From/to Report (page 905) Schematic Cable summary Report (page 904) Schematic Component Report (page 912) Schematic Component Wire List Report (page 907) Schematic Connector Details Report (page 908) Schematic Connector Plug
Show Footprint Sequencing Assignments (page 1094) Show Links (page 1150) Show Missing Catalog Assignments (page 793) Show Terminal Strip Sequencing Assignments (page 1094) Show Wire Sequence (page 528) Show Wires (page 486) Signal Error/List Report (page 541) Source Signal Arrow (page 537) Special Explode (page 1141) Split PLC Module (page 335) Split Connector (page 335) Spreadsheet to PLC I/O Utility (page 259) Squeeze Attribute/Text (page 425) Stretch Attribute/Text (page 425) Stretch Connector (page 643)
Tag Panel Component (page 1146) Tag Panel Terminal - Terminal Number (page 1146) Tag Panel Terminal - Wire Number (page 1146) Tag PLC (page 1141) Tag Schematic Component (page 1141) Tag Schematic Terminal - Terminal Number (page 1141) Tag Schematic Terminal - Wire Number (page 1141) Tag Schematic Terminal - Wire Number Change (page 1141) Terminal: Erase Internal/External Connections (page 579) Terminal: Mark External Connections (page 579) Terminal: Mark Internal Connections (page 579) Terminal: Show Intern
Update Signal References (page 360) Update Stand-Alone Cross-Reference (page 360) Update Symbol Library WD_M Block (page 142) Update to New WD_M Block, No Changes (page 141) Update to New WD_M Block, Values, Layers (page 141) Update to New WD_PNLM Block, No Changes (page 141) Update to New WD_PNLM Block, Values, Layers (page 141) Unhide Attribute (Window/Multiple) (page 410) Unhide Wire Numbers (page 521) Unity Pro Export (page 281) Unity Pro Export to Spreadsheet (page 275) User Defined Attribute List (pag
Index _PINLIST database table .rgf files 991 .set files 938 .wda files 1005 .wdn files 1176 .wdp files 29, 77 .wdw files 1116 .ww1 files 1116 .xhw files 270 .xsy files 270, 280 800 3 Phase Wire Numbering dialog box 491 3-phase bus 435, 660 A ace_plc.
show 410 sizes 425 splices 177 split tag names 172 styles 425 tag 1137 TAG1 196 TAG2 196 template drawings 1064 terminal block footprint symbols 192 terminal symbols 177 text conversion 1131 title block 708 use template drawings 1064 user-defined 1005 WD_M block 134 wire connections 177 wire signal symbols 177 audit 1176 drawings 1176 project 1176 AutoCAD Electrical Publish to Web Banner, Title Text, Options dialog box 707 Autodesk Inventor Professional 662, 667, 673, 678, 1008 import 662, 667, 678 report s
multiple 443 parent 443 report 443 shields 466 Cable Summary Data Fields to Report dialog box 851 cable summary report 904 catalog database table 777, 788 catalog lists 312 Catalog Lookup dialog box 101 Catalog Values dialog box 788 catalogs 86, 101, 629, 766, 777, 781, 785, 788, 790, 793 add tables 86 assignments 785 check 785 copy 790 database structure 777 expand catalog tables 766 information 766 LISTBOX_DEF 788 lookup file 101 merge database files 781 merge utility 781 missing assignments 793 modify 78
409, 413–414, 418, 446, 468, 698, 967, 975, 1055, 1061, 1067, 1093, 1104, 1128, 1137, 1161, 1166–1167, 1171–1172, 1176 align 330 annotate from external file 302 annotations 1128 attributes 400 block update 209 check 340, 1176 child 308 copy 308 copy codes 1061 copy group 1061 copy installation 1061 copy location 1061 copy mount 1061 descriptions 409 drawing properties 96 duplicate 1176 edit 284 edit child 308 edit lookup file 349 equipment list 316 erase 330 fence 308 flip 338 hydraulic 1166 insert 284, 308
connectors 330, 554, 559, 636, 667, 673, 678, 685 add pins 636 delete pins 636 edit pins 636 generate 636 import 667, 678 import file structure 673 insert 636 layout 636 move pins 636 pin layout 636 reverse 636 rotate 636 sequencing 554, 559 splices 685 split 330, 636 stretch 636 swap pins 636 contact states 340 contact types 800 contacts 308 conversion tools 1124, 1128, 1131– 1133, 1137, 1151 add geometry 1137 add wire connections 1137 AutoCAD Electrical schematic 1128 block replacement 1151 convert VIA 6.
settings 362 source symbol 353 table formats 372 table setup 374, 380 table updates 377 text setup 362 unhide 361 visibility 361 cross-referencing 1188 advanced 1188 D dashed lines 344, 361 with arrows 344 dat files 1214 data export 1008 data fields 812, 921 location from/to 921 Data Fields to Display dialog box 896 data import 662 database files 90, 781 merge 781 rebuild 90 debug 1176 default panel settings 134 default schematic settings 134 default_cat.mdb 766 default_wdtitle.wdl 70, 83 default.
duplicate numbers 1176 duplicate tags 1176 E ECDS to AutoCAD Electrical 1133 Edit Attribute dialog box 401 Edit Catalog Record dialog box 775 Edit dialog box 350, 632, 796 Edit Entry dialog box 555 Edit Footprint Record dialog box 1086 edit IEC components 294 edit IEC pins 294 Edit Language Lookup File dialog box 704 Edit Miscellaneous and Non-AutoCAD Electrical Attributes dialog box 198 Edit Multi-Connection Sequence Terminal Symbol dialog box 555 Edit PLC I/O Point dialog box 249 Edit PLC Module dialog b
copy 1061 copy assembly 1064 din rails 344 edit 1031 equipment list 1031 insert 1031 insert assembly 1064 insert by catalog 313, 1055 insert component 1031 insert from list 1031 insert multiple 1067 layers 143 lookup database editor 1081 lookup file 313, 1026, 1055, 1081 manual insertion 1031 mapping 1026 merge 781 panel layout symbols 1036 project-wide 1067 select component data from spreadsheets 1067 selection 1031 sequencing 1093 vendor menus 1031 vendor selection 1031 wire information 1077 Force Attribu
file format 760 modifying 760 panel layout 1031 properties 730 IEC component tag modes 89 IEC Tag Mode Update dialog box 89 import data 662 import spreadsheet data 1004 in-line markers 467 in-line wires 492 information lines 708 input file format 320, 1057 Insert Accessory dialog box 616 Insert Component dialog box 284, 355, 389, 446, 468, 1161, 1167, 1172 Insert Connector dialog box 650 Insert Destination Code dialog box 536 Insert dialog box 322 Insert Footprint dialog box 1036 Insert Ladder dialog box 47
level sequencing 1096, 1099, 1103–1104 copy 1096 Library Swap -- All Drawing dialog box 214 library symbols 83, 162–163, 173–174, 197, 199, 201, 429 change 429 client-specific 83 convert existing 201 create 199, 201 default location 173 hydraulic 174 manage 197 modify 197 multiple 173 naming 162–163 P&ID 174 substitute 197 text sizes 429 link information 718 link symbols 1151 linking tools 1137 links 344, 361 dashed 361 LISTBOX_DEF 788 load value 1158 Location Box dialog box 422 location boxes 422 insert 42
numbers 1087 assign item 1087 assign to footprints 1087 detail 1087 item number 1087 resequence item 1087 O open drawings 693 Option 302 Tag Format "Family" Override dialog box 302 Optional ENV File Assignment for Current Project dialog box 160 override tags 302 P P&ID attributes 192 Panel Balloon Setup dialog box 1089 Panel Bill of Material Data Fields to Report dialog box 826 panel bill of materials report 927 Panel Component Data Fields to Report dialog box 830 Panel Component Exception Data Fields to
Panel Terminal Strip Graphical Report Parameters dialog box 1107 panel terminal strip report parameters 1107 panel terminals 1056, 1069 Panel Terminals Data Export dialog box 1003 Panel Terminals dialog box 329 Panel Wire Annotation Exception Data Fields to Report dialog box 834 Panel Wire Connection Data Fields to Report dialog box 841 panel wire connection report 937 panel wiring diagram 1077 parameters 126 parent attributes 196 parts catalog 772 Parts Catalog dialog box 772 parts lookup 772 pass power 11
PLC database file editor 225, 1205 advanced 1205 PLC Database File Editor dialog box 233 PLC I/O Address and Descriptions Data Fields to Report dialog box 881 PLC I/O address and descriptions report 915 PLC I/O Address/Description Export dialog box 1002 PLC I/O component connection report 905 PLC I/O Connection Export dialog box 1001 PLC I/O Header Information Export dialog box 1000 PLC I/O Wire Numbers dialog box 525 PLC Modules Used So Far Data Fields to Report dialog box 886 PLC modules used so far repor
database file 90 database table data 86 descriptions 29 file formats 77 files 29 group drawings 29 manager 29 multiple clients 83 open 29 preview 29 properties 96 recent 29 related files 70 remove drawings 29 reorder drawings 29 save to web 705 script file 697 select 29 setup 96 task list 91 update settings 129 utilities 509 vault 50 vault - advanced 1250 promis.e 1124 convert 1124 promis.
Report Format File Setup - Panel Terminal Exception dialog box 953 Report Format File Setup - Panel Wire Connection dialog box 955 Report Format File Setup - Schematic AIP Wire List dialog box 957 Report Format File Setup - Schematic Bill of Material dialog box 959 Report Format File Setup - Schematic Cable From/To dialog box 961 Report Format File Setup - Schematic Cable Summary dialog box 963 Report Format File Setup - Schematic Component dialog box 975 Report Format File Setup - Schematic Component Wire
save to file 810 schematic attributes 177 Schematic Component dialog box 313, 1055 Schematic Components List Panel Layout Insert dialog box 1044 Schematic Components or Terminals dialog box 1070 schematic database editor 349 schematic drawing properties 96, 131 Schematic Equipment In dialog box 321 schematic ladder diagrams 1026 schematic layers 143 rename 143 Schematic Layout Wire Connection Annotation dialog box 1079 schematic linking 1144 schematic lists 1031, 1056, 1067, 1069 schematic lookup database 3
signals 342, 353, 536 destination 342 follow 342 source 342 slide files 251 source arrows 536, 1132 convert 1132 source markers 536, 543, 1197 advanced 1197 show 543 Spacing for Component or Footprint Insertion dialog box 1073 spare terminal strips 585 Special Explode dialog box 1141 splices 685 Split Block dialog box 335 split tags 172 spreadsheet data 811, 996, 1067 components 996 edit report 811 export 996 general data 996 import 996 modify 996 panel components 996 panel terminals 996 plc i/o description
substitute 197 WD_M block 134 T Table Cross-Reference Format Setup dialog box 374, 380 table cross-reference updates 377 table cross-references 368, 372, 374, 380 table generation 806 tabular terminal strips 585 tag wire numbers 484 project-wide 484 TAG1 196 TAG1_PARTX 172 TAG2 196 TAG2_PARTX 172 tagging tools 1137 Tags in Use dialog box 301 Task List dialog box 91 tasks 91 tee connection symbols 530 template drawings 1064 templates 131 Terminal Block Properties dialog box 566, 609 Terminal Block Settings
unique records 585 terminals 225, 323, 408, 554, 559, 568, 573, 578–579, 582, 585, 629, 1067, 1093, 1107 add associations 559 associations 568 blocks 225 break apart 568 break associations 568 connections 579 copy properties 568 edit 585 edit associations 559 edit database record 629 edit levels 585 edit properties database 629 edit symbol 559 edit type 225 information 225 insert 323, 559 insert multiple 1067 insert panel 323 jumpers 573 list 582 marking 579 modify sequence 225 multi-connection 554 multi-le
used panel tags 302 used schematic tags 301 user data 351 edit 351 User-Defined Attribute List dialog box 1006 user-defined attributes 1005 edit 1005 utilities 82 zip 82 V vault 50 vault drawings 1250 advanced 1250 vault projects 1250 advanced 1250 Vendor Menu Selection dialog box 1058 vendor menus 1031 Vendor Panel Footprint dialog box 1058 vendor part numbers 785 vendor selection 1031 verify changes 700 View/Edit Panel Component Connection Sequence dialog box 1095 W WD_AB icon menu 1031 wd_fam.
copy 514 drawing properties 96, 492, 516 edit 506 erase 521 extra 513 find 501 fixed 506–507 flip 516 format 502 hide 521 increment 519 insert 484, 492 insert special 484 leader 512 make vertical 519 merge 1074 mirror 514, 516 motor circuits 484 move 511–512 panel wiring diagram 1077 plc tags 525 position 492 project properties 96 project-wide 508 replace text 501 reposition 511 reposition leader text 512 rotate 512 show 484 size 519 swap 513 tag 484 toggle 516 wire sequence 1095 wire shields 466 Wire Signa
Z 1292 | Index zip utility 82
